Dokumen - Tips Vista 120120 Cms 22 Draeger 10 Instructions For Use Vista 120vista

Instructions for use
Vista 120/Vista 120S

Vista 120 CMS
WARNING Patient Monitor

To properly use this medical device, Software 3.n
read and comply with these instructions
for use.
Vista 120/Vista 120S

This page intentionally left blank
2 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Screen images
Schematic renderings of screen images are used,

which may differ in appearance or in configuration
from the actual screen images.
Definition of the safety information
WARNING
A WARNING statement provides important
information about a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
A CAUTION statement provides important
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury to the user or patient or in
damage to the medical device or other property.
NOTE
A NOTE provides additional information intended
to avoid inconvenience during operation.
Abbreviations and symbols
For explanations refer to sections “Abbreviations”

and “Symbols” in chapter “Overview”.
Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 3


Contents
Contents
Responsibility of the Manufacturer . . . . . . . 9 Changing monitor settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Responsibility of the Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . 10 Adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Checking the monitor version . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For your safety and that of your patients. . . 11 Networked monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting keyboard languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Product-specific safety information. . . . . . . . . . 15
Understanding screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Protecting Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Calibrating screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Disabling the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using the barcode scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Restrictions for use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Intended user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Alarm categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Selecting alarm tone type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Alarm levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Controlling alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Alarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Physiological alarm information. . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Technical alarm information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Adjustable range of alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Initial inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Managing patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Installing the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Confirming a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connecting the power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Admitting a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Checking the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Quick admit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Checking the strip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Barcode admit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Managing patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Central monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Opening User Maintain Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Setting interface style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Entering Demo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Selecting display parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Entering Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing waveform position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Entering Night mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing interface layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Entering Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Viewing short trend screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Entering NFC mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Viewing OxyCRG screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Selecting lead placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Viewing large font screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Viewing the Bed View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opening the Bed View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Settings of the Bed View Window . . . . . . . . . . 95
Using keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Changing Parameter and Waveform Colors . . 95

Contents
Displaying the timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

NIBP safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Monitoring ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Measurement limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Measurement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ECG safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Operation prompts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ECG display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Correcting the measurement if limb is
Selecting calculation lead. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 not at heart Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Monitoring procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 NIBP Multi-Review Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Selecting lead type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Resetting NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Installing electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Calibrating NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ECG menu setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Leak test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ST segment monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Setting inflation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Arrhythmia monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Assisting Venipuncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ECG leadwires and trunk cables
(New added). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Monitoring TEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Monitoring RESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 TEMP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Selecting TEMP sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
RESP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Switching T1/T2 On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Electrode placement for monitoring resp . . . . . 119 TEMP monitoring setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cardiac overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Calculating temp difference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Chest expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Abdominal breathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Monitoring IBP (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Selecting RESP lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Changing hold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 IBP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Changing the size of the respiration Monitoring procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Selecting a pressure for monitoring. . . . . . . . . 153
Changing the apnea alarm time . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Zeroing the pressure transducer . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Troubleshooting the pressure zeroing
Monitoring SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 (taking Art for example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 IBP calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
SpO2 safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Changing the IBP Waveform Ruler . . . . . . . . . 155
Measuring SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 IBP Waveform Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Measurement limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Measuring PAWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Perfusion Index (PI)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Calculating PPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
SpO2 Alarm Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
SatSeconds Alarm Management* . . . . . . . . . . 129 Monitoring CO2 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Measuring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously . . . 131 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Setting pitch tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 CO2 safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Setting sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Monitoring procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setting CO2 waveform setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Monitoring PR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Setting CO2 corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Setting Apnea Alarm Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Setting PR Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting PR volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Monitoring C.O. (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Selecting the active alarm source . . . . . . . . . . 134 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.O. Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Monitoring NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Contents
C.O. Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Trend graph review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Performing C.O. Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Trend table review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Blood Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 NIBP review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Alarm review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Gas monitoring (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 ARR review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Full disclosure waveform review . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Calculation and titration table . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Drug Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Titration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Monitoring BIS (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Hemodynamic Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Oxygenation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
BIS safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Ventilation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
BIS monitoring setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Renal Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
BIS continuous impedance check . . . . . . . . . . 195
BIS sensor check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Strip recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
BIS sensor window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Changing the BIS smoothing rate. . . . . . . . . . . 197 Performance of the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Switching secondary parameters on and off . . 197 Starting and stopping strip recording. . . . . . . . 227
Changing the scale of the EEG wave. . . . . . . . 198 Recorder operations and status messages . . . 228
Setting the trend length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Switching BIS filters on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Connecting Ventilators/Anesthesia Analog Output and Defibrillator
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Wi-Fi (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Setting the baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Storing Data in the Storage Device . . . . . . . . . 234
Opening the Medibus/X Window . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine Monitoring Using battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Respiratory Loop Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Battery power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Viewing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Battery status on the main screen . . . . . . . . . . 238
Storing and Reviewing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Checking battery performance . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Changing Loops Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Showing/Hiding the Reference Loop . . . . . . . . 203 Recycling the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Resizing the Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Maintaining the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Alarms from Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine. . . 203
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 General points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Entering/exiting freeze status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting freeze duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Reviewing frozen waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Cleaning and Disinfecting Other
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Electromagnetic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Replacing fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Electromagnetic immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Recommended separation distances
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 to portable and mobile RF
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 telecommunication devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
ECG accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
SpO2 accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
NIBP accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Patient information default settings . . . . . . . . . 308
Temp accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Alarm default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
IBP accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ECG default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
CO2 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 RESP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
C.O. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 SpO2 default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
BIS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 PR default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Anesthesia gas accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 NIBP default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Device accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 TEMP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
IBP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 CO2 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 C.O. default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 C.O. default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Device specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine
Function configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Monitoring default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
RESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
IBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
BIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
EMC Declaration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Responsibility of the Manufacturer
Responsibility of the Manufacturer . . . . . . . 10

Dräger only considers itself responsible for any

effect on safety, reliability and performance of the
equipment if:
Assembly operations, extensions, re-adjustments,
modifications or repairs are carried out by persons
authorized by Dräger, and
The electrical installation of the relevant room
complies with national standards, and
The instrument is used in accordance with the
instructions for use.

For your safety and that of your patients
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Strictly follow these instructions for use . . . . . . 12
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Not for use in areas of explosion hazard . . . . . 13
Safe connection with other electrical
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Information on Electromagnetic
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sterile accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installing accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product-specific safety information . . . . . . . 15
Protecting Personal Information. . . . . . . . . . 21
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

General safety information
The following WARNING and CAUTION Maintenance

statements apply to general operation of the
medical device.
WARNING
WARNING and CAUTION statements specific to Risk of medical device failure and of patient
subsystems or particular features of the medical injury
device appear in the respective sections of these
Instructions for Use or in the Instructions for Use of The medical device must be inspected and
another product being used with this device. serviced regularly by service personnel.
Repair and complex maintenance carried out
on the medical device must be performed by
Strictly follow these instructions for use experts.
If the above is not complied with, medical
WARNING device failure and patient injury may occur.
Observe chapter "Maintenance".
Risk of incorrect operation and of incorrect
use Dräger recommends that a service contract is
obtained with DrägerService and that all
Any use of the medical device requires full
repairs are performed by DrägerService. For
understanding and strict observation of all
maintenance Dräger recommends the use of
sections of these instructions for use. The
authentic Dräger repair parts.
medical device must only be used for the
purpose specified under "Intended Use".
Strictly observe all WARNING and CAUTION Accessories
statements throughout these instructions for
use and all statements on medical device
WARNING
labels. Failure to observe these safety
information statements constitutes a use of Risk due to incompatible accessories
the medical device that is inconsistent with its Dräger has tested only the compatibility of
intended use. accessories listed in the chapter
"Accessories".
If other, incompatible accessories are used,
there is a risk of patient injury due to medical
device failure.
Dräger recommends that the medical device is
only used together with accessories listed in
the current list of accessories.

Connected devices Patient safety
WARNING The design of the medical device, the

accompanying documentation, and the labeling on
Risk of electric shock and of device
the medical device are based on the assumption
malfunction
that the purchase and the use of the medical device
Any connected devices or device are restricted to professionals, and that certain
combinations not complying with the inherent characteristics of the medical device are
requirements mentioned in these Instructions known to the user. Instructions and WARNING and
for Use may compromise the correct CAUTION statements are therefore largely limited
functioning of the medical device. Before to the specifics of the Dräger medical device.
operating any combination of devices, refer to
These instructions for use do not contain
and strictly comply with the Instructions for
references to various hazards which are obvious to
Use for all connected devices and device
professionals who operate this medical device as
combinations.
well as references to the consequences of medical
device misuse, and to potentially adverse effects in
WARNING patients with different underlying diseases. Medical
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment device modification or misuse can be dangerous.
must be connected to a supply mains with
protective earth. CAUTION
Risk of patient injury
Do not make therapeutic decisions based solely
Not for use in areas of explosion hazard
on individual measured values and monitoring
parameters.
WARNING
Risk of fire
The medical device is not approved for use in Information on Electromagnetic
areas where combustible or explosive gas Compatibility
mixtures are likely to occur.
General information on electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) according to international EMC
Safe connection with other electrical standard IEC 60601-1-2:
equipment Medical electrical equipment is subject to
special precautionary measures concerning
CAUTION electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and must be
installed and put into operation in accordance with
the EMC information provided in this Instructions
Electrical connections to equipment not listed in for Use.
these Instructions for Use or these Assembly
Portable and mobile RF communications
Instructions must only be made when approved
equipment can affect medical electrical equipment.
by each respective manufacturer.

WARNING Strictly observe Assembly Instructions and

Instructions for Use.
Do not connect connectors with an
ESD warning symbol and do not CAUTION
touch the pins of such connectors
Risk of incorrect use
without implementing ESD
protective measures. Such protective The accessories are not available individually.
measures may include antistatic clothing and Only one copy of the instructions for use is
shoes, touching a ground stud before and included in the bulk package and must therefore
during connection of the pins, or using be kept in a location accessible for users.
electrically insulating and antistatic gloves.
All relevant personnel must be instructed in
these ESD protective measures.
WARNING
Portable RF communications equipment
(including peripherals such as antenna cables
and external antennas) should be used no
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of
Vista 120/Vista 120S, including cables
specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise,
degradation of the performance of this
equipment could occur.
Sterile accessories
CAUTION
Risk of medical device failure and of patient injury
Do not use sterile-packaged accessories if the
packaging has been opened, is damaged, or if
there are other signs of non-sterility.
Single-use accessories must not be reused,
reprocessed, or resterilized.
Installing accessories
CAUTION
Risk of device failure
Install accessories to the basic device in
accordance with the instructions for use of the
basic device. Make sure that there is a safe
connection to the basic device.

Product-specific safety information
WARNING WARNING
Before using Vista 120/Vista 120S, patient When interfacing with other equipment, a test
cables, electrodes etc. should be checked. for leakage current must be performed by
Replacement should be taken if there is any qualified hospital technical personnel before
evident defect or signs of aging which may using with patients.
impair the safety or performance.
WARNING
WARNING During monitoring, if the power supply is off
The power receptacle must be a three-wire and there is no battery for standby, the
grounded outlet. A hospital grade outlet is monitor will be off. The settings configured by
required. Never adapt the three-prong plug the user can be stored, and settings not
from the monitor to fit a two-slot outlet. configured by user keep no change. That is,
the last settings used will be recovered when
WARNING the power is restored.
Route all cables carefully to avoid possible
entanglement, apnea, or electrical WARNING
interference. For the device mounted over the Keep away from fire immediately when
patient, sufficient precautionary measures leakage or foul odor is detected.
should be taken to prevent it from falling on
the patient. WARNING
The device and accessories are to be
WARNING disposed of according to local regulations
Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm after their useful lives. Alternatively, they can
system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of be returned to the dealer or the manufacturer
alarm volume to a low level or off during for recycling or proper disposal. Batteries are
patient monitoring may result in a hazard to hazardous waste. Do NOT dispose them
the patient. Remember that the most reliable together with house-hold garbage. At the end
method of patient monitoring combines close of their life hand the batteries over to the
personal surveillance with correct operation applicable collection points for the recycling
of monitoring equipment. of waste batteries. For more detailed
information about recycling of this product or
WARNING battery, contact the local Dräger sales
Ensure that the volume is properly set up. representative.
When the sound pressure of audible alarm is
below or equivalent to the ambient noise, it WARNING
may be difficult for the operator to distinguish
This equipment is not intended for home
the audio alarm.
usage.

WARNING WARNING
Devices connected to the equipment must The appliance coupler or mains plug is used
meet the requirements of the applicable IEC as isolation means from supply mains.
standards (e.g., IEC 60950 “Safety standards Position the monitor in a location where the
for information technology equipment” and operator can easily access the disconnection
IEC 60601-1 “Safety standards for medical device.
electrical equipment”) The system
configuration must meet the requirements of WARNING
the IEC 60601-1 “Medical electrical systems” Assembly of the monitor and modifications
standard. Any personnel who connect devices during actual service life shall be evaluated
to the equipment’s signal input/output port is based on the requirements of IEC60601-1.
responsible for providing evidence that the
safety certification of the devices has been WARNING
performed in accordance to the IEC 60601-1.
Additional multiple socket-outlets or
extension cords can not be connected to the
WARNING
system.
The operator can not touch the patients or
signal port simultaneously. WARNING
Only items that have been specified as part of
WARNING the system or specified as being compatible
Do not service or maintain the monitor or any with the system can be connected to the
accessory which is in use with the patient. system.
WARNING WARNING
After defibrillation, the ECG display recovers If several items of medical equipment are
within 10 s if the correct electrodes are used interconnected, pay attention to the sum of
and applied based on the manufacturers' the leakage currents, otherwise it may cause
instructions. shock hazard. Consult your service
personnel.
WARNING
The monitor is not intended for use in a WARNING
hyperbaric chamber or an MRI (Magnetic Only recommended batteries can be used for
Resonance Imaging) environment. the monitor.
WARNING WARNING
The alarm log is cleared either when the Without use of data store function, all data
monitor is turned off, or when the monitor is measured (including trend data, review data,
powered down in a finite duration. alarm events and so on) will be cleared either
when the monitor is turned off or when the
WARNING monitor is powered down in the process of
Ensure the current alarm preset is appropriate monitoring.
prior to use on each patient.

WARNING WARNING
Connecting any accessory (such as external The monitor should not be used adjacent to or
printer) or other device (such as the stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or
computer) to this monitor makes a medical stacked use is necessary, the user must check
system. In that case, additional safety that normal operation is possible in the
measures should be taken during installation necessary configuration before starting
of the system, and the system shall provide: monitoring patients.
a) Within the patient environment, a level of
WARNING
safety comparable to that provided by
medical electrical equipment complying Do not touch accessible parts of medical or
with IEC/EN 60601-1, and non-medical electrical equipment in the
patient environment and the patient
b) Outside the patient environment, the simultaneously, such as USB connector, VGA
level of safety appropriate for non- connector or other signal input/output
medical electrical equipment complying connectors.
with other IEC or ISO safety standards.
WARNING
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD - Do not connect electrical
All the accessories connected to system must equipment, which has not been supplied as a
be installed outside the patient vicinity, if they part of the system, to the multiple portable
do not meet the requirement of IEC/EN 60601-1. socket-outlet supplying the system.
WARNING WARNING
The medical electrical equipment needs to be SHOCK HAZARD - Do not connect electrical
installed and put into service according to the equipment, which has been supplied as a part
EMC Information provided in this user of the system, directly to the wall outlet when
manual. the non-medical equipment is intended to be
supplied by a multiple portable socket-outlet
WARNING with an isolation transformer.
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment can affect medical electrical WARNING
equipment, refer to the recommended Operation of the equipment exceeding
separation distances provided in this user specified physiological signal or the
manual. operational specification may cause
inaccurate results.
WARNING
Using accessories other than those specified WARNING
may result in increased electromagnetic The equipment can provide protective means
emission or decreased electromagnetic to prevent the patient from being burned when
immunity of the monitoring equipment. used with HF surgical equipment. The
equipment can protect against the effects of
the discharge of a defibrillator. Use only
Dräger-approved accessories.

WARNING WARNING
To protect the monitor from damage during Devices connecting with monitor should be
defibrillation, for accurate measurement equipotential.
information and to protect against noise and
other interference, use only accessories WARNING
specified by Dräger. If the protective grounding (protective earth)
system is doubtful, the monitor must be
WARNING supplied by internal power only.
When the monitor is used with HF surgical
equipment, avoid conductive connections of WARNING
the transducer and the cables to the HF The monitor is equipped with wireless AP/Wi-Fi
surgical equipment. This is to protect against to receive RF electromagnetic energy.
burns to the patient. Therefore, any other equipment complying
with CISPR radiation requirements may also
WARNING interfere with the wireless communication and
No modification of this equipment is allowed make it interrupted.
without authorization of the manufacturer. If
this equipment is modified, appropriate WARNING
inspection and testing must be conducted to Wireless LAN equipment contains an
ensure continued safe operation. intentional RF radiator that has the potential
of interfering with other medical equipment,
WARNING including patient implanted devices. Be sure
Extreme care must be exercised when to perform the electromagnetic compatibility
applying medical electrical equipment. Many test, as described in the Wireless LAN System
parts of the human/machine circuit are Installation, before installation and any time
conductive, such as the patient, connectors, new medical equipment is added to the
transducers. It is very important that these Wireless LAN coverage area.
conductive parts do not come into contact
with other grounded, conductive parts when WARNING
connected to the isolated patient input of the The packaging is to be disposed of according
device. Such contact would bridge the to local or hospital’s regulations; otherwise, it
patient's isolation and cancel the protection may cause environmental contamination.
provided by the isolated input. In particular, Place the packaging at the place which is
there must be no contact of the neutral inaccessible to children.
electrode and ground.
WARNING
WARNING
Clinical decision making based on the output
Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of of the device is left to the discretion of the
interfering with the proper performance of the provider.
device. For this reason make sure that all
external devices operated in the vicinity of the WARNING
monitor comply with the relevant EMC
The monitor is suitable for use in the presence
requirements. X-ray equipment or MRI devices
of electrosurgery. When the monitor is used
are a possible source of interference as they
with HF surgical equipment, user (doctor or
may emit higher levels of electromagnetic
nurse) should be cautious about patient
radiation.
safety.

WARNING CAUTION
Do not touch the patient, table, or the monitor Electromagnetic Interference - Ensure that the
during defibrillation. environment in which the patient monitor is
installed is not subject to any sources of strong
WARNING electromagnetic interference, such as radio
Make sure networking function is used in a transmitters, mobile telephones, microwaves, etc.
secure network environment.
CAUTION
WARNING Protect the device against mechanical damage
Only patient cable and other accessories resulting from falls, impacts, and vibration.
supplied by Dräger shall be used. The
performance and electric shock protection CAUTION
cannot be guaranteed, and the patient may be A ventilated environment is required for monitor
injured otherwise. Prior to use, check the installation. Do not block up the ventilation grille at
disposable or sterilized accessories for any the back of the device.
sign of damage. Do not use them if any
damage is detected. CAUTION
The device must be connected to the ground to
CAUTION avoid the signal interference.
Do not immerse transducers in liquid. When using
solutions, use sterile wipes to avoid pouring fluids CAUTION
directly on the transducer. Keep the environment clean. Avoid vibration.
Keep it far away from corrosive medicine, dust
CAUTION area, high temperature and humid environment.
Do not use autoclave or gas to sterilize the
monitor, recorder or any accessories. CAUTION
Before connecting the monitor to the AC power,
CAUTION make sure the voltage and the power frequency
Disposable devices are intended for single use are consistent with the requirements indicated on
only. They should not be reused as performance the device label or in this user manual.
could degrade or contamination could occur.
CAUTION
CAUTION Poor connection might be caused by frequently
plugging and unplugging the power cord. Check
Remove a battery whose life cycle has expired
the power cord regularly and replace it in time.
from the monitor immediately.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To protect eyes from damage, don't look directly
Avoid liquid splashing on the device.
into barcode scanner’s light.
CAUTION NOTE
Touchscreen is fragile, be gentle when using it Position the device in a location where the
and avoid using force that may cause damage operator can easily see the screen and access the
to it. operating controls.

NOTE
The monitor can only be used on one patient at a
time.
NOTE
If the monitor gets damp, put it in dry circumstance
to dry it until it can work normally. If liquid pours on
the monitor, contact DrägerService.
NOTE
Do not use this monitor for diagnostic purposes.
NOTE
The pictures and dialog boxes in these Instructions
for Use are for reference only.
NOTE
Regular preventive maintenance should be carried
every two years. The user is responsible for any
requirements specific to their country.
NOTE
When the monitor is connected to CMS, the period
for alarm signal sent to network port is less than
0.5 s.
NOTE
The monitor may not be compatible with all models
of USB flash drives. Use the USB flash drives that
are recommended by Dräger.
NOTE
When there's measurement beyond range, invalid
measurement or no measurement value, it will
display -?-.
NOTE
Where applicable, materials, with which the patient
or third person can come into contact, must be
conforming to standard ISO 10993-1.
NOTE
In normal use, the operator shall stand in front of
the monitor.

Protecting Personal Information
Protecting personal health information is a major CAUTION

component of security strategy. To protect the
Ensure that the monitor is connected only to the
personal information and ensure the proper device
device authorized/approved by Dräger. Users
performance, the user should take necessary
should operate all Dräger deployed and
precautions in accordance with local laws and
supported monitors within Dräger authorized
regulations and institution’s policies. Dräger
specifications, including Dräger approved
recommends health care organizations or medical
software, software configuration, security
institutions to implement a comprehensive and
configuration, etc.
multifaceted strategy to protect the information and
systems from internal and external security threats.
CAUTION
To ensure the patients’ safety and protect their Protect all the passwords to prevent unauthorized
personal health information, the user should changes. Only the manufacturer’s service
implement practices or measures that include: personnel are allowed to modify the Factory
1 Physical safeguards - physical safety measures Maintain settings.
to ensure that unauthorized personnel do not
have access to the monitor. CAUTION
Anti-virus measures such as USB device virus
2 Operational safeguards - safety measures
scanning should be carried out prior to using USB
during operation.
flash drive.
3 Administrative safeguards - safety measures in
management. CAUTION
4 Technical safeguards - safety measures in Firewalls and/or other security devices should be
technical field. in place between the medical system and any
externally accessible systems. It’s recommended
CAUTION to use Windows defender firewall or any other
The access/operation of the monitor/Vista 120 firewall that can defend against DoS and DDoS
CMS is restricted to authorized personnel only. attacks, and keep it up to date.
Assign only staff with a specific role the right to
use the monitor/Vista 120 CMS. CAUTION
DoS and DDoS protection of the router or switch
CAUTION must be turned on for defensing against attacks.
Ensure that all device components maintaining
personal information (other than removable CAUTION
media) are physically secure (i.e. cannot remove To avoid malicious tampering and theft of data
without tools). transmitted by the network, it is recommended to
switch on the encryption function. After the
CAUTION encryption function is turned on (it is set to on by
Ensure that the data are deleted after the patient default), the monitor will authenticate the
is discharged (Refer to Section Deleting data accessed Vista 120 CMS and Gateway devices
stored in the storage device). and encrypt the transmitted data to ensure the
security.

CAUTION
When building the networking environment: 1) If a
wireless router is used, please turn on the MAC
address filtering function of the wireless router
and add the MAC address of the monitor to the
rule list. The wireless router only allows devices in
the rule list to access the wireless network. 2) It is
suggested to build a VLAN, assign the LAN ports
where the approved switch port, monitor and Vista
120 CMS are into the same VLAN, and isolate it
from other VLANs.
CAUTION
When the monitor is returned for maintenance,
disposed of, or removed from the medical
institution for other reasons, it is necessary to
ensure that all patient data are removed from the
monitor (Refer to Section Deleting data stored in
the storage device).
CAUTION
Please protect the privacy for the information and
the data displayed on the screen, and for the
information and the data stored in the monitor.
CAUTION
For security, disable all unused USB and network
ports.
NOTE
Log files generated by the monitor are used for
system troubleshooting and do not contain
protected medical data.

Security
For more security operations, select Menu > User

Maintain and input user maintain password >
Security. In this menu:
 Select User Password > Modify to enter
Modify User Password submenu, the user can
change the password according to the prompts.
For safety considerations, change the
password periodically, and a combination of
words and numbers is recommended. If Old
Password is forgotten, contact DrägerService.
NOTE
When the monitor is turned on for the first time,
modify the User Maintain password according to
the prompts. The default initial User Maintain
password can be found in Section Passwords.
 Set Firewall to On to protect against hacker

attacking.
 Click Firewall Rules to check rule details.
 Set Packets Limit value for traffic monitoring. If
the data traffic per minute exceeds the
threshold, the monitor will trigger the alarm to
remind the user.
 Set CMS/Gateway Encryption to Off or AES
(default) when user connects the monitor with
network server (Vista 120 CMS or gateway).
 Set HL7 to On/Off. The monitor supports HL7
protocol to upload data. To avoid hacker
attacking, setting HL7 to Off is normally
recommended.
User can also set HL7 IP address of client-side
in User Maintain > Network Maintain.


Application
Application
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Restrictions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Intended user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Application
Intended use
The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120, The monitor is intended to be used only under
Vista 120S), hereafter called the monitor, are regular supervision of clinical personnel. It is
intended to monitor multiple parameters including applicable to adult, pediatric, and neonatal usage in
ECG (3-lead or 5-lead selectable), respiration a hospital environment and during patient transport
(RESP), functional arterial oxygen saturation inside a healthcare facility.
(SpO2), invasive or non-invasive blood pressure
The arrhythmia detection, ST Segment analysis
(IBP, NIBP), temperature (dual-TEMP), end-tidal
and BIS are intended for adult and pediatric
CO2, Cardiac Output (C.O.), AG and bispectral
patients.
index (BIS). BIS is only applicable to Vista 120.
The monitor and AG module are suitable for use
within the patient environment.
Restrictions for use
CAUTION
Device is for use in health care facilities only and
exclusively by persons with specific training and
experience in its use.
Intended user
Users of this device must be trained and

experienced medical professionals.

Overview
Overview
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Back view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Overview
Overview
The monitor is optimized for surgical, cardiac, Vista 120 has a 15-inch TFT color flat panel display,
medical and neonatal care environments, and can and Vista 120S has a 12.1-inch TFT color flat panel
store data for both trends and events. The user can display. Up to 13 waveforms for Vista 120 and 11
also view and record graphical and tabular trends waveforms for Vista 120S can be displayed on the
(vital signs). screen.
Front view
Front view of Vista 120 is the same as that of Vista

120S, thus take Vista 120 as an example:
B
C
D
E
F
G

Overview
A Alarm indicator When an alarm occurs, the alarm indicator will light or flash. The alarm level is
color coded.
B Audio Pause/ Upon the configuration, pressing this button to pause or turn off the audio alarm.
Audio Off Further information can be found in the chapter "Audio Alarm Paused"and
chapter "Audio Alarm Off".
C NIBP Press to inflate the cuff and perform NIBP measurement. Press again to stop the
measurement measurement and deflate the cuff.
D Trend Press this button to enter trend table review dialog box.
E Freeze In normal mode, press this button to freeze all the waveforms on the screen. In
Freeze mode, press this button to restore the waveform refreshing.
F Recording Press this button to start a real-time recording. Press again to stop recording.
G Menu Press this button to open the main menu when there is no menu open. Press it
again to exit.
H Rotary knob The user can turn the rotary knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to highlight the
desired item. Press the rotary knob to select the item.
I Mains/Battery Refer to chapter “Battery power indicator” for details.
indicator
J On/Off When connected to the AC power supply, press the key to turn the monitor on.
Press the key again to turn the monitor off.

Overview
Side view
Vista 120
A ECG port
B BIS port (Optional)
C Dräger SpO2 port
D T1 and T2 port
E IBP1, IBP2 and IBP3 ports (Optional)
F NIBP port
G Nellcor SpO2 port (Optional)
H etCO2 port (Optional)
I C.O. port (Optional)
J Recorder (Optional)
K Battery compartment door
L Dräger G2 module holder (Optional)

Overview
Vista 120S
A NIBP port
B ECG port
C T1 and T2 ports
D SpO2 port
E IBP1, IBP2 and IBP3 ports (Optional)
F etCO2 port (Optional)
G C.O. port (Optional)
H Recorder (Optional)
I Battery compartment door
J Dräger G2 module holder (Optional)
NOTE
The side view above is for demonstration. The port distribution on the monitor depends on the monitor
configuration and on the options purchased and may deviate from the side view.
NOTE
To avoid blocking and affecting NIBP measurement, the user can open the battery compartment door to
clean the dustproof vent periodically. Do not use wet cotton swab to clean the vent. If NIBP measurement
is still affected after cleaning, contact DrägerService.

Overview
Back view
Vista 120

Overview
Vista 120S
A Speaker
B Equipotential grounding terminal. If the monitor is used with other devices, connect this terminal to
eliminate potential ground differences between devices.
C Power cord safety latch. Used to prevent the power cord from detaching. Place the latch on the
power cord and press it down firmly to ensure that it secures the power cord.
D Ventilation grid
E Anti-theft lock
F Medibus/X interface
G RJ45 network interface
H Nurse call port/ analog output/ defibrillator synchronization.
Nurse call port: it connects the monitor to the hospital’s nurse call system. Alarms indications are
alerted through the nurse call system if configured to do so.
Analog output: the monitor outputs the waveform through the port.
Defibrillator synchronization: the monitor outputs the defibrillator synchronization signal through
the port.
I USB interfaces. They are used to connect the USB device.
J VGA output
K AG Scio module interface

Overview
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

AC Alternating current FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon
Adu Adult dioxide
AG Anaesthesia gas Hb Hemoglobin
AHA American Heart Association Hb-CO Carboxyhemoglobin
Art Arterial HR Heart rate
aVF Left foot augmented lead IBP Invasive blood pressure
aVL Left arm augmented lead ICP Intracranial pressure
aVR Right arm augmented lead ICU Intensive care unit
awRR Airway respiration rate ID Identification
BP Blood pressure IEC International Electrotechnical

Commission
BTPS Body temperature and pressure,
saturated IEEE Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers
C.O. Cardiac output
LA Left arm
CI Cardiac index
LAP Left atrial pressure
CISPR International Special Committee
on Radio Interference LCD Liquid crystal display
CO2 Carbon dioxide LED Light emitting diode
COHb Carboxyhemoglobin LL Left leg
CVP Central venous pressure MAP Mean arterial pressure
DC Direct current MDD Medical Device Directive
DDoS Distributed Denial of Service MetHb Methemoglobin
Dia Diastolic N/A Not applicable
DoS Denial of Service Neo Neonate
ECG Electrocardiogram NIBP Non-invasive blood pressure
EEC European Economic Community O2 Oxygen
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility OxyCRG Oxygen cardio-respirogram
EMI Electromagnetic interference PA Pulmonary artery
ESU Electrosurgical unit PAWP Pulmonary artery wedge pressure
et End-tidal Ped Pediatric
etCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide Pleth Plethysmogram
FCC Federal Communication PR Pulse rate

Commission PVC Premature ventricular complex

Overview
Abbreviation Explanation
R Right
RA Right arm
RAP Right atrial pressure
RESP Respiration
RHb Reduced hemoglobin
RL Right leg
RR Respiration rate
SYS Systolic pressure
TB Blood Temperature
TD Temperature difference
TEMP Temperature
USB Universal serial bus
Symbols
Audio Pause USB port
NIBP measurement RS232 port
Trend graph VGA output, external monitor
Freeze Signal output port
Recording Defibrillator synchronization port
Menu Nurse call port

Overview
Protection class type CF

Anti-theft lock
(defibrillation-protected)
Defibrillation-proof type BF
Battery indicator
applied part
Mains indicator Alternating current
Power supply switch Serial number
Equipotential bonding Disposal instructions
Caution Recycle
Network port Part number
Manufacturer Date of manufacture
Consult Instructions for Use Follow Instructions for Use
Ingress Protection: IPX1

(protected against vertically Do not reuse
falling water drops)
Batch code Quantity
Temperature limitation Non-sterile
Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure

Overview
This way up Fragile, handle with care
Keep dry Stacking limit by number
Handle with care Do not step on


Getting started
Getting started
Initial inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installing the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Installing the monitor on a flat surface . . . . . . . 40
Installing the monitor on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installing the monitor on a roll stand/trolley . . . 40
Connecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking the monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Checking the strip recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting the date and time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Getting started
Initial inspection
Before unpacking, check the packaging and check Open the package carefully and remove the
that there are no signs of mishandling or damage. monitor and accessories. Check that all correct
If the shipping cartons are damaged, contact the options and accessories are included.
local supplier for assistance.
If the user has any question, contact the local
supplier.
Installing the monitor
Installing the monitor on a flat surface Installing the monitor on a roll

stand/trolley
Place the monitor on a flat surface. Make sure the
surface does not vibrate and is free of corrosive An Assembling Instruction will be delivered with the
medicine and dust. roll stand/trolley. Refer to that Assembly Instruction
for details of installing the monitor on a roll
stand/trolley.
Installing the monitor on a wall
WARNING
Refer to Wall-Mounting Bracket Assembly Introduce regular checks of the mounting
Instruction. integrity depending on the local environment.
Connecting the power cord
1 Make sure the AC power supply complies with

the following specifications: 100 V to 240 V~,
50 Hz/60 Hz.
2 Connect the power cord provided with the
monitor to the power input of the monitor.
Connect the other end of the power cord to a
grounded 3-pin power output.

Getting started
Checking the monitor
Make sure there is no damage to the measurement NOTE

accessories and cables. Turn on the monitor and
Check that all monitor functions are operating
verify that the monitor starts normally. Make sure all
correctly.
alarm lamps light up and the alarm sound is heard
when turning on the monitor. Refer to the chapter
“Testing alarms”. NOTE
If rechargeable batteries were provided, charge
WARNING them each time before using the device to ensure
Do not use the device if any damage is adequate power.
detected or if the monitor displays error
messages. Contact the hospital technical NOTE
personnel or Customer Service Center After long-time continuous running, please restart
immediately. the monitor to ensure the monitor’s steady
performance and long lifespan.
Checking the strip recorder
If the monitor is equipped with a strip recorder,

verify that paper is properly installed in the strip
recorder by opening the strip recorder's door. Refer
to the chapter “Recording” for details regarding
installing paper.
Setting the date and time
To set the date and time: NOTE

1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > If the system time cannot be saved and resumes
Date/Time Setup. the default value after restart, contact
DrägerService to replace the button cell in main
2 Adjust the date display format as desired.
board.
3 Set the correct time of Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Min and Sec
NOTE
If the system is not used for a long period of time,
its system time may be inaccurate. In this case,
readjust the system time after powering on.


System configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Opening User Maintain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Entering Demo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Entering Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Entering Night mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Entering Privacy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Entering NFC mode*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting lead placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Overview
The user can not change the system configuration

of the monitor. After the monitor is installed and
checked properly, a service engineer needs to
change the system configuration.
Opening User Maintain Menu
1 Select the Menu item on the main interface. 3 Type the password into the displayed dialog box
and press OK to enter the User Maintain
2 Select Maintenance > User Maintain.
menu.
Entering Demo mode
WARNING After entering the Demo Mode, the monitor will

perform the following:
The Demo Mode is for demonstration
purposes only. The user must not change to  Stops detecting alarms and generating alarm
Demo Mode during patient monitoring. In signals.
Demo Mode, all stored trend information is
 Stops storing data and clears previously stored
deleted from the monitor's memory.
data from memory.
To change from operating mode to demo mode:  All real-time data and historical data are
simulated rather than actual patient data.
1 Select Menu > Common Function > Demo
Mode from the pop-up dialog box. To exit the Demo Mode, select Menu > Common
Function > Demo Mode.
2 Type the password into the displayed dialog
box.
Entering Standby mode
To enter into standby mode, select Menu >

Common Function > Standby, or press the
shortcut key on the screen directly, the monitor
enters into standby mode after user’s confirmation.

In standby mode: The monitor exits standby mode in any of the

conditions:
1 The monitor stops monitoring patients and
stores previous monitoring data. 1 The user clicks anywhere on the screen or
presses any key (except Power ON/OFF key).
2 The monitor won’t respond to all alarms and
prompts, except Battery Low alarm. 2 Battery Low alarm occurs.
3 Audio alarm paused status discontinues. Audio 3 The monitor is connected to Vista 120 CMS.
alarm off, alarm off, alarm reset and alarm latch
After exiting standby mode, the monitor resumes
status are not influenced.
monitoring, including parameter monitoring,
4 All recording and printing tasks will stop. storage and alarm; users need to press Record
button to restart recording.
5 CMS won’t update monitoring data, and will
display monitor's standby mode. If network is
NOTE
disconnected, monitor will make request for
connection. The monitor is unable to enter into standby mode
when exporting data.
Entering Night mode
To switch to night mode, you may:

NOTE
1 Select the shortcut key on the main screen, In night mode, the sound of key, heart beat and
or pulse is muted; the alarm volume, reminder
2 Select Menu > Common Function > Night volume and screen brightness are down to their
Mode. minimum; the settings including key volume, beat
volume, PR volume, alarm volume, reminder
volume and screen brightness are unavailable.
Entering Privacy mode
Only if the monitor is connected and admitted by 1 The screen displays message: Privacy mode
Vista 120 CMS, the privacy mode can be activated. and Patient monitored without audio and
To enter into privacy mode, you can select Menu > visual alarms. Please click on screen or hard
Maintenance > User Maintain > Shortcut Setup key to exit.
> Privacy Mode (off by default). Press the shortcut
2 Monitoring data, alarm information, stored data
key on the screen, the monitor enters into
and monitor status are transmitted to Vista 120
privacy mode after user’s confirmation.
CMS.
In privacy mode:
3 Audio alarm paused status discontinues. Audio
alarm off, alarm off, alarm reset and alarm latch
status are not influenced.

The monitor exits privacy mode under any of the 3 The monitor is disconnected with Vista 120
conditions: CMS.
1 The user clicks anywhere on the screen or NOTE
presses any key (except Power ON/OFF key).
The monitor is unable to enter into privacy mode
2 Battery Low alarm occurs. when exporting data.
Entering NFC mode*
* This is for French users only and NFC has nothing 5 Symbol is displayed in the HR parameter
to do with "Near Field Communication". area.
NFC mode means HR physiological alarms can't be 6 Monitoring data, alarm information, stored data
turned off. To configure NFC mode, select Menu > and monitor status are transmitted to Vista 120
Maintenance > User Maintain > Alarm Setup and CMS.
choose NFC Mode which can be set to On or Off.
NFC mode is off by default. NOTE
In NFC mode: NFC mode and standby mode can't coexist. When
1 The HR physiological alarms are always on and the monitor enters the standby mode, the NFC
mode will automatically pause. After exiting the
can't be set to off by the user.
standby mode, the monitor will automatically
2 The user can't turn off the audio alarm resume the NFC mode.
permanently.
After exiting NFC mode:
3 The audio alarm off status will be finished and
the monitor enters normal alarm response 1 The HR physiological alarms are still on and
status. Pause Time will automatically switch to can be set to off by the user.
120 s, which can be set to 60 s, 120 s, or 180 s
2 Pause Time keeps no change and the user can
manually.
set it to Permanent.
4 The audio alarm paused status before entering
3 Symbol gets disappeared.
NFC mode is not affected.
Selecting lead placement
ECG lead names have two styles: American

standard (AHA) and European standard (IEC).
To set the correct style:
1 Select User Maintain > Electrode setup.
2 Select AHA or IEC from the list and press the
knob to confirm the selection.

Operation
Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Permanent keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Hardkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Pop-up keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Changing monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Adjusting screen brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Changing date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting key volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting beat volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Checking the monitor version. . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Networked monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting languages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting keyboard languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Understanding screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Calibrating screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Disabling the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the barcode scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Operation
Overview
The user may frequently use the follow functions: Everything the user needs to operate the monitor is
displayed on its screen. Nearly every element on
• ECG monitoring (Refer to chapter “Monitoring
the screen is interactive. Screen elements include
ECG” for more information.)
measurement numerics, waveforms, screen keys,
• SpO2 monitoring (Refer to chapter “Monitoring information fields, alarms fields and menus. The
SpO2” for more information) monitor can be configured in a number of different
ways. For example, the user can access an item
• PR monitoring (Refer to chapter “Monitoring PR”
through the on-screen setup menu, via a hard key,
for more information.)
or via a shortcut key. This Instructions for Use
• NIBP monitoring (Refer to chapter “Monitoring describes how to access items via an on-screen
NIBP” for more information.) menu.
• Alarm (Refer to chapter “Alarms” for more
information.)

Operation
A Department J Date and time

B Bed number K Network status
C Patient name L Battery status symbol
D Patient type M AC power supply symbol
E Alarm status area N Shortcut key area
F Alarm off O Scroll left to display more shortcut keys
G Measurement value P Alarm reset key
H Menu Q Parameter waveform
I Scroll right to display more shortcut keys
Using keys
The monitor has four different types of keys. If the

key sound is enabled, the monitor gives a normal
key sound when the operation is valid. Admit a patient
Permanent keys
Review the trend table
A permanent key is a graphical key that is
permanently located at the bottom of the main
screen allowing fast, direct access to functions.
Access the NIBP review
Display the main setup

Menu
menu
Switch to the standard screen
Cease alarm signal for
Alarm reset which no associated alarm
condition currently exists Switch to the OxyCRG screen
Shortcut keys Set the module switch
A shortcut key is a configurable graphical key

located at the bottom of the main screen. It gives Adjust the screen brightness
the user direct access to functions. The selection
of shortcut keys available on the monitor depends
on the monitor configuration and options Zero the IBP sensor
purchased. You can adjust the shortcut key
sequence as need. The following functions are
available:

Operation
Hardkeys
Change the beat volume
Hardkeys are the physical keys on the front panel
of the monitor. The monitor has the following
View Medibus/X window hardkeys: Mute, NIBP, Trend, Freeze, Recording,
and Menu. Refer also to the chapter “Front view”.
Review the trend graph

Pop-up keys
Pop-up keys are task-related graphical keys that

Review the alarm event
appear automatically on the screen when required.
For example, the confirmation pop-up key appears
only when the user needs to confirm a change.
Access the ARR review
Switch to the trend screen
Switch to the large font screen
Change the key volume
Enter standby mode
Alarm setup
Enter night mode
Bed View
Enter privacy mode

Operation
Changing monitor settings
Adjusting screen brightness The monitor can be configured with lower

brightness in standby mode and also for transport
To change the screen brightness: to conserve battery power.
1 Select the shortcut key on the screen
directly, or.
Changing date and time
2 Select Menu > Common Function >
Brightness, and select the appropriate setting To change the date and time, refer to chapter
for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, 1 “Setting the date and time”.
is the least bright.
WARNING
Changing date and time will affect the storage
of trend data.
Adjusting volume
Adjusting key volume 1 Select the shortcut key on the screen

directly, or
The key volume is audible when the user selects 2 Select Menu > Alarm Setup > AlarmVolume,
any field on the monitor screen or when the user and select the desired setting.
turns the knob. To adjust the key volume:
directly or Adjusting beat volume
2 Select Menu > System Setup > Key Volume,
Beat volume is from HR or PR, depending on the
then select the appropriate setting: five bars
setting of the beat source. To change the beat
represent the maximum volume and one bar
volume:
represents the minimum volume. If none of bars
are selected, the key volume will be off. 1 Select the shortcut key on the screen
directly, or
2 Select ECG Setup > Beat Volume, then select
Adjusting alarm volume the appropriate setting for the beat volume: five
bars represent the maximum volume and one
The monitor provides five levels of alarm volume: bar represents the minimum volume. If none of
five bars represent the maximum volume and one bars are selected, the beat volume will be off.
bar represents the minimum volume. Beat frequency has positive correlation with
To change the alarm volume: measurement value.

Operation
Checking the monitor version
To check the monitor version, select Menu >

Common Function > About to check the monitor
revision menu.
Networked monitoring
Your monitor can be connected to the wired NOTE

network and the wireless network. If the monitor is
When selecting dynamic IP mode, please check
networked, a network symbol is displayed on the
the IP address from Vista 120 CMS.
screen.
NOTE
Be aware that some network-based functions may
be limited for monitors on wireless networks in
comparison to those on wired networks.
Setting languages
To change the language: 3 Select the desired language from the list.
To make the change permanent, restart the
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain,
monitor.
then type the maintenance password into the
displayed dialog box.
2 Select the Language option on the pop-up
dialog box to display the language list.
Setting keyboard languages
The monitor is equipped with Chinese keyboard,

English keyboard and Russian keyboard. To
change the keyboard language, select Menu >
Maintenance > User Maintain > Keyboard
Language, then select the desired language from
the list. To make the change permanent, restart the
monitor.

Operation
Understanding screens
The monitor has a set of preconfigured screens, monitoring. Screens do not affect alarm settings,
which are optimized for common monitoring patient category etc. If the user changes from a
scenarios such as OR adult or ICU neonatal. A complex to a less complex screen layout, some
screen defines the overall selection, size and measurements may not be visible but are still
position of waveforms, numerics and shortcut keys monitored in the background. For detailed
displayed when the user starts the monitor. The information, refer to chapter “User Interface”.
user can switch between different screens during
Calibrating screens
To calibrate the screen:

NOTE
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, If calibration file is lost or damaged, the monitor will
then type the maintenance password into the automatically enter into screen calibration
displayed dialog box, then select TouchScr interface.
Calibration from the pop-up dialog box.
2 The symbol appears on the screen. NOTE
3 Click the center of the symbol . In the screen calibration interface, the screen turns
gray and no measurement data can be displayed.
Disabling the touch screen
The user can disable touch screen operation by

will be displayed at the bottom of screen. To
selecting and holding the permanent key for enable the touch screen operation, select the
3 s. A message of Screen Locked and the symbol
symbol by using the knob.
Using the barcode scanner
To enter the barcode setup menu, please select User can also check relevant scanner device
Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain. After information in User Maintain > Scanner
entering the required password, select Other Management.
Setups > BarCode Setup. Then the user can set
MRN, last name, first name and so on.

Operation
If the scanner is connected for the first time, the

monitor will pop up a confirmation message to ask
user whether the new USB device is added as
scanner. Choose Yes to add as scanner, choose
No to add as USB device.
NOTE
Read the user manual of barcode scanner
carefully prior to use.
NOTE
The start and end code should be set before using
scanner to update patient, otherwise the barcode
can’t be recognized correctly. After setting start
and end code, user should also set male code and
female code to distinguish the gender.

Alarms
Alarms
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Alarm categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Physiological alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Technical alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting alarm tone type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Alarm levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Controlling alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching the individual alarm off . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Audio alarm paused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Audio alarm off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Alarm reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Latching alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Disabling Sensor Off Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Network Disconnected Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Testing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Alarms
Overview
WARNING
A potential hazard can exist if different alarm
presets are used for the same or similar
equipment in different areas, e.g., an intensive
care unit or a cardiac operating room.
Alarm categories
The monitor has physiological, technical, and Technical alarms

prompt alarms.
If, for example, the device has a low battery or
defective lead the monitor will initiate a technical
Physiological alarms alarm. Technical alarms cannot be disabled. For
more information, refer to chapter “Technical Alarm
If one or more physiological parameters monitoring Information”.
the patient exceed the predefined alarm limit (for
example: APNEA and SpO2 value exceed the
alarm limit), the monitor alarms. For more Prompts
information, refer to chapter “Physiological alarm
information”. The device monitors processes and other
functions, such as: ARR Relearning. For more
information, refer to chapter “Prompts”.
Selecting alarm tone type
The user can select the alarm tone type as desired.

and enter the required password.
2 Select Alarm Setup, and set Alarm Tone to
Standard or Mode 1.
 Standard: Standard alarm sound
according to IEC 60601-1-8.
 Mode 1: User customized alarm sound
according to clinical applications.

Alarms
Alarm levels
There are three alarm levels consisting of high, 3 Low level alarms
medium, and low. A low level alarm reminds the operator of a low
priority alarm condition which requires
1 High level alarms
response. And the response time for a low
A high level alarm intensively warns the
priority alarm condition can be greater than that
operator of a high priority alarm condition which
for a medium priority alarm condition. Failure to
requires immediate operator response. Failure
respond to the cause of the alarm condition is
to respond to the cause of the alarm condition is
likely to result in discomfort or reversible minor
likely to result in death or irreversible injury of
injury of the patient.
the patient.
The high/medium/low-level alarms have the
2 Medium level alarms
following audible characteristics:
A medium level alarm warns the operator of a
medium priority alarm condition which requires
prompt operator response. Failure to respond to
the cause of the alarm condition is likely to
result in reversible injury of the patient.
Standard
Alarm level Prompt Physiological alarms Technical alarms

High Mode is “DO-DO-DO------ The alarm indicator flashes The alarm indicator flashes
DO-DO, DO-DO-DO------ in red, with a frequency of in red. The alarm message
DO-DO”, which is triggered 1.4Hz ~ 2.8Hz.The alarm flashes with red
once every 10 s. message flashes with red background, and the
background, and the symbol *** is displayed at
symbol *** is displayed at the alarm area.
the alarm area.
Medium Mode is “DO-DO-DO”, The alarm indicator flashes The alarm indicator flashes
which is triggered once in yellow, with a frequency of in yellow. The alarm
every 25 s. 0.4Hz ~ 0.8Hz. The alarm message flashes with
message flashes with yellow yellow background, and the
background, and the symbol ** is displayed at the
symbol ** is displayed at the alarm area.
alarm area.
Low Mode is “DO-”, which is The alarm indicator is The alarm indicator is
triggered once every 30 s. constantly yellow. The alarm constantly blue. The alarm
message flashes with yellow message flashes with yellow
background, and the background, and the
symbol * is displayed at the symbol * is displayed at the
alarm area. alarm area.

Alarms
Mode 1
Alarm level Prompt
High Mode is “Di-Di-Di------Di-Di”, which is triggered once every 10 s. The alarm indicator
flashes in red, with frequency of 1.4 Hz ~ 2.8 Hz. The alarm message flashes with
red background, and the symbol *** is displayed at the alarm area.
Medium Mode is “Di-Di-Di”, which is triggered once every 25 s. The alarm indicator flashes
in yellow, with frequency of 0.4 Hz ~ 0.8 Hz. The alarm message flashes with yellow
background, and the symbol ** is displayed at the alarm area.
Low Mode is “Di-”, which is triggered once every 30 s. When physiological alarm is
triggered, the alarm indicator is constantly yellow. While for technical alarm, the
alarm indicator is constantly blue. The alarm message flashes with yellow
background, and the symbol * is displayed at the alarm area.
The sound pressure range for standard audible The parameter area has two flash methods to
alarm signals is from 45 dB to 85 dB, and for Mode prompt alarms: background flash and text flash.
1 is from 30 dB to 85 dB. User can select one method from Menu > Alarm
Setup > Visual Effect:
When different level alarms occur at the same time,
alarm sound and alarm indicator prompt the highest 1 Text Flash: text flashes with frequency of 1 Hz.
level alarm, alarm messages display in turn.
2 Background Flash: background flashes with
frequency of 1 Hz.
Controlling alarm
Switching the individual alarm off Audio alarm paused
To switch the alarm off, If the monitor is in audio alarm paused status, the
monitor will:
1 Select the parameter area, open the XX Setup
menu (XX stands for parameter name). Select  Not generate an auditory alarm signal.
Alarm Setup > Switch to toggle between On or
 Visually display alarm information.
Off, or
2 Use the shortcut key or select Menu >
The audio alarm paused symbol is displayed
Alarm Setup, and then click Alarm Options >
and the remaining pause time is displayed on a red
Switch to toggle between On or Off.
colored background.
When alarm switch is off, the parameter alarm off
The user can set the pause time as desired. The
icon will be displayed in the corresponding default pause time is 120 s.
parameter area.

Alarms
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, Alarm reset

and enter the required password.
2 Select Alarm Setup, and set Pause Time to Select the shortcut key Alarm Reset on
60 s, 120 s, or 180 s. the screen directly. When the alarm is reset.
 No alarms are sounding until a new alarm
Press the hardkey to pause the audio alarm. If
occurs.
the user presses the button again or if the pause
time ends, the system will resume normal  As for the active alarms, the visual alarm
monitoring status and the Audio Alarm indications are still displayed.
Paused **s and icon will clear.  All latching alarms are cleared. If the alarm
Pressing or holding the button again resumes the condition is no longer present, all alarm
alarm. indications stop and the alarm is reset.
WARNING  It will not influence the configuration of

physiological alarm off, audio paused, and
If a new alarm occurs during the audio alarm
audio off status.
paused period, the new alarm will not be
sounding.
WARNING
If a new alarm occurs after the alarm is reset,
Audio alarm off the new alarm will be sounding.
Set Pause Time to Permanent, press hardkey

Setting alarm limits
, the monitor displays information: please
confirm whether to activate audio alarm off WARNING
function? Click Yes, the monitor will enter into Prior to monitoring, make sure that the alarm
audio alarm off status. Click No, the monitor will limit settings are appropriate for the patient.
keep current status.
 The audio alarm is turned off, and no alarms are WARNING
sounding. Setting alarm limits to extreme values may
 The visual alarm indications are still displayed. cause the alarm system to become ineffective.
It is recommended to use the default settings.
Remind signal: Audio alarm off symbol and To change individual measurement alarm limits:
Audio Alarm off on a red colored background are
displayed with an interval of 2 s when the monitor is 1 Select the parameter area, and open the XX
in audio alarm off status. Setup menu (XX stands for parameter name).
Select Alarm Setup to set the alarm limit to the
desired value from the pop-up dialog box, or
Pressing the hardkey again can resume the
audio alarm. 2 Use the shortcut key or select Menu >
Alarm Setup, and then click Alarm Options to
WARNING set the alarm limit to the desired value from the
If a new alarm occurs during the audio alarm pop-up dialog box.
off period, the new alarm will not be sounding.

Alarms
Upper arrow High

or lower Alarm Limit
arrow to
increase or
decrease the
alarm limit
Setting value
of high alarm
limit
Low
Alarm Limit
Setting value
of low alarm
limit
Latching alarms
pressing the hardkey or permanent key
To configure the alarm latching setting, select
Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Alarm
the user can disable the audio alarm
Setup and choose Alarm Latch which can be set
to On or Off. When it is set to Off, alarm indications signal, however, the visual alarm indications are
end when the alarm condition ends. When it is set still displayed. If it is set to Off, and a sensor off
to On, the visual and audio alarm indications are
alarm occurs, after pressing the hardkey or
still displayed after the alarm condition ends;
meanwhile, the alarm time is also displayed for the
latched alarm for reference. The indication lasts permanent key , sensor-off status will be
until the alarm is acknowledged. announced with a prompt message. It means
there’s no audio alarm signal and alarm indicator,
but prompt information displayed.
The user can use the permanent key on
the screen to acknowledge the lated alarm. In Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain > Alarm
Setup, SpO2 Sensor Off and ECG Lead Off alarm
level can be adjusted as High, Med. or Low. These
Disabling Sensor Off Alarms alarm levels are set to Low by default.
To set sensor off alarm, select Menu >

Maintenance > User Maintain and enter the
required password. Then select Alarm Setup and
set Sensor Off Alm from the pull-down list. If it is
set to On, and a sensor off alarm occurs, after

Alarms
Network Disconnected Alarms
To configure the network disconnected alarms,

select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain >
Alarm Setup and choose Disconnect Alarm
which can be set to On or Off. The alarm is off by
default.
NOTE
When the monitor is connected with the central
monitoring system, the user must set Disconnect
Alarm to On.
NOTE
If Disconnect Alarm occurs during audio alarm
paused or audio alarm off status, the monitor will
prompt a sounding alarm with information of
NetWork Disconnect. During the network
disconnected status, activating audio alarm
paused or audio alarm off function can disable the
audio alarm signal of Disconnect Alarm.
Testing alarms
When the user switches the monitor on, the monitor

will prompt a “Di” tone that means the audio in
selftest is normal. Meantime, you must check that
the alarm indicator lights are normal. This indicates
that the visible and auditory alarm indicators are
functioning correctly. For further testing of
individual measurement alarms, perform the
measurement on a subject or use a simulator. If
necessary, adjust the alarm limits and check that
the system is operating correctly.
NOTE
The patient monitor will reboot in 3 s due to self-
test failure.


Alarm information
Alarm information
Physiological alarm information . . . . . . . . . . 64
Technical alarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Adjustable range of alarm limits . . . . . . . . . 82

Alarm information
Physiological alarm information
WARNING
The physiological alarms including Asystole,
RESP APNEA, SpO2 No Pulse, CO2 APNEA,
AG FiO2 Low, and AG APNEA cannot be
turned off.
Message Cause Alarm level

ECG
HR High HR value is above the upper alarm limit. User-selectable
HR Low HR value is below the lower alarm limit. User-selectable
ST-X high ST measuring value is above the upper alarm limit. (X stands User-selectable
for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V)
ST-X low ST measuring value is below the lower alarm limit.(X stands User-selectable
for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V)
The measurement value of PVCs is greater than high alarm
PVCs High User-selectable
limit that has been set.
Asystole No QRS is detected for 4 consecutive seconds. High
V-Fib/V-Tach 4 consecutive seconds' fibrillation wave occurs; Or 5 High

consecutive ventricular beats, and ventricular HR ≥ 100 bpm.
Run PVCs 3 ≤ the number of consecutive PVCs < 5 User-selectable
Couplet 2 consecutive PVCs User-selectable
PVC Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V (N = supraventricular beat, V User-selectable

= ventricular beat) was detected.
PVC Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N,V User-selectable
R on T A type of single PVC under the condition that HR<100, R-R User-selectable
interval is less than 1/3 the average interval, followed by a
compensating pause of 1.25X the average R-R interval (the
next R wave advances onto the previous T wave).
PVC Single PVC detected in normal heartbeats, and the number of User-selectable
single PVC ≥ 4 within 30 s.
Tachy Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≤ 0.5 s. User-selectable

Pediatric/neonatal: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS
complex ≤ 0.375 s.

Alarm information
Brady Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≥ 1.5 s. User-selectable

complex ≥ 1 s.
Missed Beat If HR < 120 bpm, no beats are detected for 1.75 times average User-selectable
RR interval; or if HR ≥ 120 bpm, no beats are detected for one
second; or no valid QRS wave is detected within 3 s or longer.
Irr Rhythm Consistently irregular heart rhythm. User-selectable
Pacer not No QRS complex detected in 300ms after a pace pulse. User-selectable
Capture
Pacer not No pace pulse detected in 1.75 times RR interval after a QRS User-selectable
Pacing complex.
Vent Brady 5 consecutive ventricular beats, and ventricular HR < 40 bpm. High
Vent Rhythm 5 consecutive ventricular beats, and 40 bpm ≤ ventricular HR User-selectable

< 100 bpm.
RESP
RESP APNEA RESP waveform can not be detected within the set apnea High
alarm delay time.
RR High RR value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
RR Low RR value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
SpO2
SpO2 High SpO2 value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
SpO2 Low SpO2 value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
SpO2 No Pulse The signal of the measurement site is too weak due to High
insufficient blood supply and environmental factors, so the
monitor can not detect the pulse signal.
SpO2 Desat SpO2 measuring value is below the SpO2 Desat Limit. High
PR
PR High PR value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PR Low PR value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
TEMP
T1 High Value of T1 channel is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
T1 low Value of T1 channel is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
T2 High Value of T2 channel is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable

Alarm information

T2 Low Value of T2 channel is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
TD High Value of TD channel is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
NIBP
SYS High SYS value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
SYS Low SYS value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
DIA High DIA value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
DIA Low DIA value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
MAP High MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
MAP Low MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PR measuring value from the NIBP module is above upper

PR (NIBP) High User-selectable
alarm limit.
PR measuring value from the NIBP module is below lower
PR (NIBP) Low User-selectable
alarm limit.
IBP
Art SYS High Art SYS value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art SYS Low Art SYS value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Art DIA High Art DIA value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art DIA Low Art DIA value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Art MAP High Art MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
Art MAP Low Art MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA SYS High PA SYS value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA SYS Low PA SYS value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA DIA High PA DIA value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA DIA Low PA DIA value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
PA MAP High PA MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
PA MAP Low PA MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
CVP MAP High CVP MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
CVP MAP Low CVP MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
ICP MAP High ICP MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable

Alarm information
ICP MAP Low ICP MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
LAP MAP High LAP MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
LAP MAP Low LAP MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
RAP MAP High RAP MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
RAP MAP Low RAP MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 SYS High P1 SYS value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 SYS Low P1 SYS value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 DIA High P1 DIA value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 DIA Low P1 DIA value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 MAP High P1 MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P1 MAP Low P1 MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 SYS High P2 SYS value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 SYS Low P2 SYS value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 DIA High P2 DIA value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 DIA Low P2 DIA value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 MAP High P2 MAP value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
P2 MAP Low P2 MAP value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
CO2
etCO2 High etCO2 value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
etCO2 Low etCO2 value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
FiCO2 High FiCO2 value is above alarm limits. User-selectable
AWRR High AwRR value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
AWRR Low AwRR value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
CO2 APNEA In a specific time interval, no RESP were detected by the CO2 High
module.

Alarm information

AG
XX High XX value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
(XX stands for
CO2, O2, N2O,
SEV/DES/HAL/
ENF/ISO)
XX Low XX value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
(XX stands for
CO2, O2, N2O,
SEV/DES/HAL/
ENF/ISO)
AwRR (AG) AwRR (AG) value is above upper alarm limit. User-selectable
High
AwRR (AG) AwRR (AG) value is below lower alarm limit. User-selectable
Low
AG FiO2 Low FiO2 value is extremely low. High
AG APNEA In a specific time interval, no breath was detected by the AG High
module.
C.O.
TB High TB measuring value is above upper alarm. User-selectable
TB Low TB measuring value is below lower alarm. User-selectable

BIS
BIS High BIS measuring value is above upper alarm. User-selectable
BIS Low BIS measuring value is below lower alarm. User-selectable
Technical alarm information
NOTE
The lead names in the table below use the AHA
(American Heart Association) denomination. For
the corresponding IEC lead names, refer to
chapter “Installing Electrodes”.

Alarm information
Message Cause Alarm Level Action Taken
ECG
1 The drive electrode or more

than one ECG limb electrode
ECG Lead Off falls off the skin; Low
2 ECG cables fall off the
monitor.
ECG electrode LL falls off the

ECG LL Lead Off skin or the ECG cable LL falls Low
off the monitor. Make sure that all
electrodes, lead wires
ECG electrode LA falls off the
and patient cables are
ECG LA Lead Off skin or the ECG cable LA falls Low
properly connected.
off the monitor.
ECG electrode RA falls off the

ECG RA Lead Off skin or the ECG cable RA falls Low
off the monitor.
ECG electrode V falls off the

ECG V Lead Off skin or the ECG cable V falls Low
off the monitor.
ECG measuring signal is Check lead connection

ECG Signal Exceed High
beyond measuring range. and patient condition.
Stop monitoring ECG

ECG module failure or and notify hospital
ECG Comm Fail High
communication failure. technical personnel or
customer support.
ECG measuring signal is Check lead connection

ECG Noise Low
greatly interrupted. and patient condition.
RESP
Stop monitoring RESP,

RESP module failure or and notify hospital
RESP Comm Fail High
customer support.
Confirm whether RESP

Respiration signal is beyond signal is interfered and
RR Exceed Medium
the specified range. observe patient’s
breath.

Alarm information
If patients’ breath is
normal, adjust the
electrode measurement
No RESP waveform can be
site.
RESP Cardiac detected due to apnea or
High
Artifact shallow breathing of the If patients’ breath is
patient. abnormal, take some
measures to make
patients breath normal.
RR cannot be measured due Check lead connection

RESP Noise Low
to patient movement. and keep patient quiet.
SpO2
Make sure the sensor is

well connected to the
SpO2 sensor may be patient’s finger or other
SpO2 Sensor Off disconnected from the patient Low parts.
or the monitor. Make sure the monitor
and cables are well
connected.
SpO2 sensor was not Ensure the monitor and

connected well or connected sensor are properly
SpO2 No Sensor Low
to the monitor, or the connected. Reconnect
connection is loose. the sensor.
Malfunction in the SpO2 Replace the SpO2

SpO2 Sensor Err sensor or in the extension Low sensor or the extension
cable. cable.
Reconnect the SpO2

sensor and change the
SpO2 Low The pulse signal is too weak measurement site. If the
Perfusion or the perfusion of the Low problem continues,
(Dräger SpO2) measurement site is too low. notify hospital technical
personnel or customer
support.
There is interference with Check the condition of
SpO2 measurement signals patient and avoid patient
SpO2 Noisy Signal
due to patient movement, Low movement; make sure
(Dräger SpO2) ambient light, electrical the cable is well
interference or else. connected.

Alarm information
SpO2 Light Reduce interference of

Ambient light around the the ambient light and
Interference Low
sensor is too strong. avoid sensor’s exposure
(Dräger SpO2) to strong light.
Stop monitoring SpO2

SpO2 module failure or and notify hospital
SpO2 Comm Fail High
customer support.
NIBP
Stop monitoring NIBP

NIBP module failure or and notify hospital
NIBP Comm Fail High
customer support.
Check the connections
and the wrapped cuff to
see whether they are all
prepared well.
NIBP pump, valve, cuff or tube
NIBP Leak Low If failure persists, please
has a leakage.
notify biomedical
engineer or
manufacturer’s service
staff.
Measure again, if failure
persists, stop monitoring
NIBP Excessive Pressure has exceeded the
Low NIBP and notify hospital
Pressure specified upper safety limit.
technical personnel or
customer support.
NIBP Init Pressure The initial pressure is too high
Low NIBP and notify hospital
High during measuring.
customer support.
Notify biomedical
NIBP Aux Pressure has exceeded the
engineer or
Excessive second safety limit as High
manufacturer’s service
Pressure specified.
staff.

Alarm information
Measure again or use

Measuring time has exceeded
NIBP Time Out Low other measuring
the specified time.
method.

NIBP Self Test Error Sensor or other hardware
High NIBP and notify hospital
errors.
customer support.
The cuff type used is

NIBP Cuff type Error Confirm the patient type
inconsistent with the patient Low
and change the cuff.
type.
Check whether the

Atmospheric pressure or airway is occluded or
NIBP System
Pressure system pressure is abnormal. pressure sensor works
Low
Abnormality The valve is occluded so that properly. If the problem
deflation is failed. still exists, contact
service personnel.
NIBP System Contact service
Failure NIBP is not calibrated. High
personnel.
Use a different method
Cuff is too loose or patient
NIBP Weak Signal Low to measure blood
pulse is too weak.
pressure.
NIBP Range The patient’s blood pressure is The patient’s blood

Exceeded beyond the measurement High pressure is beyond the
range. measurement range.
Cuff is no properly wrapped or
NIBP Loose Cuff Low Rewrap the cuff.
no cuff exists.
Make sure that the
Signal noise is too large or
NIBP Interference Low patient under monitoring
pulse rate is not regular.
is motionless.
Test again. If the
Fail to deflate normally during
NIBP Leak Test problem still exists,
the leak test, so NIBP leak Low
Error contact service
test cannot be finished.
personnel.

Alarm information
TEMP
Temperature cable of TEMP

TEMP T1 Sensor Off Make sure that the cable
channel 1 may be Low
is properly connected.
disconnected.
Temperature cable of TEMP

TEMP T2 Sensor Off Make sure that the cable
channel 2 may be Low
is properly connected.
disconnected.
Check sensor
Excessive T1 TEMP1 measuring value is
High connection and patient
beyond measuring range.
condition.
Check sensor
Excessive T2 TEMP2 measuring value is
High connection and patient
beyond measuring range.
condition.
Stop monitoring TEMP

TEMP module failure or and notify hospital
TEMP Comm Fail High
customer support.
T1 Calibration Check whether the
T1 calibration failed. High
Failed module works properly.
T2 Calibration Check whether the
T2 calibration failed. High
Failed module works properly.
IBP
YY Sensor Off
Make sure that cable is
(YY stands for the IBP sensor falls off monitor. Medium
properly connected.
IBP label name)
Stop monitoring IBP and
YY Comm Fail
IBP module failure or notify hospital technical
(YY stands for the High
communication failure. personnel or customer
label name)
support.
Check the catheter

IBP catheter falls off due to
IBP Catheter Off High connection and
patient movement.
reconnect it.
Malfunction in the IBP sensor Replace the IBP sensor

IBP Sensor Error Medium
or in the extension cable. or the extension cable.

Alarm information
C.O.
Stop measuring of C.O.

module, or notify
C.O. module failure or
C.O. Comm Fail High biomedical engineer or
communication failure.
Manufacturer’s service
staff.
Insert injective
C.O. TI No Sensor C.O. TI sensor not connected. Low
temperature sensor.
C.O. TB No Sensor C.O. TB sensor not connected. Low Insert TB sensor.
C.O. TEMP Out Of TI/TB measuring value is

High Check TI/TB sensor.
Range beyond measuring range.
CO2
The CO2 concentration

CO2 Out Of Range exceeds the accuracy range of High Reduce CO2
CO2 module. concentration.
CO2 Sensor Faulty CO2 module failure. High
CO2 Sensor Over CO2 sensor temperature

High Stop monitoring CO2 and
Temp exceeds +40 °C.
notify hospital technical
CO2 module failure or personnel or customer
CO2 Comm Fail High
communication failure. support.
CO2 Zero Required
Zero calibration failure. Low
(Respironics CO2)
1 For the Respironics
1 For the Respironics CO2 CO2 module: Check
module: The cannula is off or whether the adapter is
disconnected. properly connected or
CO2 Check Adapter Low
2 For G2 module: The water replace the adapter.
trap is disconnected or not 2 For G2 module:
properly connected. Properly connect the
water trap.
Water trap of sidestream
module is occluded, or airway Make sure the gas
CO2 Occlude High
adapter of mainstream module exhaust works well.
is occluded.

Alarm information
CO2 Power Error Stop monitoring CO2 and

CO2 module power failure. High notify hospital technical
(Dräger MCable
personnel or customer
mainstream)
support.
AG
Stop measuring function

of AG module, and notify
AG module failure or
AG Comm Fail High biomedical engineer or
communication failure.
Manufacturer’s service
staff.
1 Check whether water
trap is installed
Check normally.
Watertrap or sample line falls
Watertrap/Sample Low
off. 2 Check whether sample
Line
line is installed
normally.
AG Change
Malfunction in watertap. Medium Replace the watertrap.
Watertrap
Watertrap will be
Watertrap will be full. Medium Replace the watertrap.
full
1 Unplug and plug the
communication cable.
AG Software Error AG module software failure. High 2 Restart AG module.
3 Call manufacturer.
1 Check connection.
AG Hardware Error AG module hardware failure. High 2 Restart AG module.

3 Call manufacturer.
1 Check whether
XX Out Of Range The XX concentration exceeds measured gas is
(XX stands for CO2, the accuracy range of the gas High beyond measurement
O2, N2O, AA) module. range.
2 Restart AG module.
If mixture agents are
AG Mixed Agents detected, there is no
Mixture agents less than 3. Low
(MAC<3) need to take measures.

Alarm information
If mixture agents are

AG Mixed Agents Mixture agents more than or detected, there is no
Medium
(MAC>=3) equal to 3. need to take measures.
1 Check sample line and
Scio module sample line replace if necessary.
AG Occlusion occluded Watertrap full, High 2 Check watertrap,
defective, or not installed. replace or install, if
necessary.
Mixture agents are detected,

but the monitor cannot Check agents’
AG Agent Mixture Medium concentration ratio.
calculate MAC because of low
concentration.
BIS
1 Disconnection between the Properly connect cables

BIS Comm Fail BISx device and the monitor. High and well connect the
2 BISx device stops operating. module.
1 The sensor is not properly

BIS Sensor Not connected. Reconnect the sensor or
Low
Connected 2 PIC is not properly PIC.
connected.
1 Wrong sensor type.
BIS Sensor Type
2 Use the sensor on neonatal Low Replace the sensor.
Error
patients.
The sensor was attached to
BIS Sensor Usage >
the monitor for more than 24 Low Replace the sensor.
24hrs
hours.
Examine sensor
connection or replace
Sensor malfunction including the sensor. And then
sensor over current, sensor click Continue in the BIS
BIS Sensor Error Low
ground element (positive and Sensor Fault window
negative) failure. which appears on the
screen or reconnect the
BISx device.

Alarm information
1 The BIS sensor is invalid or

not supported by the BISx 1 Replace the sensor.
BIS Sensor Invalid device. Low 2 Connect the sensor
2 The sensor is not properly properly.
connected.
The sensor can be used

as long as it passes the
impedance check, which,
BIS Sensor Expired The sensor expired. Low
however, may affect the
measurements. Replace
the sensor if necessary.
The sensor has been used too
BIS No More Uses
many times and cannot be Low Replace the sensor.
For This Sensor
used any more.
BIS High The impedance is above the Check the senor-to-skin

Low
Impedance limit. contact.
Check the senor-to-skin

BIS Lead Off Electrode has no skin contact. Low
contact.
Check the senor-to-skin

BIS Noise There is electrical interference. Low
contact.
1 Check the senor-to-
skin contact.
2 The SQI value will be
Bad BIS SQI SQI < 15 Medium influenced by impedance
check for the ground
electrode and sensor
check.
1 Check the senor-to-

skin contact.
2 The SQI value will be
Poor BIS SQI 15 ≤ SQI < 50 Low influenced by impedance
check for the ground
electrode and sensor
check.
Artifact, such as those

Attempt to identify and
BIS Artifact generated by motion or eye Low
eliminate artifact source.
blinks.

Alarm information
Others
Change the battery or

Battery Low Battery low. High
recharge it.
Replace the battery and

restart the monitor. If the
Battery1 Error Malfunction in Battery 1. Low problem persists, notify
the manufacturer’s
service staff.
Recorder Out Of
Recorder out of paper. Low Insert new paper.
Paper
Recorder Probe The probe of recorder is Stop recording and retry
Low
Overheated overheated. after the probe cools.
Delete some data in the

Insufficient storage Less than 10M space is left in
Low storage device or use
space the storage device.
another storage device.
Repair the storage
Read-only storage The storage device is read-
Low device or replace it with
device only.
a new one.
1 Check if the network

cable is well connected.
2 Check if the Vista 120
In distributed alarm system, CMS is turned on.
Network
the monitor’s network is Low 3 Check if the IP of
Disconnect
disconnected. bedside monitor and
Vista 120 CMS are on
the same network
segment.
Disconnect the network

to make the monitor work
Abnormal network traffic has properly, and then
Network traffic
been detected. The data traffic High contact the professionals
anomaly
exceeds the limit. authorized by
manufacturer to check
the network problem.

Alarm information
Prompts
Message Cause
ECG ARR Learning The QRS template building required for Arr. Analysis is in process.
V-Fib/V-Tach Off V-Fib/V-Tach alarm is set to Off.
Vent Brady Off Vent Brady alarm is set to Off.
Key ARR Alarm Off One of Key ARR alarms is set to Off.
SpO2 Search Pulse When the sensor is connected to the patient, the SpO2 is analyzing
the patient signal and searching for the pulse to compute the
saturation.
SpO2 Noisy Signal There is interference with SpO2 measurement signals due to patient
movement, ambient light, electrical interference or else.
(Nellcor SpO2)
Manual Measuring In manual measuring mode.
Continual Measuring In continuous measuring mode.
Auto Measuring In automatic measuring mode.
Measurem. Canceled Measurement over.
Calibrating During calibrating.
Calibrat. Canceled Calibration over.
Leak. Test Running During pneumatic test.
Leak.Test Canceled Pneumatic test over.
Resetting NIBP module in resetting.
Please Start NIBP module is in idle status.
Done NIBP measurement successfully done.
Venipuncture Starting Start the assisting venipuncture and the cuff begins to inflate.
In venipuncture process Venipuncture in process.
Venipuncture Ending Finish the assisting venipuncture and the cuff begins to deflate.
CO2 Standby Changing from measuring to standby mode places the module in
energy-saving status.

Alarm information
Message Cause
CO2 Sensor Warms Up The CO2 module is in warm-up state.
CO2 Zero Failed CO2 module zero is failed.
CO2 Calibrating CO2 module is calibrating.
CO2 Calibration Failed CO2 module calibration is failed.
CO2 Calibration Reset The entered test gas is out of range. Reset the calibration.
Please Press 'Zero'. Enter the IBP zeroing menu, and zeroing is not performed yet.
Zero OK IBP completes zeroing.
Pulsatile Pressure Zero Fail. During the zeroing process, pressure fluctuation is excessive.
Pressure out of normal During the zeroing process, pressure value is beyond the zeroing
range,Fail. range.
Sensor Off, Fail! Perform zeroing when the sensor is off.
Invalid Time,Zero Fail. Time is not set up prior zeroing.
Unable to Calibrate in Demo

Perform zeroing in Demo Mode.
Mode
Zeroing... Zeroing is in progress.
Please Press 'Calibrate'. Enter the Calibration menu, and Calibration is not performed yet.
Calibration OK Calibration is completed.
Pulse Pressure Calibration

During the Calibration process, pressure fluctuation is excessive.
Failed
During the Calibration process, pressure value is beyond the

Pressure out of range
Calibration range.
Zeroing and Calibration

Zeroing is not performed prior calibration.
Failed
Sensor Off,Fail. Perform calibration when the sensor is off.
Invalid Time,Calibration Fail. Time is not set up prior calibration.
Unable to Calibrate in Demo

Perform calibration in Demo Mode.
Mode
Calibrating... Calibration is in progress.

Alarm information
Message Cause
IBP alias collision The same IBP label appears.
C.O. Lack Param Parameter is not configured for C.O. measurement.

AG Is Starting Scio module is starting.
AG Standby User sets Work Mode to Standby.
AG Zero In Progress Scio module zero in progress.
AG Is Warming Up Scio module is warming up and is operating at reduced accuracy.
AG Changing to Standby Work Mode is switching to Standby from Measure.
AG Changing to Meas. Work Mode is switching to Measure from Standby.
AG Agent Low Measured agent concentration is low.

Concentration
AG Agent Calculate Usually it comes up if no single agent history is available and a
mixture situation occurs.
AG Agent Estimated The AG module cannot identify the present agent(s) but only give an
estimation of one of the present agents. The reason is the presence
of either a mixture of too many anesthetic.
AG Agent Overflow The gas concentration has increased above the maximum threshold.
BIS Sensor Check - Not Pass A sensor check is in progress.

Yet
BIS Ground Check Impedance check for the ground electrode is in progress.
Reconnect BIS Device The module has stopped or the BISx device is not connected.
Recorder Setup Needed The user presses the RECORD button or shortcut key Record
when Recorder is not configured.
NIBP Simul NIBP Simul function is turned on.

Alarm information
Adjustable range of alarm limits
ECG alarm limits are listed as follows (unit bpm): NIBP alarm limits are listed as follows (unit mmHg):
Patient Type Adjustable Range Adjustable Range

SYS 40 to 270
ADU 15 to 300
HR ADU DIA 10 to 215
PED/NEO 15 to 350
MAP 20 to 235
ST analysis alarm limits are listed as follows SYS 40 to 230
(unit mV): PED DIA 10 to 180
Adjustable Range MAP 20 to 195
SYS 40 to 135
ST -2.0 to 2.0
NEO DIA 10 to 100
RESP alarm limits are listed as follows (unit rpm): MAP 20 to 110
Patient Type Adjustable Range TEMP alarm limits are listed as follows:
ADU 6 to 120
RESP Adjustable Range
PED/NEO 6 to 150
T1 0 °C (+32 ºF) to +50 °C (+122 ºF)
SpO2 alarm limits are listed as follows (unit %): T2 0 °C (+32 ºF) to +50 °C (+122 ºF)
Adjustable Range High limit: +0.1 °C (+32.18 ºF) to +50 °C
TD
(+122 ºF)
SpO2 20 to 100
IBP alarm limits are listed as follows (unit mmHg):
SpO2 Desat Limits are listed as follows (unit %):
Adjustable Range
Adjustable Range
Art 0 to 300
SpO2 Desat Limit 20 to 99
RAP/LAP/CVP/ICP -10 to 40
PA -6 to 120
NOTE P1/P2 -50 to 300
User can set the range through User Maintain >
Alarm Setup > SpO2 Desat Limit, SpO2 Desat CO2 alarm limits are listed as follows:
Limit should be less than or equal to SpO2 alarm
Adjustable Range
low limit.
Dräger G2 &
Dräger MCable
PR alarm limit is listed as follows (unit bpm): Respironics
0 mmHg to 0 mmHg to
Adjustable Range etCO2
150 mmHg 100 mmHg
Dräger 30 to 300 High limit: High limit:
PR (SpO2)
Nellcor 30 to 300 FiCO2 3 mmHg to 3 mmHg to
50 mmHg 50 mmHg
PR (NIBP) Dräger 40 to 240
2 rpm to 150 rpm
PR (IBP) Dräger 30 to 300 0 rpm to 150 rpm
AwRR 3rpm to 150 rpm
(Respironics
mainstream)

Alarm information
AG alarm limits are listed as follows:
Adjustable
Range
High limit:
FiCO2
0% to 10.0%
etCO2 0% to 10.0%
FiO2 18.0% to 100.0%
EtO2/FiN2O/EtN2O 0% to 100.0%
EtDES/FiDES 0% to 20.0%
EtISO/FiISO/EtHAL/FiHAL 0% to 8.5%
EtSEV/FiSEV/EtENF/FiENF 0% to 10.0%
AwRR 0 rpm to 100 rpm
Apnea Time 20 s to 40 s
BIS alarm limits are listed as follows:

Adjustable Range
BIS 0 to 100


Managing patients
Managing patients
Confirming a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Admitting a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Patient category and paced status . . . . . . . . . . 87
Quick admit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Barcode admit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Managing patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Editing patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Obtaining patient information from
the network server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Central monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Managing patients
Confirming a patient
The pre-selected configuration may not be After the user switches the monitor on, the monitor
appropriate for the newly admitted patient. will prompt “Continue current patient or admit
Therefore, the monitor allows the user to load a new patient?”. Select Current Patient to use the
desired configuration to ensure that all the settings current configuration; Select New Patient to admit
are appropriate for the patient. new patient.
NOTE
If the user does not make a selection within 3
minutes, Current Patient is selected by default.
Admitting a patient
The monitor displays patient physiological data and  First name: Enter the patient’s first name,
records the information in trends. This allows the for example Joseph.
user to monitor unadmitted patients. It is
 Bed No.: supports up to 8 characters.
recommended, however, that the user admit
Chinese, English, Russian, number and
patients to record their information in reports.
special characters can be input.
During admission, the patient category setting
 Doctor: Enter the attending doctor for the
determines the algorithm that the monitor uses to
patient.
process and calculate measurements. These
include safety limits that are applied for specific  Gender: Choose Male or Female.
measurements and alarm limit ranges.
 Type: Choose the patient type, Adult,
To admit a patient: Pediat, or Neonat.
1 Select the Admission shortcut key on the  BloodType: Choose the patient type N/A,
screen or A, B, AB, or O.
2 Select Menu > Patient Setup > New Patient,  Pace: Choose On or Off (The user must use
then a message is displayed to ask the user to On if the patient has a pacemaker).
confirm to update patient.
 Date of Birth: Enter the patient’s date of
3 Click No to cancel this operation; click Yes, the birth.
Patient Info window is displayed.
 Date of Admission: Enter the patient’s date
4 Enter the patient information: of admission.
 MRN: Enter the patient's medical record  Height: Enter the patient’s height.
number (MRN), for example 12345678.
 Weight: Enter the patient’s weight.
 Last name: Enter the patient’s last name
 Height unit: cm or inch.
(family name), for example Smith.
 Weight unit: kg or lb.

Managing patients
The paced setting determines whether the monitor

NOTE
shows pacemaker pulses. When Pace is set to Off,
Admitting new patient will clear the history data in pace pulses are filtered and do not show in the
the monitor associated with the patient. ECG waveform. Refer to chapter “Setting Pace
Status”.
NOTE
For Bed No., user can select English, Chinese, WARNING
Russian by switching keyboard language, and Changing the patient category may change
the arrhythmia and NIBP alarm limits. Always
select special characters through .
check alarm limits to make sure that they are
appropriate for the patient.
Patient category and paced status WARNING

For paced patients, the user must set Pace to
The patient category setting determines which
On. If it is incorrectly set to Off, the monitor
algorithm the monitor uses for specific
could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail
measurements, the safety limits that are applied for
to alarm during asystole.
specific measurements, and the alarm limit range.
Quick admit
If the user does not have the time or information to 1 Select the shortcut key on the screen
fully admit a patient, fill in the rest of the patient directly, or
information later.
2 Select Menu > Patient Setup > Quick Admit,
The user can quickly admit a patient as follows: a message is displayed requesting that the user
confirm the patient update.
3 Click No to cancel this operation; click Yes to
continue and the Quick Admit window is
displayed, choose Type and Pace and set them
to the correct mode.
Barcode admit
Barcode scanner can recognize patient information

directly and quickly, which can provide
convenience and reduce mistakes for users.
To admit a patient by barcode:
1 The user can scan the barcode through
scanner, then a message is displayed to ask the
user to confirm the patient update.

Managing patients
2 Click No to cancel this operation; click Yes, the

NOTE
Patient Info window is displayed and the
corresponding patient information is updated Caps Lock is unavailable, user can input capitals
according to the identified MRN. If the monitor and symbols through switching Shift key.
is connected with the network server through
the gateway, the monitor will automatically NOTE
inquire for patient information from the network Patient information obtained from network server
server via MRN. As soon as the MRN is cannot be edited.
successfully found on the network server, the
corresponding patient information will be
updated to the monitor. Otherwise, prompt
information will be displayed to notify the user
that network is not available or no patient
information is matched. If patient information is
modified on the network server, prompt
information will also be sent to inform the user
of the update.
Managing patient information
Editing patient information Obtaining patient information from the

network server
To edit the patient information after a patient has
been admitted, select Menu > Patient Setup > The user can obtain patient information from the
Patient Info, and make the desired changes network server to the monitor.
through the pop-up dialog box.
To obtain patient information from the network
If the monitor is equipped with a barcode scanner, server,
the user can scan the patient’s barcode to enter the
patient’s medical record number (MRN). 1 Select Menu > Patient Setup > Network
Admit.
When patient’s MRN is modified, the user can click
2 Input the query conditions (Department, Date
on to obtain the patient information from
of Admission), and then click . A list
network server. Otherwise, only MRN is updated.
including all the patients that meet the query
conditions is displayed.
NOTE
Switching patient type will change the current 3 Select a patient from the patient list, and click
configuration. Admit. The corresponding patient information
in the monitor will be updated after user’s
confirmation. Click View to display the detailed
patient information.

Managing patients
NOTE
The user can load patient information from the
network server only when ADT Query is enabled.
Default setting is off. Setting path: Maintenance >
User Maintain > Network Maintain > ADT Query.
Central monitoring system
The monitor can be connected to the central NOTE

monitoring system. Through the network:
The time synchronization function might not be
1 The monitor sends patient information, real- available to all software versions of Vista 120
time monitoring or measurement data to the CMS. Consult our technical service department or
central monitoring system. your local distributor for more information.
2 The real-time monitoring information is
NOTE
displayed on the central monitoring system as
the same to the monitor, and the central When deploying the network of the monitor and
monitoring system can perform some bilateral Vista 120 CMS, it is recommended to isolate the
control. For example: changing patient network and the Intranet system of the hospital by
information, receiving patient, discharging using VLAN so as to ensure the network security.
patient and so forth. Only trusted devices are allowed to join the VLAN
network.
For detailed information, please refer to Vista 120
CMS Central Monitoring System User Manual.
And the monitor supports HL 7 protocol.
NOTE
Use wired instead of wireless networking when
connecting the monitor to central monitoring
system in the operating room because the ESU
will interfere with a wireless network, which may
cause networking failure.
NOTE
Make sure the network connection between the
monitor and the central monitoring system is in
good condition when the time synchronization
function on the monitor is active (Default setting is
off. Route: Maintenance > User Maintain >
Date/Time Setup > Sync Time). If the setting is
on, the monitor will accept time synchronization
from Vista 120 CMS.


User interface
User interface
Setting interface style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Selecting display parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Changing waveform position . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Changing interface layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Viewing short trend screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Viewing OxyCRG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Viewing large font screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Viewing the Bed View Window . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opening the Bed View Window. . . . . . . . . . . 95
Settings of the Bed View Window. . . . . . . . . 95
Changing Parameter and Waveform

Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Displaying the timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

User interface
Setting interface style
The user can set the interface style. The following Only authorized personnel should set the interface
options are available: style.
 Waveform sweep
 Monitored parameters
Selecting display parameters
The user can select the display parameters based 3 Select the required parameters from the popup
on specific monitoring and measurement interface.
requirements. To select the parameter:
4 Exit the menu and the screen will adjust the
1 Select the shortcut key on the screen parameters automatically.
directly, or
2 Select Menu > System Setup > Module
Switch.
Changing waveform position
The user can exchange the waveform positions of

parameter A and parameter B as follows:
1 Select waveform A and display the setup menu
of waveform A.
2 Select Change from the pop-up menu and
select the desired label name of waveform B
from the pull-down list.

User interface
Changing interface layout
Select Menu > Display Setup to open the Display  Decide whether the control bar is displayed or
Setup menu on which the user can not displayed on the screen by setting Control
Bar to On or Off.
 Select a function screen based on the clinical
requirements by configuring View Selection.
 Select the maximum number of waveforms
displayed on the screen by configuring Wave.
Num.
Viewing short trend screen
To view the trend screen, the user can press the Select short trend to open Short Trend Setup
menu, the user can set:
shortcut key on the screen directly or select
Menu > Display Setup > View Selection > 1 Parameter.
TrendScreen.
2 Interval: set the interval to 30 min, 1 h and 2 h.
Viewing OxyCRG screen
To view the oxyCRG screen, the user can press the

shortcut key on the screen directly or select
Menu > Display Setup > View Selection >
oxyCRG.
This is a NICU only feature. Monitoring of SpO2, HR
and Resp of the neonate are different from those of
adults. OxyCRG is in the bottom half part of wave
area; it consists of HR trend, SpO2 trend and RR
trend or compressed respiration waveform.
Select oxyCRG waveform to open OxyCRG Setup
menu, the user can set:
1 Interval: set the interval to 1 min, 2 min and
4 min.
2 Parameter: to select RESP or RR.

User interface
Viewing large font screen
To display the large font screen:

directly or
2 Select Menu > Display Setup > View
Selection > Large Font to select this display
mode.
To view the large font dialog box of specific
parameter, select the parameter pull-down dialog
on the dialog box (the red rectangle shown in the
following figure).
Viewing the Bed View Window
The Bed View window allows to view one NOTE

waveform, numeric information of all parameters
In the Bed View window, the over-limit alarms of
and alarm information from another bed on the
physiological parameters occurring on other beds
same network. The monitor enables a maximum of
cannot be viewed. Besides, arrhythmia alarms and
eight beds to be viewed.
vital alarms will be indicated only by alarm icons.
NOTE
The IP addresses of the monitors configured with NOTE
bed view function should share the same network The bed view results are for reference only.
segment. The IP addresses of the monitors on the
same LAN should be unique from each other; the
user cannot use the bed view function in the
monitors in which an IP address conflict exists.
NOTE
In order to use the bed view function without
impediment, the monitor needs to be restarted
after changing its IP address.
NOTE
To use the bed view function smoothly, make sure
the network connection is in good condition.

User interface
Opening the Bed View Window
Before opening the Bed View window, make sure Display Setup and choose Bed View in the View
the bed view function is configured on the monitor.
Selection list, or select the shortcut key on
To open the Bed View window, select Menu >
the screen directly.
Settings of the Bed View Window
Click on the Bed View window to open the  Select the waveform to be displayed on the
ViewBed Setup menu on which the user can window in the Wave Type list.
 Assign a bed to be viewed by selecting the bed  Use the buttons and to view more
No. in the Bed No. list. numeric information of parameters in the
window.
Changing Parameter and Waveform Colors
The user can set the display colors of parameter Maintain, enter the required password. Then select
and waveform as desire. To change the display Color Setup to make color changes on parameter
color, select Menu > Maintenance > User and waveform.
Displaying the timer
The monitor has the timer function to notify you In the timer displaying area, the user can set the
when a preset time period is expired. To display the timer counting direction. Select Timer Setup >
timer on the main interface, Timing Direction.
directly, or
2 Select Menu > System Setup > Module
Switch.
3 Select Timer from the popup interface. Exit the
menu and the screen will adjust the parameters
automatically.

User interface
 Count Down: to display the remaining time.

When the user selects Count Down, Timing
Duration shall be set simultaneously. The
timing duration can be set between 0 and 120
hours. Default setting is 5 min. When the
remaining time is 30 s, the time turns red,
prompting you that the timing duration is to
expire. When the timing duration expires, the
monitor issues a reminder tone. To set the
reminder tone volume, select Menu > System
Setup > Reminder Volume.
 Count Up: to display the elapsed time.
When the Timing Direction is Count Down, the
user can select Start/Pause/Resume or Cancel to
start/pause/resume or end the timer; When the
Timing Direction is Count Up, the user can select
Start or Cancel to start or clear the timer.
To turn off the timer displaying, the user can remove
the timer in the module switch menu.
NOTE
The user cannot change timer settings when a
timer is running.
NOTE
Do not use the timer to schedule critical patient-
related tasks.
NOTE
The timer function is not available in privacy mode
and standby mode.

Monitoring ECG
Monitoring ECG
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Definition of target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ECG safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 For your safety and that of your patients . . . . . 113
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ECG display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Installation and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Changing the size of the ECG waveform . . . . . 100 Cleaning and disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Changing the ECG filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Testing of procedures and agents . . . . . . . . . . 114
Manual disinfection and simultaneous
Selecting calculation lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Monitoring procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Connecting ECG cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting lead type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installing electrodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Electrode placement for 3-lead. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Electrode placement for 5-lead. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Recommended ECG lead placement
for surgical patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ECG menu setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Setting alarm source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting beat source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Smart lead off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ECG display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting pace status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ECG calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ECG waveform settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ST segment monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Setting ST analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ST display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
About ST measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjusting ST and ISO measurement points . . . 108
Arrhythmia monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Arrhythmia analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ARR Analysis menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ECG leadwires and trunk cables

(New added) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Order list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Monitoring ECG
Overview
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures electrical

activity in the heart and displays it both numerically
and as a waveform. This chapter also describes
arrhythmia and ST segment monitoring.
ECG safety information
WARNING WARNING
Use only compatible ECG cables for Check if the lead connection is correct before
monitoring. monitoring. If the ECG cable is unplugged
from the socket, the screen will display the
WARNING error message “ECG LEAD OFF” and an
audible alarm sounds.
When connecting the cables and electrodes,
make sure no conductive part is in contact
with the ground. Verify that all ECG WARNING
electrodes, including the neutral electrode, If the ECG signal exceeds the measuring
are securely attached to the patient but not a range, the monitor will indicates it by a
conductive part or ground. message “ECG Signal Exceed”.
WARNING WARNING
Place the electrode carefully and ensure a In order to avoid being burnt, please keep the
good contact. Check every day whether there electrodes far away from the radio knife while
is skin irritation resulted from the ECG using electrosurgical equipment.
electrodes. If yes, replace electrodes every 24
hours or change their sites. WARNING
ECG cables can be damaged when connected
WARNING to a patient during defibrillation or using other
Store the electrodes in room temperature. high frequency equipment. Check cables for
Open the electrode package immediately prior functionality before using them again. It is
to use. Never mix electrode types or brands. recommended to use defibrillator-proof ECG
This may lead to problem due to impedance lead to avoid burn.
difference. When applying the electrodes,
avoid bones close to skin, obvious layers of WARNING
fat, and major muscles. Muscle movement can When using electrosurgery (ES) equipment,
result in electrical interference. Applying do not place an electrode near the grounding
electrodes on major muscles, for example on plate of the electrosurgery device: otherwise,
muscles of thorax, may lead to erroneous more interference will be evident on the ECG
arrhythmia alarm due to excessive muscle waveform.
movement.

Monitoring ECG
WARNING WARNING
The electrodes should be made of the same The monitor can only be used on one patient
metal materials. at a time. Monitoring more than one patient
simultaneously may result in hazards to the
WARNING patient.
According to AAMI specifications the peak of
the synchronized defibrillator discharge WARNING
should be delivered within 60 ms of the peak Pacemaker Failure: During a complete cardiac
of the R wave. The synchronization pulse block or when pacemaker is unable to
output on the patient monitors is delayed by a pacing/capture, high P-wave (greater than 1/5
maximum of 35 ms from the R wave peak. The of the average height of the R-wave) may be
biomedical engineer should verify that the incorrectly counted by the monitor, which
ECG/Defibrillator combination does not leads to a missing asystole.
exceed the recommended maximum delay of
60 ms. NOTE
Interference from a non-grounded instrument near
WARNING the patient and ESU interference can cause
Before outputting signals with defibrillator inaccuracy of the waveform.
synchronization or ECG, check if the output is
functioning normally. NOTE
IEC/EN60601-1-2 (protection against radiation is
WARNING 3 V/m) specifies that the electrical field density
ECG accessories are not suitable for DIRECT exceeding 3 V/m may cause measurement error in
CARDIAC APPLICATION. (Refer to IEC60601-1 various frequencies. It is accordingly suggested to
for more information about the definition of not use equipment generating electrical radiation
DIRECT CARDIAC APPLICATION.) near ECG/RESP monitoring devices.
WARNING
Line isolation monitor transients may NOTE
resemble actual cardiac waveforms and thus The simultaneous use of cardiac pacemaker and
inhibit heart rate alarms. When the electrode other patient-connected equipment may cause a
or lead is loose or fallen, the monitor is easily safety hazard.
affected by the transient response of certain
types of insulation monitors. The transient NOTE
monitor signal produced by poor insulation of If the pacemaker signals are beyond the claimed
the line may be very similar to the actual heart range, the heart rate may be calculated incorrectly.
waveform, which will prevent the monitor from
prompting a heart rate alarm. In order to avoid
NOTE
this, user should check lead wires for damage
and ensure good skin contact prior to and In the default settings of the monitor, the ECG
during use. Always use fresh electrodes and waveforms are the first two waveforms from the
follow proper skin preparation techniques. top in the waveform area.
NOTE
For measurements in or near the heart connect the
monitor to the potential equalization system.

Monitoring ECG
NOTE
For protecting the environment, the used
electrodes must be recycled or disposed of
properly.
ECG display
The figure below is for reference only.
The symbol 1 indicates the lead name of the X1 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform signal
displayed waveform; refer to chapter “Selecting become 10 mm;
calculation lead”.
X2 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform signal
The symbol 2 indicates waveform gain; refer to become 20 mm;
chapter “Changing the size of the ECG waveform”.
X4 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform signal
The symbol 3 indicates Filter setting; refer to become 40 mm;
chapter “Changing the ECG filter settings”.
AUTO let the monitor choose the optimal
adjustment factor for all the ECG waveforms.
Changing the size of the ECG waveform NOTE
The effect of ECG wave gain is subject to the size
If any of the displayed ECG waveforms are too of the wave area. Whichever wave gain is chosen,
small or clipped, the size can be changed. Select the ECG wave has to be displayed within the wave
ECG Waveform Setup > ECG Gain, then select an area, the exceeded part is clipped.
appropriate factor from the pop-up box to adjust the
ECG waveform.
X0.125 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform Changing the ECG filter settings
signal become 1.25 mm;
The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waveforms
X0.25 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform
are smoothed. An abbreviation indicating the filter
signal become 2.5 mm;
type is shown under the lead label on the monitor
X0.5 to make the size of 1 mV ECG waveform display. Filter settings do not affect ST
signal become 5 mm; measurement.

Monitoring ECG
To change the filter setting, in the ECG Setup  Diagnos: Use when undistorted quality is
menu, select Filter and then select the appropriate required and its own characteristics can be
setting. maintained. The waveform filtered by the
bandwidth of 0.05 Hz~150 Hz is displayed so
 Monitor: Use this mode under normal
that the actual changes such as R-wave
measurement conditions.
notching or discrete elevation or depression of
 Surgery: The filter reduces interference to the the ST segments are visible.
signal. It should be used if the signal is distorted
by high- or low-frequency interference. High
frequency interference usually results in large
amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look
irregular. Low-frequency interference usually
leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the
operating room, the Filter reduces artifacts and
interference from HF surgical equipment. Under
normal measurement conditions, selecting
Surgery may distort the QRS complexes too
much and thus interfere with the clinical
evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor.
Selecting calculation lead
To set the calculation lead, select ECG Setup >  The P-waves and the T-waves should be less
Calc. Lead, or on the Normal display interface, than 0.2 mV.
click on the calculation lead waveform area, select
Calc. Lead from the popup interface to make the NOTE
appropriate setting. For 3 Leads, II, I, and III are Make sure you have selected the best lead with
selectable; For 5 Leads, II, I, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, the best waveform amplitude and highest signal-
and V are selectable. Normal QRS complex is to-noise ratio. Choosing the best lead is important
defined as: for heart beat test, heart beat classification and
ventricular fibrillation detection.
 The normal QRS should be either completely
above or below the baseline and it should not
be biphasic. For paced patients, the QRS
complexes should be at least twice the height of
pace pulses.
 The QRS should be tall and narrow.

Monitoring ECG
Monitoring procedure
Preparation Connecting ECG cables
Skin is a poor conductor of electricity. Prepare the 1 Attach a clip or snap to the electrodes prior to
patient's skin to facilitate good electrode placement.
conductivity.
2 Place the electrodes on the patient. Before
 Select sites with intact skin, without impairment attaching, apply some conductive jelly on the
of any kind. electrodes if the electrodes are not electrolyte
self-supplied.
 Shave hair from sites, if necessary.
3 Connect the electrode lead to the patient's
 Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water.
cable.
(Never use ether or pure alcohol, because this
increases skin impedance). 4 Plug the patient cable into the ECG connector
on the monitor.
 Rub the skin briskly to increase capillary blood
flow in the tissues and remove skin scurf and CAUTION
grease. To protect the monitor from damage during
defibrillation, for accurate ECG information and to
protect against noise and other interference, use
only ECG electrodes and cables specified by
Dräger.
Selecting lead type
To change the lead type:

1 Select the ECG parameter area, display the
ECG Setup menu;
2 Set Lead Type to 3 Leads or 5 Leads based on
the lead used.
Installing electrodes
NOTE
The following table gives the corresponding lead
names according to IEC (used in Europe) and the
AHA (USA) respectively.

Monitoring ECG
AHA (American IEC (Europe Standard)

Electrode placement for 5-lead
Standard)
Take the AHA standard for example, see the
Electrode Color Electrode Color following figure:
Labels Labels
 RA: Directly below the clavicle and near the
RA White R Red right shoulder.
LA Black L Yellow  LA: Directly below the clavicle and near the left
shoulder.
LL Red F Green
 RL: On the right hypogastrium.
RL Green N Black
 LL: On the left hypogastrium.
V Brown C White
 V: On the chest, the position depends on the
desired lead selection.
Electrode placement for 3-lead

Lewis
LA
Take the AHA standard for example, see the
following figure:
RA
 RA: Directly below the clavicle and near the
right shoulder.
 LA: Directly below the clavicle and near the left V
shoulder.
RE
 LL: On the left hypogastrium.
SP
Lewis
LA
RA RL LL
NOTE
To ensure safety, all leads must be attached to the
patient.
RE
SP
For 5-lead, attach the V electrode to one of the

indicated positions as below:
 V1: On the 4th intercostal space at the right
sterna margin.
LL
 V2: On the 4th intercostal space at the left
sterna margin.
 V3: Midway between V2 and V4 electrodes.
clavicular line.

Monitoring ECG
 V5: On the left anterior axillary line, horizontal ECG leads are used mainly for monitoring patient
with V4 electrode. vital signs. When using the patient monitor with
other HF surgical equipment, use defibrillator-proof
 V6: On the left middle axillary line, horizontal
ECG leads.
with V4 electrode.
The placement of the ECG leads depends on the
 V3R-V6R: On the right side of the chest in
type of surgery. For example, during open heart
positions corresponding to those on the left.
surgery the electrodes can be placed laterally on
 VE: Over the xiphoid position. the chest or back. In the operating room, artifacts
may affect the ECG waveform due to the use of ES
(electrosurgery) equipment. To help reduce this
posterior axillary line of back.
interference, the electrodes can be placed on the
 V7R: On the 5th intercostal space at the right right and left shoulders, the right and left sides near
posterior axillary line of back. the abdomen and the chest lead on the left side at
mid-chest. Avoid placing the electrodes on the
upper arms, which might result in a small
waveform.
WARNING
ECG cables can be damaged when connected
to a patient during defibrillation or using other
high frequency equipment. Check cables for
functionality before using them again. It is
recommended to use defibrillator-proof ECG
lead to avoid burn.
NOTE
If an ECG waveform is not accurate (with
electrodes are tightly attached), change the leads
displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Interference from a non-grounded instrument near
the patient and ESU interference can cause
Recommended ECG lead placement for inaccurate waveforms.
surgical patients
WARNING
When using HF surgical equipment, leads
should be placed in a position in equal
distance from the Electrosurgery electrotome
and the electrosurgery grounding plate to
avoid cautery. HF surgical equipment wires
and ECG cable must not be tangled up.

Monitoring ECG
ECG menu setup
Setting alarm source  a PR source is switched on and available.

If an ECG lead becomes available again, the
To change the alarm source, select ECG Setup > monitor automatically uses HR as beat source and
Alarm Source. Select from the following options: the monitor gives a “Di” tone with a blinking heart
– HR: HR is HR/PR alarm source; displaying in the HR parameter box when one
heartbeat is detected. While a pulse is detected,
– PR: PR is HR/PR alarm source; the monitor gives a “Da” tone.
– AUTO: If the alarm source is set to AUTO, the
monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
measurement as the alarm source whenever Smart lead off
the ECG measurement is switched on and at
least one ECG lead can be measured without a When Lead Type is 5 Leads and Smart LeadOff
technical condition. The monitor will is set to On, if the selected ECG waveform cannot
automatically switch to PR as the alarm be measured because of lead-off or other reasons,
source if: it will automatically switch to another available lead
channel via which a waveform can be measured.
 a valid ECG lead can no longer be
And the lead name above the display ECG
measured and
waveform also automatically turns into the current
 a PR source is switched on and available. one.
The monitor uses the pulse rate from the currently To change the smart lead off setting, select ECG
active measurement as system pulse. While PR is Setup > Smart Leadoff. Select options from the
the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR pop-up menu.
alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead becomes
available again, the monitor automatically uses HR
as alarm source. ECG display
The ECG display varies with the Lead Type. When

Setting beat source Lead Type is set to 3 Leads, Display can be set to
Normal, and displays one ECG waveform on the
To change the beat source, select either ECG main screen.
Setup > Beat Source or PR Setup > Beat Source.
When Lead Type is set to 5 Leads, Display can be
Select from the following options:
set to Normal, Full-Scr and Half-Scr. Select
HR: HR is HR/PR beat source; Normal to display two ECG waveforms on the main
screen. Select Full-Scr to display seven ECG
PR: PR is HR/PR beat source;
waveforms. Half-Scr displays seven ECG
AUTO: If the Beat Source is set to AUTO, the waveforms on the screen in an area of four
monitor will use HR as the beat source whenever waveforms.
the ECG measurement is switched on, and at least
one ECG lead can be measured. The monitor will NOTE
automatically switch to PR as the beat source if: If 3 Leads is selected in the ECG Setup menu,
only Normal can be selected for Display in the
 a valid ECG lead can no longer be
sub-menu.
measured and

Monitoring ECG
Setting pace status WARNING

External pacing electrodes: When using
Set the paced status correctly when starting ECG pacemakers with external pacing electrodes
monitoring. To change the paced status in the ECG on the patient, the quality of arrhythmia is
Setup menu, select Pace to toggle between On or severely degraded due to the high energy
Off. When Pace is set to On: level in the pacemaker pulse. This can cause
– Pace Pulse Rejection is switched on. This arrhythmia algorithms can not detect the
means that pacemaker pulses are not counted pacemaker without capturing or asystole.
as extra QRS complexes.
WARNING
– Paced symbol is displayed as | on the main
screen. At this time, the artifact is displayed on Pacemaker spike detection is inoperative
the screen instead of the actual pacemaker when using the blue ESU trunk cables.
crest. All pacemaker crests are the same, so do
not give a diagnostic explanation about the size WARNING
and shape of the pacemaker crest. Do not use the blue ESU trunk cables except
during electrosurgery.
NOTE
When monitoring a patient with a pacemaker, set
Pace to On. If monitoring a patient without a ECG calibration
pacemaker, set Pace to Off.
Selecting this item from the ECG Setup menu
inserts a square wave into the ECG waveform that
WARNING
can be used to estimate the amplitude accuracy of
Some pace pulses can be difficult to reject. that waveform. Select the item again to turn off the
When this happens, the pulses are counted as square wave.
a QRS complex, and could result in an
incorrect HR and failure to detect cardiac NOTE
arrest or some arrhythmias. Be sure to check The patients can’t be monitored during ECG
the paced symbol on the display screen has calibration.
correctly detected the pacing pulse. Keep
pacemaker patients under close observation.
ECG waveform settings
WARNING
For patients with pacemakers, the pace must To change the speed, select ECG Waveform
be switched ON. Otherwise, the pacing Setup > Sweep, then select from the pop-up list.
impulse may be counted as regular QRS The bigger the value, the wider the waveform.
complexes, which could prevent an asystole Select ECG Waveform Setup > Cascade: Turn on
event from being detected. When changing or off ECG cascade. Cascade means the ECG
settings and admitting patients, please make waveforms displayed on the screen all occupy the
sure the pace mode is always correct. area of two waveforms. This function is valid only
when Display is set to Normal.

Monitoring ECG
ST segment monitoring
The monitor performs ST segment analysis on NOTE

normal and atrially paced beats and calculates ST
Reliable ST monitoring may be influenced in
segment elevations and depressions. This
following situations:
information can be displayed in the form of ST
numerics and ST templates on the monitor.  You are unable to get a lead with low noise.
ST segment monitoring function is shut off by  If there is arrhythmia such as atrial

default. It can be switched to On when necessary. fibrillation/flutter, the ECG baseline may be
When using the ST analysis function, the result is irregular.
displayed on the main screen.  The patient is continually performing
ventricular paced.
NOTE  The dominant template cannot be obtained for
ST-segment analysis is intended for use with adult a long time.
and pediatric patients and is not clinically validated
 The patient has left bundle branch block.
for use with neonatal patients.
When any of above situations happens, ST
NOTE monitoring should be switched off.
In ST analysis, the obtained ST value and ST
template are all unaffected by the selected filter NOTE
mode. ST algorithm itself uses a dedicated linear The ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of
filter to ensure the signal is not distorted, and to the ST segment data. The significance of the ST
better ensure the consistent and accurate segment changes need to be determined by a
measurement value and ST template can be clinician.
obtained in different filter modes. If the doctor
wants to observe the waveform to evaluate ST NOTE
segment result, it is recommended to use the ST If ST analysis is used, the user must adjust the ST
template for observation, as it is not affected by the measurement point when starting the monitor. If
filter mode. If the real-time waveform displayed on the patient's heart rate or ECG waveform changes
the interface is used to evaluate ST segment significantly, this will affect the size of the QT
result, it is recommended to select Diagnosis interval, so the ST point must be placed. If the
mode. equipotential or ST points are not set correctly, the
ST fragments of the artifacts may be depressed or
raised. Always ensure that the ST measurement
point is suitable for the patient.
NOTE
ST values may be affected by such factors as
some drugs or metabolic and conduction
disturbances.
NOTE
ST is calculated with a fixed delay from the R
position. Changes in heart rate or the width of QRS
may affect ST.

Monitoring ECG
NOTE
If the algorithm triggers self-learning (either
manually or automatically), the calculation of ST
segment will be reinitialized.
Setting ST analysis
To change ST analysis, select ECG Setup > ST

Analysis, then select On or Off from the pop-up
list. ISO: -180ms ST: +180ms
The ST and ISO measurement points need to be

ST display adjusted when monitoring is started, and if the
patient's heart rate or ECG morphology changes
The screen may look different from the illustrations. significantly. Always ensure that ST measurement
points are appropriate for the patient. Abnormal
QRS complexes are not considered in ST segment
analysis.
Adjusting ST and ISO measurement

points
Depending on the monitor's configuration, the ST

About ST measurement points point can be positioned as well.
These two points can be adjusted by turning the
The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical knob. When adjusting ST measurement point, the
difference between the isoelectric (ISO) point and system shows the ST measurement point window.
the ST point, as shown in the diagram below. The The system displays the QRS complex template in
ISO point provides the baseline, and the ST point is the window and can be adjusted using the highlight
at the midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is bar. The user can select ISO or ST by switching the
where the QRS complex changes its slope. It is a knob left or right to move the cursor line. When the
fixed distance away from the ST point and can be cursor is at the desired position, the base point or
useful during positioning. the measurement point can be selected.
Arrhythmia monitoring
Arrhythmia analysis also save arrhythmia events and generate alarming

information. The arrhythmia analysis is not clinically
The arrhythmia algorithm is used to monitor ECG of validated for use with neonatal patients. Arrhythmia
adult and pediatric patients in clinics, and detect the algorithm can monitor paced and non-paced
changes of heart rate and ventricular rhythm, and patients. Qualified personnel can use arrhythmia

Monitoring ECG
analysis to evaluate patient’s condition (such as change of ECG, arrhythmia algorithm can also
heart rate, PVCs frequency, rhythm and ectopic monitor patients and give proper alarm for
beat) and decide the treatment. Besides detecting arrhythmia.
The monitor can support up to 16 different
arrhythmia analyses.
ARR Alarms Occurring Condition

Asystole No QRS is detected for 4 consecutive seconds.
V-Fib/V-Tach 4 consecutive seconds' fibrillation wave occurs; Or 5 consecutive ventricular beats,

and ventricular HR ≥ 100 bpm.
Run PVCs 3 ≤ the number of consecutive PVCs < 5.
Couplet 2 consecutive PVCs.
PVC Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V (N = supraventricular beat, V = ventricular beat)

was detected.
PVC Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N,V.
R on T A type of single PVC under the condition that HR<100, R-R interval is less than 1/3
the average interval, followed by a compensating pause of 1.25X the average R-R
interval (the next R wave advances onto the previous T wave).
PVC Single PVC detected in normal heartbeats, and the number of single PVC ≥4 within
30 s.
Tachy Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≤ 0.5 s.
Pediatric/neonatal: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≤ 0.375 s.
Brady Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≥ 1.5 s.
Pediatric/neonatal: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≥ 1 s.
Missed Beat If HR < 120 bpm, no beats are detected for 1.75 times average RR interval; or if
HR ≥ 120 bpm, no beats are detected for one second; or no valid QRS wave is
detected within 3 s or longer.
Irr Rhythm Consistently irregular heart rhythm.
Pacer not Capture No QRS complex detected in 300 ms after a pace pulse.
Pacer not Pacing No pace pulse detected in 1.75 times RR interval after a QRS complex.
Vent Brady 5 consecutive ventricular beats, and ventricular HR < 40 bpm.
Vent Rhythm 5 consecutive ventricular beats, and 40 bpm ≤ ventricular HR < 100 bpm.
PVCs High The measurement value of PVCs is greater than high alarm limit that has been set.
Selecting an ECG lead for Arrhythmia: For non-paced patients, the guidelines are:
In arrhythmia monitoring, it is important to select the – QRS should be tall and narrow (recommended
appropriate lead. amplitude > 0.5 mV)

Monitoring ECG
– R wave should be above or below the baseline classification. Ventricular heartbeat should have a
(but not biphasic) different appearance from “normal heartbeat”.
Physicians should be more alert to these patients.
– T wave should be smaller than 1/3 of the R
wave height. NOTE
– P wave should be smaller than 1/5 of the R Heart rate reading may be affected by cardiac
wave height. arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely on heart rate
alarms when monitoring patients with arrhythmia.
For paced patients, in addition to above guidelines, Always keep these patients under close
the pacemaker signal should also: surveillance.
– not wider than normal QRS
NOTE
– The QRS complexes should be at least twice
Since the arrhythmia detection algorithm
the height of the pacing pulse
sensitivity and specificity is less than 100%,
– large enough to be detected, without sometimes there may be some false arrhythmias
repolarization signal. detected and also some true arrhythmia events
may not be detected. This is especially true when
According to Standard ISO60601-2-27, the
the signal is noisy.
minimum detection level of the QRS complex is set
to 0.15 mV, to prevent the detection of P-wave or
NOTE
baseline noise as QRS complexes. Adjusting ECG
displayed waveform size (gain adjustment) won’t The ventricular HR mentioned above refers to:
influence ECG signals which are used for when the consecutive PVCs number ≥ 5, the
arrhythmia analysis. If the ECG signal is too small, algorithm calculates ventricular HR with the
a false asystole alarm may occur. average of 4-8 RR intervals.
Aberrantly-Conducted Beats: The methods are different from the HR Averaging

Method of the monitor. Therefore, the ventricular
As not recognizing the P waves, the monitoring HR values calculated by the ARR algorithm may
system is difficult to distinguish between aberrantly- be different from the HR values calculated by HR
conducted beats and ventricular heartbeat. If the Averaging Method. The ventricular HR is for
aberrantly-conducted beat is similar to ventricular judging arrhythmias and is not exactly equal to the
tachycardia, it may be classified as ventricular. HR displayed on the interface.
Make sure to select such a lead, the aberrantly-
conducted beats have an R wave that is as narrow NOTE
as possible to minimize the incorrect calls. The The ARR analysis results and HR values obtained
ventricular should have a different appearance during ARR analysis and HR calculation are not
from “normal heartbeat”. Physicians should be affected by the selected filter mode. The algorithm
more alert to these patients. itself has independent data-flow processing, which
Intermittent bundle branch block: bundle branch can better ensure the consistent and accurate
block or other bundle obstruction phenomenon is a results in different filter modes.
challenge for arrhythmia algorithm. If the QRS
wave during the block has a considerable change
in morphology compared to the normal QRS of ARR Analysis menu
learning, the blocked heartbeat may be
misclassified as ventricular tachycardia, resulting in Switching ARR analysis on and off
an incorrect chamber alarm. Make sure to select To switch ARR Analysis on or off, in the ECG Setup
such a lead, which blocks the heartbeat of the R menu, select ARR Analysis to toggle between On
wave as narrow as possible to minimize the wrong and Off.

Monitoring ECG
ARR Alarm Setup NOTE

Select ECG Setup > ARR Analysis > ARR Alarm Both the ARR alarm information and threshold
Setup to change the following ARR alarm settings: value are displayed when the above ARR alarms
are triggered.
 Separately switch on or off each arrhythmia
alarm and set the alarm level/record.
 Select All Alarms On/All Alarms Off to switch ARR Selflearning
on or off all arrhythmia alarms. Select this item ARR Selflearn to start a learning
 Set the threshold of certain arrhythmia alarms. procedure. ECG ARR Learning is displayed on the
When an arrhythmia exceeds its threshold, an screen. The ARR selflearning will start
alarm will be triggered. automatically in the following status:
 Select Default to restore the ARR alarm  Connecting or switching calculation leads;
settings to factory defaults.  Admitting a patient;
Confirm the changes to make the settings  Changing patient type or lead type;
effective.  Changing pacemaker status;
V-Fib/V-Tach and Vent Brady are key ARR  Exiting demo or standby mode;
alarms and they are preset to be on. The user can
 Switching calibration mode into normal
switch on/off those key ARR alarms only when Key measurement mode;
ARR Alarm Switch Authority is enabled. To
 Switching the ECG parameter on.
enable the authority,
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, NOTE
and enter the required password. During the relearning phase of the algorithm,
2 Select Alarm Setup and set Key ARR Alarm arrhythmia detection may not be available. So you
Switch Authority to On. If any of key ARR should closely monitor the patient condition during
alarms is switched off, the bottom information and for several minutes after the learning phase to
area will prompt Key ARR Alarm Off. Clicking allow the algorithm to reach optimal detection
the prompts can view the details. performance.
Asystole alarm is preset to be on and cannot be
NOTE
turned off.
Take care to initiate ARR selflearning only during
WARNING periods of predominantly normal rhythm and when
When the ARR alarm is set to Off, the monitor ECG signal is relatively noise-free. If ARR
won’t give an alarm prompt even if an alarm selflearning takes place during arrhythmia, the
occurs. In order to avoid endangering the ectopics may be incorrectly learned as normal
patient’s life, the user should use this function QRS complex. This may result in missed detection
cautiously. of subsequent events of arrhythmia.
Pacer not Capture and Pacer not Pacing alarms

are available only when Pace is set to On.
Adjustable Range of ARR Alarm Threshold
ARR Alarm Range
PVCs High 1/min to 99/min

Monitoring ECG
NOTE
If ARR selflearning is performed during ventricular
rhythm, ventricular heartbeats may be erroneously
identified as normal QRS complexes. This may
lead to missed ventricular tachycardia and
ventricular fibrillation events.
Due to this reason, you should:
1 Take care that ARR selflearning may start
automatically;
2 Response to lead off information;
3 Always check the correctness of arrhythmia
alarm.
ECG leadwires and trunk cables (New added)
The following chapter refers to ECG leadwires and

trunk cables in the following order list.
Order list
Description Part No.

ECG leadwires
ECG leadwire, 3-lead single-pin, IEC, 1m 2612000
ECG leadwire, 3-lead single-pin, AHA, 1m 2612001
ECG leadwire, 5-lead single-pin, IEC, 1.5m 2612002
ECG leadwire, 5-lead single-pin, AHA, 1.5m 2612003
ECG trunk cables
ECG defib trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 1.5m 2612020
ECG defib trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 2.5m 2612021
ECG defib trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 1.5m 2612026
ECG defib trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 2.5m 2612027
ECG blue trunk cables with ESU
ECG ESU trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 1.5m 2612024
ECG ESU trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 2.5m 2612025
ECG ESU trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 1.5m 2612028
ECG ESU trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 2.5m 2612029

Monitoring ECG
Definition of target group Installation and operation
For the ECG leadwires and trunk cables, users are For installation of the ECG leadwires and
defined as target group. trunkcables, refer to the chapter Monitoring
procedure in this instruction for use. Pay special
This target group must have received instruction in
attention to all WARNING and -CAUTION
the use of the product and must have the necessary
statements relating to the use of ECG equipment.
training and knowledge to use the product.
The product must be used exclusively by the WARNING
defined target group. Risk of patient injury
Do not operate the medical device in magnetic
Users resonance imaging environments.
ECG leadwires and Trunkcables are not to be
See chapter “Intended user” on page 26. used in X-Ray environment.
During electro surgery the applicable
precautions stated in the instructions for use
of the basic device must be observed.
To minimize the risk of patient strangulation,
WARNING carefully position and secure ECG cables.
The medical device must not be modified.
Modifications to the medical device may lead CAUTION
to malfunction. ECG leadwires and trunkcables are intended to
be used with Vista 120 series models only.
WARNING
Before first use inspect the primary packaging. Do
not use the ECG leadwire in case the primary
Do not use damaged or broken items. packaging is damaged.
Otherwise, the correct functioning of the
medical device may be impaired. WARNING
Impedance respiration monitoring and
CAUTION pacemaker spike detection are inoperative
Strictly observe the instructions for use of the when using the blue ESU trunk cables.
basic device on which this medical device is used.
Do not use the blue ESU trunk cables except
during electrosurgery.
Intended use
Dräger ECG leadwire sets, reusable, for acquisition

and transmission of ECG signals from patient
electrodes to patient monitors.
Dräger ECG trunkcables, for transmission of ECG
signals from ECG leadwires to patient monitors.
These ECG leadwire sets and trunkcables are
approved for Vista 120 patient monitoring systems.

Monitoring ECG
Cleaning and disinfection For choosing the appropriate disinfectant, observe

country-specific lists of disinfectants.
Observe the hygiene regulations of the hospital. Strictly observe the manufacturer’s instructions for
using disinfectants. The composition of
WARNING disinfectants may change.
The ECG leadwires and ECG trunk cable are
reusable.
Before using, clean and/or disinfect ECG Manual disinfection and simultaneous
leadwires and trunk cables. cleaning
Do not autoclave ECG leadwires and trunk 1 Carefully and completely remove all visible dirt
cables. immediately with a cloth soaked in disinfectant.
Make sure that the surfaces to be disinfected
are completely and sufficiently wetted with
Testing of procedures and agents disinfectant.
Cleaning and disinfection of ECG lead wires and 2 Perform surface disinfection (scrub-and-wipe
trunk cables have been tested with the following disinfection).
procedures and agents. At the time of testing, the 3 After the contact time has elapsed, remove
following procedures and agents showed good disinfectant residues.
material compatibility and effectiveness:
Manual disinfection and simultaneous cleaning: WARNING
Risk of electric shock or device malfunction
– Incidin® Extra N by Ecolab
Penetrating liquid may cause malfunction of
– Incidin® Plus by Ecolab
or damage to the reusable ECG cables, which
– Sani-Cloth Active® by Ecolab may endanger the patient.
– Optim 33 TB® by Virox Only scrub-and-wipe-disinfect ECG cables
and make sure no -liquids penetrate into the
– mikrozid® PAA wipes by Schülke
ECG cables.
– Klorsept 17 by Medentech
– Green soap, green soap tincture
(U.S.Pharmacopoeia), or alcohol-free hand Visual inspection
soap;
Check all items for damage and external signs of
– 2% glutaraldehyde solution; wear, such as cracking, embrittlement, or
– Sodium hypochlorite (bleach) solution 10% in pronounced hardening, and residual dirt.
water
WARNING
Risk due to faulty accessories
Even reusable accessories have a limited
service life. If there are external signs of wear,
e.g., cracks, deformations, or peeling,
exchange affected accessories.

Monitoring ECG
Disposal
After use, the medical device must be disposed of

according to the applicable hospital, hygiene and
waste disposal regulations.
Ambient conditions
During operation
Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1060 hPa
Relative humidity 5 % to 95 %, non-
condensing
During storage/transport
Temperature –20 °C to 55 °C
Atmospheric pressure 500 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity 5 % to 95 %, non-
condensing
The ECG equipment in this chapter meets the
requirements of the standard, ECG TRUNK
CABLES and PATIENT LEADWIRES
ANSI/AAMIEC53.


Monitoring RESP
Monitoring RESP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RESP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Electrode placement for monitoring resp . . 119
Cardiac overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chest expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Abdominal breathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Selecting RESP lead. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Changing hold type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Changing the size of the respiration

waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Changing the apnea alarm time . . . . . . . . . . 121

Monitoring RESP
Overview
The monitor measures respiration from the amount

of thoracic impedance between two ECG
electrodes. The change of impedance between the
two electrodes, (due to the thoracic movement),
produces a respiratory waveform on the screen.
RESP safety information
WARNING WARNING
If the user does not set the Hold High and Hold Cardiogenic artifact in impedance respiration
Low for the respiration correctly in manual monitoring may make it difficult to detect
detection mode, it may not be possible for the breaths or may otherwise be counted as
monitor to detect apnea. If the user sets the breaths. In some instances, the breath rate
Hold High and Hold Low too low, the monitor may also correspond to the heart rate making
is more likely to detect cardiac overlay, and to it difficult to determine if the signal is due to
falsely interpret cardiac overlay as respiratory breathing or the cardiac cycle. Do not rely on
activity in the case of apnea. RESP monitoring as the sole method for
detecting cessation of breathing. Follow
WARNING hospital guidelines and best clinical practices
for apnea detection including monitoring
Respiration measurements can not detect all
additional parameters that indicate the
underexposure sudden events, nor can they
patient’s oxygenation status, such as etCO2
distinguish between central, obstructive and
and SpO2.
mixed respiratory asphyxial events. It only
prompts alarm in a predetermined time if the
last breath is detected and the next breath is WARNING
not detected, so it can not be used for For the diagnosis of apnea, especially in
diagnostic purposes. premature infants and infants, the safety and
effectiveness of respiration measurements
WARNING have not been validated.
If operating under conditions according to the
EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated WARNING
Immunity 3 V/m), field strengths above 3 V/m To monitor the respiration, only non-ESU-
may cause erroneous measurements at proof accessories can be used. This is
various frequencies. Therefore it is because the internal impedance of the ESU-
recommended to avoid the use of electrically proof accessories required to be used for
radiating equipment in close proximity to the electrosurgical operation is too large.
respiration measurement unit.

Monitoring RESP
WARNING WARNING
Some implantable pacemakers can adjust Respiration measurement cannot be
their triggering frequency according to the performed when ESU is used.
"minute ventilation rate." Impedance
respiration measurements may cause these WARNING
pacemakers to react incorrectly. To prevent Impedance respiration monitoring is
this, turn off the respiration measurement. inoperative when using the blue ESU trunk
cables.
WARNING
In manual detection mode, after changing the NOTE
gain of the respiration wave, be sure to check The RESP monitoring is not recommended to be
the setting of Hold High and Hold Low. used on patients who are very active, as this can
cause false alarms.
WARNING
When ECG electrode is placed on patient’s
limb, the impedance respiration may be
unreliable.
Electrode placement for monitoring resp
Correct patient skin preparation for electrode

placement is important for RESP measurement.
Refer to the chapter on ECG for more information.
The RESP signal is always measured between two
of the ECG electrodes. There are two standard
ECG leads for selection: I lead (RA and LA) and
II lead (RA and LL).
LA
RA
RE
SP
RL LL

Monitoring RESP
Cardiac overlay
Cardiac activity that affects the RESP waveform is can reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and
called cardiac overlay. This occurs when RESP the ventricles of the heart in the line between the
electrodes detect impedance changes caused by respiratory electrodes. This is particularly important
rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrode placement for neonates.
Chest expansion
Some patients, especially neonates, expand their left lateral chest areas at the maximum expansion
chests laterally. In this case, place the two point. This placement optimizes respiratory
respiratory electrodes in the right midaxillary and waveform results.
Abdominal breathing
Some patients with restricted chest movement NOTE

breathe mainly abdominally. In this case, place the
Place the red and green electrodes diagonally to
LL electrode on the left abdomen at the point of
optimize the respiration waveform. Do not position
maximum abdominal expansion. This placement
electrodes over the liver or the heart’s ventricles.
optimizes respiratory waveform results.
This is an especially important safety procedure
for neonates.
Selecting RESP lead
To change RESP lead: From the RESP Setup

menu, select RESP Lead, then choose the
appropriate lead from the pop-up list.

Monitoring RESP
Changing hold type
To change the calculation mode: From the RESP

Setup menu, set Hold Type to Manual or AUTO.
When set to AUTO mode, Hold High and Hold
Low are unavailable, and the monitor calculates
the respiration rate automatically. When set to
Manual mode, the broken lines in RESP area can
be adjusted by using Hold High and Hold Low.
Changing the size of the respiration waveform
Select the RESP waveform area to display the  Select Sweep: Select an appropriate setting
Resp waveform menu: from the pop-up list.
 Select AMP and select the desired value.
Larger values increase the waveform
amplitude.
Changing the apnea alarm time
The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to

detect apneas. The apnea alarm delay time defines
the time period between the point where the
monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and
the indication of the apnea alarm. Users should set
it cautiously.
1 In the RESP Setup menu, select Apnea Alm.
2 Select the desired setting from the pop-up list.


Monitoring SpO2
Monitoring SpO2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
SpO2 safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Measuring SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Measurement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Measurement limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Perfusion Index (PI)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
SpO2 Alarm Delays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
SatSeconds Alarm Management* . . . . . . . . . 129

Describing SatSeconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
SatSeconds "Safety Net" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting SatSeconds Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Measuring SpO2 and NIBP

Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting pitch tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Monitoring SpO2
Overview
SpO2 is used to measure arterial blood oxygen

saturation, which is the percentage of
oxyhemoglobin in the arterial blood. The SpO2
parameter can also provide a pulse rate (PR) and a
plethysmogram waveform (Pleth).
SpO2 safety information
WARNING WARNING
Do not use the SpO2 sensors if the packaging Neonate SpO2 sensor can only be used when
or the sensor is damaged and return them to required, no more than 20 min at a time.
the vendor.
WARNING
WARNING Use only Dräger permitted sensors and
If the SpO2 sensor does not work properly, extension cables with the oximeter. Other
reconnect the sensor or use a new one. sensors or extension cables may cause
improper monitor performance and/or minor
WARNING personal injury.
Correct and proper sensor application: if the
sensor is too loose, it might compromise the WARNING
optical alignment, and even cause the sensor High oxygen levels may predispose a
to fall off. If the sensor is too tight, (such as premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If
the application site is too large or becomes this is a consideration do NOT set the high
too large due to edema), excessive pressure alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to
and local tissue ischemia, hypoxia and lack of switching the high limit alarm off.
nutrition may occur on the application site.
Prolonged and continuous monitoring may WARNING
increase the risk of skin irritations or When serious arrhythmia is present, the SpO2
lacerations. To avoid these damages, users pulse rate may differ from ECG heart rate but
should periodically check surrounding skin of this does not indicate an inaccurate PR (SpO2)
application site according to the patient's value.
condition and pressure sensor, inspect the if
there is sign of stress-related damage in WARNING
surrounding tissue, and regularly change the
Misapplied sensor or sensor that becomes
application site. For the patients whose fluid is
partially dislodged may cause either over or
easy to transfer and/or the patients with
under reading of actual arterial oxygen
systemic or localized edema, users should
saturation.
inspect the skin and change application site
more frequently.

Monitoring SpO2
NOTE NOTE
Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an SpO2 waveform is not directly proportional to the
arterial catheter, or intravascular venous infusion pulse volume.
line, or inflated NIBP cuff. When measuring SpO2
on the limb with inflated NIBP cuff, please turn on NOTE
the NIBP Simul function. The device is calibrated to display functional
oxygen saturation.
NOTE
When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is NOTE
indicated, analyze the blood samples with a Functional tester or simulator can not be used to
laboratory co-oximeter to completely understand assess the SpO2 accuracy. However, it can be
the patient’s condition. used to demonstrate that a particular monitor
reproduces a calibration curve that has been
NOTE independently demonstrated to meet a particular
If the surrounding temperature increases, the accuracy.
operator should pay attention to the site of poor
perfusion, and increase the frequency of checking NOTE
the skin and changing the measurement site to The cumulative use time for the SpO2 sensor in a
prevent burns. If the initial skin temperature is less single patient should be less than 30 days.
than 35 °C (95 °F), the temperature of all the listed
sensors on the skin will not exceed 41 °C
(105.8 °F) during working.
Measuring SpO2
1 Select the correct patient category setting Before Applying the Sensor
(adult/pediatric and neonatal). This is used to
Be sure to understand all warnings listed in the
optimize the calculation of the SpO2 and pulse
previous section before applying any sensor to a
numerics.
patient. Also,check the sensor as follows:
2 During measurement, ensure that the
 Check the sensor outside and inside. To inspect
application site:
the inside, gently open the sensor cavity and
– has a pulsatile flow, ideally with a good check splits on or next to the transparent
circulation perfusion. silicone that covers the optical elements.
– has not changed in its thickness, causing an  Any sensor showing signs of damage or
improper fit of the sensor. alteration must not be used for further patient
monitoring; instead, dispose of it using proper
disposal procedures.
Measurement procedure
1 Switch on the monitor.

2 Attach the sensor to the appropriate site of the
patient.

Monitoring SpO2
Applying Finger/Soft-tip Sensors: WARNING

 Nip the clamp, and choose a site that is well Inspect the application site every two to three
perfused and minimally restricts a conscious hours to ensure skin quality and correct
patient’s movements. The ring finger of the non- optical alignment. If the skin quality changes,
dominant hand is preferred. Alternatively, the move the sensor to another site. Change the
other fingers on the non-dominant hand may be application site at least every four hours. For
used. neonatal patients, change the measuring site
every 20 minutes.
 The big toe or long toe (next to the big toe) may
be used on restrained patients or patients
whose hands are unavailable. WARNING
Assessing the Validity of a SpO2 Reading
 Place the finger into the sensor according to the
direction of the symbol on the sensor. Adjust the The user can check the quality of the pleth
finger to ensure that the pad of the finger wave and the stability of the SpO2 values to
completely covers the sensor detection window. assess whether the sensor functions properly
and whether the SpO2 readings are valid.
 Orient the sensor so that the cable will be Always use these two indications
running towards the top of the patient’s hand. simultaneously to assess the validity of a
 Connect the sensor with the monitor (or with the SpO2 reading.
extension cable if needed). Generally, the quality of the SpO2 pleth wave
reflects the quality of the light signals
Applying Neonatal Finger (or Toe) Wrap obtained by the sensor. A wave of poor quality
Sensors: manifests a decline of the signal validity. On
the other hand, the stability of the SpO2 values
 When you perform the measurement, position also reflects the signal quality. Different from
the sensor over the hand or foot with optical varying SpO2 readings caused by
components opposite each other. physiological factors, unstable SpO2 readings
 Hold the sensor, and insert stretched strap into are resulted from the sensor's receiving
slot, hold it there while threading end through signals with interference. The problems
latch. If strap is too long, thread it through mentioned above may be caused by patient
second latch. movement, wrong sensor placement or
sensor malfunction. To obtain valid SpO2
 Connect the sensor with the monitor (or with the readings, try to limit patient movement, check
extension cable if needed). the placement of the sensor, measure another
site or replace the sensor.
Applying Adult/Pediatric Ear Clip Sensor:
 When you perform the measurement, clip the
plastic fixing part on top of the ear; reinforce
it to prevent falling off or getting loose.
 Clip the probe onto fleshy part of the lobe with
optical components opposite to each other.
 Connect the sensor with the monitor (or with the
extension cable if needed).
3 Plug the sensor extension cable connector into
the SpO2 socket.

Monitoring SpO2
NOTE NOTE
The SpO2 accuracy has been validated in Clean and remove any substances such as nail
controlled human studies against arterial blood polish from the application site. Periodically check
sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. to ensure that the sensor remains properly
SpO2 measurements are statistically distributed, positioned on the patient.
only about two-thirds of the measurements can be
expected to fall within the specified accuracy
compared to CO-oximeter measurements. The
volunteer population in the studies are composed
of healthy men and women from age 19 to 37 (for
Dräger SpO2 module), from 18 to 50 (for Nellcor
SpO2 module), with variations of skin
pigmentations. Note that the study population was
healthy adults and not in the actual intended use
population.
NOTE
The pulse rate accuracy is obtained by comparison
to the pulse rate generated with an arterial oxygen
simulator (also an electronic pulse simulator).
NOTE
During monitoring, if the monitor's reading differs
significantly from the patient's physiological
condition, it indicates that the signal may be
disturbed, resulting in an inaccurate reading. In
this case, the artifact can disguise as a similar
reading, causing the monitor to fail to send an
alarm. In order to ensure reliable monitoring, it is
necessary to regularly check whether the sensor is
wearing properly and the signal quality is good.
NOTE
Injected dyes such as methylene blue or
intravascular dyshemoglobins such as
methemoglobin and carboxyhemoglobin may lead
to inaccurate measurements.
NOTE
Inspect the sensor to ensure that the light emitter
and receiver are aligned with each other and there
is no gap between the sensor and the finger. All the
light emitted by the light emitter must pass through
the patient's tissue. The sensor cable should be
placed on the back of the hand.

Monitoring SpO2
Measurement limitations
Certain patient conditions can affect the

measurements or cause the loss of the pulse NOTE
signal. To prevent interference from ambient light, ensure
that the sensor is properly applied, and cover the
Inaccurate measurements can be caused but not
sensor site with opaque material.
limited by:
 incorrect sensor application
NOTE
 high ambient light sources, such as surgical Adjacent SpO2 sensors may interfere with each
lights (especially those with a xenon light other (eg, multiple SpO2 measurements in the
source), bilirubin lamps, fluorescent lights, same patient). Be sure to cover the sensor with
infrared heating lamps, and direct sunlight opaque material to reduce cross-interference.
 failure to cover the sensor with opaque material
in high ambient light conditions
NOTE
 dysfunctional hemoglobins Move the sensor to a less active site, and keep the
 low peripheral perfusion patient still, if possible.
 excessive or violent patient movement

NOTE
 venous pulsations
For Nellcor SpO2 module, the algorithm
 intravascular dyes, such as indocyanine green automatically extends the amount of data required
or methylene blue for measuring SpO2 and PR depending on the
measurement conditions. During normal
 externally applied coloring agents (nail polish,
measurement conditions the averaging time is 6 to
dye, pigmented cream)
7 s. During conditions such as those caused by low
 defibrillation perfusion, interference (e.g., external interference
such as ambient light or patient movement), or a
 placement of the sensor on an extremity with a
combination of these, the algorithm automatically
blood pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or
extends the amount of data required beyond 7 s.
intravascular line
If the resulting dynamic averaging time exceeds
 electromagnetic interference. 20 s, the screen will display prompt message
“SpO2 Search Pulse” and SpO2 and PR will
Loss-of-pulse signal can occur for the following
continue to be updated every second. As these
reasons:
conditions extend, the amount of data required
 the sensor is applied too tightly continues to increase. If the dynamic averaging
time reaches 40 s, the screen will display high-
 a blood pressure cuff is inflated on the same
level alarm message “SpO2 No Pulse” indicating a
extremity as the one with the sensor attached
loss-of-pulse condition.
 there is arterial occlusion proximal to the sensor
 low peripheral profusion.

Monitoring SpO2
Perfusion Index (PI)*
* Only applicable to the Dräger SpO2 module. PI is indicated by a value ranging from 0 to 10. The
bigger the value is, the better the perfusion and the
PI is a numeric value indicating perfusion level. It
signal quality will be. The perfusion level and the
reflects the perfusion level at the monitoring site.
signal quality are at their maximum when the value
As the measurement of SpO2 is based on the reaches 10. When PI is below 2, it indicates the low
pulsation caused by the blood flow through the perfusion and the poor signal quality at the
vessel, PI is in relation to the strength of the pulse. monitoring site; the user needs to reposition the
Also, the user can use PI as a signal quality sensor or find a better site.
indicator for the measurement of SpO2.
The PI value is displayed in the SpO2 parameter area.
SpO2 Alarm Delays
There is a delay between a physiological event at 2 The time between the displayed numerical
the measurement site and the corresponding alarm values exceeding an alarm limit and the alarm
at the monitor. This delay has two components: indication on the monitor. This delay is the
combination of the configured alarm delay time
1 The time between the occurrence of the
plus the general system delay time.
physiological event and when this event is
represented by the displayed numerical values.
This delay depends on the algorithmic
processing time and the sensitivity. The lower
the sensitivity configured, the longer the time
needed until the numerical values reflect the
physiological event.
SatSeconds Alarm Management*
* Only applicable to the Nellcor SpO2 module. level fluctuates near an alarm limit, the alarm is
triggered each time the limit is violated. Such
* Not applicable to Vista 120 CMS.
frequent alarms can be distracting.
With the SatSeconds technique, upper and lower
Describing SatSeconds SpO2 alarm limits are set in the same way as
traditional alarm management. However, the user
With traditional alarm management, upper and can also set a SatSeconds limit that allows
lower alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen monitoring of SpO2 below the selected lower alarm
saturation. During monitoring, as soon as an alarm limit and above the selected upper alarm limit for a
limit is violated by as little as one percentage point, period of time before an alarm is triggered.
an alarm is immediately triggered. When the SpO2

Monitoring SpO2
The method of calculation is as follows:

The number of percentage points that the SpO2
falls outside the alarm limit is multiplied by the
number of seconds that the SpO2 level remains
outside that limit. This can be stated as an
equation:
Points × Seconds = SatSeconds
Where: 50 SatSeconds
Alarm Point
Points = SpO2 percentage points outside of the limit
Seconds = number of seconds that SpO2 remains SECONDS
at that point outside of the limit
The alarm response time, assuming a SatSeconds Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than
limit set at 50 and a lower alarm limit set at 90, is remaining steady for a period of several seconds.
described and illustrated below. Often, the patient SpO2 may fluctuate above and
below the alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm
In this example, the SpO2 level drops to 88 range several times. During such fluctuation, the
(2 points below the limit) and remains there for a monitor integrates the number of SpO2 points, both
period of 2 seconds (2 points × 2 seconds = 4 positive and negative, until either the SatSeconds
SatSeconds). The SpO2 then drops to 86 for limit is reached, or the patient SpO2 returns within a
3 seconds and then to 84 for 6 seconds. The normal range and remains there.
resulting SatSeconds values are shown below:
SpO2 Seconds SatSeconds
SatSeconds "Safety Net"
2 x 2 = 4
4 x 3 = 12 The SatSeconds "Safety Net" is for patients whose
saturation makes frequent excursions below or
6 x 6 = 36 above the SpO2 limit but does not remain in
Total SatSeconds = 52 violation long enough for the SatSeconds limit to be
reached. If three or more SpO2 alarm limit
After approximately 10.7 seconds, a SatSeconds violations occur within a 60-second period, an
alarm will be triggered, because the limit of 50 alarm will be triggered even if the SatSeconds limit
SatSeconds has been exceeded. See arrow () in has not been reached.
the following figure.
Setting SatSeconds Duration
The user can set SatSeconds to Off or to the

duration among 10, 25, 50 and 100. To configure
the SatSeconds settings, enter the SpO2 Setup
menu and select the desired SatSeconds setting
from the SatSeconds list.

Monitoring SpO2
Measuring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously
While measuring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb set to Off, low perfusion caused by NIBP
simultaneously, the user can set NIBP Simul to On measurement may lead to inaccurate SpO2
in SpO2 Setup menu to lock the SpO2 alarm status readings and therefore cause false physiological
until the NIBP measurement ends. If NIBP Simul is alarms.
Setting pitch tone
If tone modulation is on, the PR sound lowers when

the SpO2 level drops. In SpO2 Setup menu, select
Pitch Tone to toggle between On and Off.
Setting sensitivity
Sensitivity allows the user to set the refresh

frequency. High is the highest SpO2 refresh
frequency value. To change the sensitivity:
1 Select the SpO2 Setup menu;
2 Select Sensitivity and set the desired
sensitivity from the pop-up list.


Monitoring PR
Monitoring PR
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting PR Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting PR volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Selecting the active alarm source. . . . . . . . . 134

Monitoring PR
Overview
The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations

that result from heart mechanical activity of the
heart in beats per minute (bpm). A pulse can be
obtained from any measured SpO2 signal or any
arterial pressure.
Setting PR Source
The monitor provides PR source options. You can

NOTE
select SpO2 or arterial pressure labels as the PR
source in the PR Source list on the PR Setup In the PR Source list, an arterial pressure label
menu. accompanied with a label with brackets indicates
this label is in conflict. Do not select a conflicting
label as the PR source.
Setting PR volume
Select PR Setup > PR Volume, then select the selected, the PR volume will be off. Beat frequency
appropriate setting for the PR volume: five bars of pulse has positive correlation with measurement
represent the maximum volume and one bar value.
represents the minimum volume. If none of bars are
Selecting the active alarm source
In most cases, the HR and PR numerics are AUTO: If the alarm source is set to AUTO, the
identical. To avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
PR, the monitor uses either ECG or PR as its active measurement as the alarm source whenever the
alarm source. To change the alarm source, select ECG measurement is switched on and at least one
either ECG Setup > Alarm Source or PR Setup > ECG lead can be measured without a technical
Alarm Source, then select: alarm condition. The monitor will automatically
switch to PR for the alarm source if:
HR: HR is HR/PR alarm source;
 a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured
PR: PR is HR/PR alarm source. Be aware that if
and
you select PR as the alarm source, ECG HR alarms
are switched off;  a PR source is switched on and available.

Monitoring PR
The monitor uses the pulse rate from the currently

active measurement as system pulse. While PR is
the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR
alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead becomes
available again, the monitor automatically uses HR
as alarm source.
NOTE
Pulse alarms are generated only when the active
alarm source is set to PR, a pulse source is set as
system pulse and pulse alarms are switched on.


Monitoring NIBP
Monitoring NIBP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
NIBP safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Measurement limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Measurement methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Measurement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Operation prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Correcting the measurement if limb

is not at heart Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NIBP Multi-Review Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Resetting NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Calibrating NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Leak test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Procedure for leak testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting inflation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Assisting Venipuncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Monitoring NIBP
Overview
This monitor uses the oscillometric method for The blood pressure measurements determined
measuring NIBP. It can be used for adult, pediatric with this device comply with the American National
and neonatal patients. It is also intended for use Standard for Electronic or Automated
with pregnant, including pre-eclamptic patients. Sphygmomanometers (ISO 81060-2:2013) in
relation to mean error and standard deviation. In
Oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of
clinical investigation method with a reference
pressure changes in the occluding cuff as the cuff
sphygmomanometer, the fifth Korotkoff sound was
deflates from above systolic pressure. The
used to determine adult diastolic pressure, and the
amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse breaks
fourth Korotkoff sound was used to determine
through the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff
pediatric diastolic pressure. The invasive blood
pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase
pressure is used to determine the neonate
in amplitude, reach a maximum (which
pressure in clinical investigation, and the arterial
approximates to the mean pressure), and then
reference sites include umbilical artery, arteria
diminish.
cruralis, axillary artery, brachial artery, dorsalis
pedis, and radial artery.
NIBP safety information
The monitor and peripheral devices are protected WARNING

against high-frequency interference from
Do not apply the cuff to a limb that has an
defibrillators and electrosurgical units and against
intravenous infusion or catheter in place. This
50- and 60-Hz power line interference.
could cause tissue damage around the
WARNING catheter when infusion is slowed or blocked
during cuff inflation.
Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-
cell disease or any condition where skin
damage has occurred or is expected. WARNING
Do not attach the cuff to a limb being used for
WARNING IV infusions as the cuff inflation can block the
Do not measure NIBP on the arm of the same infusion, potentially causing harm to patient.
side with a mastectomy.
WARNING
WARNING Do not apply the cuff to a limb where
Use clinical judgment to decide whether to intravascular access or therapy, or an arterio-
perform frequent blood pressure venous (A-V) shunt is present, otherwise, it
measurements on patients with severe blood may result in injury to the patient.
clotting disorders because of the risk of
hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.

Monitoring NIBP
WARNING NOTE
Ensure that the correct patient type is selected If the user spills liquid onto the equipment or
before performing measurements. Do not accessories, particularly if there is a chance that it
apply the higher adult inflation, overpressure can get inside the tubing or the measurement
limits and measurement duration for neonatal device, contact service personnel.
patients. Not using the neonate mode on a
neonatal patient can block the blood flow, NOTE
potentially causing harm to the patient. Continuous use of the automatic measuring mode
for short intervals may lead to the discomfort of the
WARNING patient. Continuous measuring and automatic
Make sure that the air tubing connecting the measuring in neonatal or pediatric mode may
blood pressure cuff and the monitor is neither result in tissue damage or ischemia to the patient.
blocked nor tangled.
NOTE
WARNING NIBP measurement can be affected by extremes
Measuring of blood pressure can temporarily of temperature, humidity and altitude.
cause malfunctioning of other medical
monitoring devices on the same limb. NOTE
NIBP measurement value should be explained by
WARNING qualified professionals.
NIBP readings can be affected by the
measurement site, the position of the patient, NOTE
exercise, or the patient's physiologic The pulse rate based on the NIBP measurement
conditions. may differ from the heart rate based on the ECG
waveform. NIBP measures the number of
WARNING peripheral pulse pulsations, and the heart rate is
Continuous cuff pressure due to connection measured by the electrical signal of the heart.
tubing kinking can block the blood flow, and When the electrical signals of the heart
may result in injury to the patient. occasionally fail to cause the peripheral blood
vessels to pulse or the patient's peripheral
WARNING perfusion is poor, the difference happens.
Verifying the calibration is only applicable for
adults, and it cannot be operated in automatic NOTE
measuring interval. Continuous measuring The cumulative use time for the NIBP cuff in a
cannot be operated in automatic measuring single patient should be less than 30 days.
interval either.
NOTE
Do not start NIBP measurements during low
battery conditions (the monitor may turn off
automatically).
NOTE
If an alarm occurs or measurement fails,
discontinue the measurement.

Monitoring NIBP
Measurement limitations
Measurements are impossible with pulse rate 12:10, 12:20, 12:30,

extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 10 min 12:02
12:40, and so forth.
240 bpm, or if the patient is on a heart-lung
machine. 12:15, 12:30, 12:
15 min 12:02 45, 13:00, and so
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible
forth.
in the following situations:
12:30, 13:00, 13:30,
 A regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to 30 min 12:02
detect.
13:00, 14:00, 15:00,
 Patients with cardiac arrhythmias. 60 min 12:02
 Patients with excessive and continuous 13:00, 14:30, 16:00,
90 min 12:02
movement such as shivering or convulsions. 17:30, and so forth.
 Patients with rapid blood pressure changes. 13:00, 15:00, 17:00,
120 min 12:02
 Patients with severe shock or hypothermia that
reduces blood flow to the periphery. 13:00, 16:00, 19:00,
180 min 12:02
 Obese patients, where a thick layer of fat
13:00, 17:00, 21:00,
surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations 240 min 12:02
coming from the artery. 1:00, and so forth.
13:00, 19:00, 1:00,
 Patients with an edematous extremity. 360 min 12:02
7:00, and so forth.
13:00, 21:00, 5:00,
480 min 12:02
Measurement methods 13:00, and so forth.
 Continuous - NIBP measurements run
There are three methods of measuring NIBP: consecutively in five minutes, and then the
 Manual - measurement on demand. monitor switches to manual mode.
 Auto - continually repeated measurements WARNING

(between 1 and 480 minute adjustable interval). Prolonged non-invasive blood pressure
After the first measurement ends, the monitor measurements in Auto mode may be
will automatically measure NIBP as preset associated with purpura, ischemia and
interval. When the measurement interval is set neuropathy in the limb wearing the cuff. When
to the value between 5 and 480 minutes, the monitoring a patient, examine the extremities
system will automatically adjust the next of the limb frequently for normal color, warmth
measurement time. Here’s an example. and sensitivity. If any abnormality is observed,
Auto stop the blood pressure measurements.
Current Next Measurement
Measurement
Time Time
Interval
12:05, 12:10, 12:15,
5 min 12:02

Monitoring NIBP
Measurement procedures
To obtain accurate measurements, the following 5 Check if the patient type is appropriate. Access
operating steps need to be observed: the Patient Setup menu from Menu. Turn the
knob to select the desired patient Type in the
1 Ensure the patient position in normal use,
Patient Info. menu.
including:
6 Select a measurement mode and NIBP Unit
 Comfortably seated (or lie flat on back)
(mmHg, kPa or cmH2O, 1 mmHg=0.133 kPa,
 Legs uncrossed 1 mmHg=1.36 cmH2O) in the NIBP Setup
menu. Refer to chapter “Operation prompts” for
 Feet flat on the floor
information.
 Back and arm supported
7 Press the button on the front panel or
2 Make sure the patient relaxes as much as
possible and neither talking nor applying shortcut key on the main screen to start a
external pressure against the cuff. Rest for five measurement.
minutes in a quiet environment. 8 Wait until the first reading is taken.
3 Connect the air hose and switch on the monitor.
NOTE
4 Attach the blood pressure cuff to the patient's The width of the cuff is either approximately 40%
arm or leg and follow the following instructions. of the limb circumference or 2/3 of the upper arm
length. The inflatable part of the cuff should be
long enough to encircle 80-100% of the limb. The
wrong size of cuff can cause erroneous readings.
If the cuff size is in question, use another cuff with
suitable size to avoid errors.
NOTE
If an NIBP measurement is suspect, repeat the
measurement. If you are still uncertain about the
reading, use another method to measure the blood
pressure.
– Ensure that the cuff is completely deflated.
– Attach the appropriate size cuff to the NOTE
patient (For information about cuff size Please make sure the cuff is well connected. A
selection, refer to the chapter "NIBP leak of air may cause measurement error.
accessories"), and ensure the symbol "Φ" is
over the artery. Ensure that middle of the
NOTE
cuff is at the level of the right atrium of the
heart and the cuff is not wrapped too tightly Please select the cuff with the suitable size. An
around the limb. Excessive tightness can unsuitable cuff may cause incorrect
cause discoloration and ischemia of the measurements.
extremity.

Monitoring NIBP
NOTE
Avoid incursion of liquid into the cuff. If this
happens, please desiccate the cuff completely.
Operation prompts
1 Manual measurement 3 Continuous measurement

Access the NIBP Setup menu and set the Access the NIBP Setup menu and select the
Measure Mode item to Manual. Continuous item to start a continuous
Press the button on the front panel or measurement.
The continuous measurement will last
shortcut key on the main screen to start a 5 minutes.
manual measurement.
4 Stopping continuous measurement
2 Automatic Measurement
During continuous measurement, press the
Access the NIBP Setup menu and set the
button on the front panel or shortcut key
Measure Mode item to Auto.
on the main screen at any time to stop.
Select the time interval as need, then press the
button on the front panel or shortcut key
on the main screen.
Correcting the measurement if limb is not at heart Level
The following measurement corrections should be

applied if the limb is not at heart level:
Add 0.75 mmHg Subtract 0.75 mmHg

(0.10 kPa) for each cm (0.10 kPa) for each
higher or cm lower or
Add 1.9 mmHg Subtract 1.9 mmHg
(0.25 kPa) for each (0.25 kPa) for each
inch higher inch lower

Monitoring NIBP
NIBP Multi-Review Window
To set the display of NIBP measurements, select

NIBP Setup > Review:
 When it is set to On, a window for NIBP
measurements will be displayed at the
waveform area on the main interface, and the
size of this window varies depending on the
numbers of displayed waveforms.
 When it is set to Off, the window is unavailable
on the screen.
Resetting NIBP
When NIBP does not work properly and the system

does not generate an error message, select Reset
in the User Maintain > NIBP Maintain menu to
activate the self-test procedure. This function
restores the system.
Calibrating NIBP
NIBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure

transducers must be verified and calibrated, if
necessary, at least once every two years by a
qualified service professional. See the Service
Guide for details.
Leak test
Leak test is used to detect the air tightness of the

NIBP pump, valve, and trachea. If not, the system
will display NIBP leakage. NIBP leak detection
should be performed at least once every two years
or when you think the measurement is inaccurate.

Monitoring NIBP
WARNING 7 After 20 to 40 s, if system leakage has detected,

the system will automatically open the deflating
This pneumatic test, other than being
valve to stop the leakage test and indicates
specified in the ISO 81060-1 standard, is to be
NIBP Leak. If no system leakage is detected
used by the user to simply determine whether
when the pneumatic system is inflated to
there are air leaks in the NIBP airway. If, at the
180mmHg, the system will perform a deflation
end of the test, the system gives the prompt
to an approximate value of 40mmHg and
that the NIBP airway has air leaks, contact the
subsequently perform the second phase
manufacturer for repair.
leakage test. After 20 to 40 s, the system will
automatically open the deflating valve and
provide corresponding indication based on the
Procedure for leak testing test result.
1 Connect the cuff securely with the socket for If the prompt of Leakage Test Ok appears, it
NIBP air hole. indicates that the airway is in good condition and no
air leaks exist. However if the alarm information of
2 Wrap the cuff around the cylinder of an NIBP Leak appears, it indicates that the airway
appropriate size, don’t wrap the cuff around might have air leaks. In this case, the user should
limbs. check for loose connections. After confirming
3 Make sure the patient type has been set to secure connections, the user should re-perform the
Adult. pneumatic test. If the failure prompt still appears,
contact DrägerService.
4 Access User Maintain > NIBP Maintain.
5 Turn the knob to the Leakage Test item and Monitor Cylinder
press the item. Then the prompt of Leak. Test
Running will appear indicating that the system Cuff
has started performing the leak test. NIBP
6 The system will automatically inflate the Hose

pneumatic system to about 180 mmHg.
Setting inflation mode
To change the inflation mode:

1 Select NIBP Setup > Inflation Mode;
2 Choose Manual or AUTO from the pull-down
list.
 If Manual is chosen, the preset value by
users will be adopted as the inflation value
when measuring blood pressure.
 If AUTO is chosen, the default value will be
adopted as the inflation value when
measuring blood pressure.

Monitoring NIBP
Assisting Venipuncture
The user can use the NIBP cuff to cause a pressure

close to diastolic pressure, so as to block the
venous blood vessel and therefore help
venipuncture. To assist venipuncture:
1 Select NIBP Setup > Venipuncture;
2 Select the appropriate Cuff Pressure
according to the patient type;
3 Select Start.
4 Wait until the monitor prompts In venipuncture
process. If an abnormal alarm occurs before it,
no follow-up operation can be carried out.
Restart the procedure after checking if
necessary;
5 Puncture vein and draw blood sample;
6 Select Stop to deflate the cuff. If you do not
deflate the cuff, the cuff automatically deflates
when the venipuncture time expires (170 s for
adult and pediatric patient, 85 s for neonatal
patient).
During venipuncture, pay attention to the cuff
pressure and the countdown displayd in the NIBP
numerics area. When the remaining time is 30 s,
the monitor issues a reminder tone and the
countdown displays in red, prompting the user that
the venipuncture time is to expire.
NOTE
Only when the monitor exits Assisting
Venipuncture Setup menu, the user can do other
operations.
NOTE
When the monitor is in DEMO mode, continuous
measurement process, or auto measurement
process, Assisting Venipuncture function is not
available.


Monitoring TEMP
Monitoring TEMP
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
TEMP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting TEMP sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Switching T1/T2 On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
TEMP monitoring setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring . . . . . . 149
Calculating temp difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Monitoring TEMP
Overview
Body temperature is measured using a thermistor Two TEMP probes can be used simultaneously
probe (a semiconductor whose resistance changes to measure two TEMP values. The monitor
with temperature) placed appropriately on the automatically calculates the temperature
patient. difference. The default configuration is skin sensor
for adult.
TEMP safety information
CAUTION WARNING
Place a protective rubber sheath over the probe to Prior to use, make sure that the temperature
prevent the possibility of burns during probe is not damaged and that it is correctly
electrosurgery or defibrillation. Do not use surface applied to the patient. Otherwise, the correct
probes during electrosurgery. functioning of the medical device may be
impaired.
WARNING
Verify probe cables fault detection before NOTE
using the probe to monitor the patient. If the Disposable TEMP probe can only be used once
temperature probe cable of channel 1 is per patient.
unplugged from the socket, the screen will
display the error message TEMP1 SENSOR NOTE
OFF and the audible alarm is activated. It is the The reference body site temperature is the same
same for the other channel. as the temperature of the measuring site.
WARNING NOTE
Handle the TEMP probe and cable carefully. The cumulative use time for the oral or rectal
When they are not in use, the probe and cable temperature probe in a single patient should be
should be coiled into a loose circle. Pulling less than 24 hours.
the wire inside the cable may mechanically
damage the probe and the cable. NOTE
Cover internally placed reusable temperature
WARNING sensors with temperature probe sheaths.
Remember to disinfect the reusable TEMP
probe after each use on a patient.
WARNING
Risk of patient injury. Do not operate the
device in magnetic resonance imaging
environments.

Monitoring TEMP
Selecting TEMP sensor type
The user can choose the TEMP sensor type as the To configure the TEMP sensor type, select Menu >
temperature signal source. Maintenance > User Maintain > Other Setups,
and set TEMP Sensor to YSI-10K or YSI-2.252K.
Switching T1/T2 On/Off
In Menu > System Setup > Module Switch, T1 or

T2 can be switched on/off separately and won’t be
affected by each other.
TEMP monitoring setup
 If disposable TEMP probes are used, connect

the TEMP cable to the monitor and then Label Description
connect the probe to the cable. With a reusable
TEMP probe the probe can be connected Tskin Skin temperature
directly to the monitor.
Trect Rectal temperature
 Apply the TEMP probes securely to the patient.
Tcore Core temperature
 Switch on the monitor.
It takes 5 minutes for the body temperature to
stabilize.
Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring
Select the temperature label according to the

measurement site. The label is a unique identifier
for each type of temperature.
To select the label,
1 Click the TEMP parameter area to enter TEMP
Setup menu.
2 Select the appropriate label from the list for T1
and T2.

Monitoring TEMP
Calculating temp difference
The monitor can calculate and display the

difference between two temperature values by
subtracting the second value from the first. The
difference is labeled TD.

Monitoring IBP (optional)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IBP safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Monitoring procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Selecting a pressure for monitoring. . . . . . . 153
Zeroing the pressure transducer . . . . . . . . . 154
Troubleshooting the pressure zeroing

(taking Art for example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IBP calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Changing the IBP Waveform Ruler . . . . . . . . 155
IBP Waveform Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Measuring PAWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Measurement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculating PPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Overview
IBP is measured by means of a catheter inserted The monitor measures direct blood pressure of one
into the circulatory system. A pressure transducer selected blood vessel and displays waveforms and
connected to the catheter converts the mechanical numerics for the measured direct blood pressure
force exerted by the blood into an electrical signal. (SYS, DIA and MAP).
This is displayed graphically as pressure versus
For further information on the IBP Kit, refer to the
time and as numerics on the monitor screen.
accompanying Instructions for Use of the
manufacturer.
IBP safety information
WARNING WARNING
The operator should avoid contact with the All invasive procedures have risks to the
conductive parts of the device when it is patient. Use aseptic technique and follow
connected to the patient. catheter manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING WARNING
When the monitor is used with HF surgical Mechanical shock to the invasive blood
equipment, the transducer and the cables pressure transducer may cause severe shifts
must be avoided from conductive connection in zero and calibration, and then cause
to the HF equipment. This is to protect against erroneous readings.
burns to the patient.
NOTE
WARNING Use only the pressure transducer listed in the IBP
Disposable IBP transducer or domes should accessories.
not be reused.
NOTE
WARNING If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP) on a
sitting patient, adjust the transducer on the same
If any kind of liquid, other than solution to be
level with the top of the patient’s ear. Incorrect
infused in pressure line or transducer, is
leveling may lead incorrect values.
splashed on the equipment or its accessories,
or enters the transducer or the monitor,
NOTE
contact service personnel immediately.
Confirm you set correct alarm limit for labels, the
alarm limit you set are stored for its label only.
WARNING
Changing label may change the alarm limit.
The longest duration of IBP arterial
catheterization is 7 days. NOTE
Don’t perform IBP calibration when a patient is
being monitored.

NOTE
When using high frequency ventilation, make sure
that the ventilator catheter is not connected to or
indirectly connected to the arterial catheter at zero
pressure. This can lead to less pressure
variations, thus interfere the zeroing process.
Monitoring procedures
Preparatory steps for IBP measurement: 5 Position the transducer so that it is at the same
level as the patient’s heart, approximately mid-
1 Connect the pressure cable to the
axillary line.
corresponding socket and switch on the
monitor. 6 For the label name selection, refer to chapter
“Selecting a pressure for monitoring”.
2 Prepare the flush solution.
7 To zero the transducer, refer to chapter “Zeroing
3 Flush through the system, exhaust all air from
the pressure transducer”.
the tube, ensure that the transducer and
stopcocks are free of air bubbles.
WARNING
4 Connect the patient catheter to the pressure If there are air bubbles in the tube system, you
line, making sure that there is no air present in should flush the system with the solution
the catheter or pressure line. again. The bubbles may cause erroneous
pressure readings.
Selecting a pressure for monitoring
The user can assign a pressure label to uniquely Label Description

identify each pressure. The monitor then uses that
label's stored settings (i.e., for color, scale and LAP Left atrial pressure
alarm settings) and selects which algorithm is used RAP Right atrial pressure
to process the pressure signal. An incorrect label
can lead to incorrect pressure values. To select the P1-P2 Alternative non-specific pressure
label, refer to the following table: labels
Label Description NOTE

ART Arterial blood pressure The pressure option is only valid when the label is
PA Pulmonary artery pressure P1/P2 and does not take effect under other labels.
CVP Central venous pressure

ICP Intracranial pressure

Zeroing the pressure transducer
To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor To zero a pressure measurement:

requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in
1 Turn off the stopcock to the patient.
accordance with the hospital’s policy (at least once
per day). 2 Vent the transducer to atmospheric pressure.
This compensates for the static and atmospheric
Zeroing must be performed:
pressure exerted on the transducer.
 When a new transducer or tubing is used;
3 In the setup menu for pressure, select Zero
 Every time the transducer cable is reconnected Channel: XX or Zero All. (XX stands for the
to the monitor; IBP label name). After confirmation, the user
can zero the pressure of certain channel or
 If the monitor’s pressure readings seem to be
pressure of all channels.
incorrect.
4 When the message Zero Ok is displayed, close
When using a pressure module, the zero
the stopcock to atmospheric pressure and open
information is stored in the module.
the stopcock to the patient.
Troubleshooting the pressure zeroing (taking Art for example)
The status message lists the probable cause of an

unsuccessful calibration.
Message Corrective Action

Art ZERO FAIL Make sure that the transducer is not attached to the patient.
Art SENSOR OFF, FAIL Make sure that transducer is not off, and then proceed zeroing.
IN DEMO, FAIL Make sure that the monitor is not in DEMO mode. Contact service
technician if necessary.
PRESSURE OVER RANGE, FAIL Make sure that the stopcock is vented to atmosphere. If the problem
persists, contact service technician.
PULSATILE PRESSURE ZERO Make sure that the transducer is vented to air, not connected to a
FAIL patient, and try again.
IBP calibration
IBP is not user-calibrated. Calibration should be

performed by a qualified service professional as
frequently as dictated by the Hospital Procedures
Policy.

Changing the IBP Waveform Ruler
The top, middle and bottom rulers are available for 1 Open the menu Wave Setup of IBP by clicking
each channel of IBP waveform. Users can adjust on the IBP waveform area.
the top, middle or bottom rulers manually:
2 Select a suitable ruler from the options
TopRuler, MidRuler and BotRuler.
IBP Waveform Overlapping
The monitor can display IBP overlapped 4 After exiting the interface, the main screen will
waveforms. To set IBP waveform overlapping: display the overlapped IBP waves. The flashing
label is the main label of the waveform area.
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain
> Other Setups, and set IBP Wave Click the IBP overlapping waveform area on the
Overlapping to On or Off. main screen, and then select Setup Rulers. The
user can select a suitable ruler for the overlapped
2 Click the IBP waveform area to show the IBP
waveforms from the options TopRuler and
Wave Setup menu.
BotRuler.
3 Select Add IBP Waves and then select the IBP
waves for overlapping from the pop-up list. A
maximum of four overlapping waveforms can
be displayed.
Measuring PAWP
PAWP, Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure, used to Measurement Procedures

assess the cardiac function, is obtained by
introducing a balloon-tipped pulmonary artery Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP) values
flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery. When are affected by fluid status, myocardial contractility,
the catheter is in one of the smaller pulmonary valve and pulmonary circulation integrity. The most
arteries, the inflated balloon occludes the artery accurate PAWP values are obtained at the end of
allowing the monitor to record changes in the the respiration cycle when the intrathoracic
intrathoracic pressures that occur throughout the pressure is fairly constant. You can use the
respiration cycle. The user can view the PAWP respiration waveform as a reference when
measurement result via connected Vista 120 CMS. assessing the PAWP waveform, to ensure constant
measurement timing relative to the respiratory
cycle.
To start the measurement:

1 On the standard screen interface, select the PA WARNING

parameter window to enter its setup menu.
The pressure receiver in the catheter records
Then, select Setup > PAWP Activate to open
the pressure change that occurs only at the
the PAWP measurement window.
front of the obstruction.
2 Prepare and check the accessories according
to your hospital policy. WARNING
3 Wedge the flotation catheter into the pulmonary Due to the short measurement delay, do not
artery. Then inflate the balloon and pay use sidestream CO2 as a direct reference to
attention to PA waveform changes on the determine the end point of the breath in the
screen. pressure curve.
4 After obtaining a stable PAWP waveform, press WARNING

Freeze to freeze the waveform. In freeze status,
If the balloon is not inflated but the pulmonary
you can adjust the PAWP scale to an
artery floating catheter enters the wedge
appropriate position by selecting Measure and
position, the pulmonary artery pressure
moving the cursors up and down according to
waveform becomes wedge-shaped. Follow
the clinical experience. Select Confirm to store
the standard steps to take appropriate action
the PAWP, CVP, HR values. To review the
to correct this situation.
frozen waveform, press s Browse and rotate
the rotary knob clockwise or counter-clockwise
as desired. If you need to review the stored WARNING
PAWP, CVP, HR values, select PAWP Review. PAWP measurement is not applicable to
pediatric and neonate patients.
5 Deflate the balloon when the monitor prompts
you “Please deflate the balloon!”.
6 If you need to start a new measurement, select
Remeasure.
7 Click on Exit or select Setup > PAWP Exit to
exit.
WARNING
Prolonged inflation can cause pulmonary
hemorrhage, infarction or both. Inflate the
balloon for the minimum time necessary to get
an accurate measurement.
WARNING
If the PAWP (mean) is greater than the PA
(systolic), deflate the balloon and report the
incident in accordance with hospital policy,
because the pulmonary artery could be
accidently ruptured, and the PAWP value
derived will not reflect the patient’s
hemodynamic state, but will merely reflect the
pressure in the catheter or balloon.

Calculating PPV
Pulse Pressure Variation (PPV) is calculated from 1 Click the PPV parameter area to enter PPV
the specific arterial pressure values, which reflects Setup menu.
the variation between the maximal pulse pressure
2 Select Art, P1, P2, or AUTO as PPV Source.
and the minimum pulse pressure in 30 s. Pulse
pressure is affected by left ventricular-stroke Only when P1 and P2 are arterial pressure can they
volume, arterial resistance and arterial compliance. be selected as PPV source. When it is set to AUTO
and if there is more than one arterial pressure at the
WARNING same time, the priority level should be: Art > P1 >
The clinical value of the derived PPV P2.
information must be determined by a
physician. According to recent scientific
literature, the PPV information is restricted to
sedated patients who receive controlled
mechanical ventilation and without
arrhythmia. Whether the calculation results in
other situations are clinically significant,
applicable and reliable must be determined by
a physician.
WARNING
In below situations, the calculated PPV value
may be inaccurate:
– the respiration rate is lower than 8 rpm
– the tidal volume during ventilation is lower
than 8 ml/kg
– patients have acute right ventricular
functional disorder (pulmonary heart
disease)
WARNING
PPV measurement has been validated only for
adult patients.
PPV is calculated according to the following

equation:
PPV= (PPmax – PPmin)/(PPmax + PPmin)/2) *
100%
To select an arterial pressure as PPV source:


Monitoring CO2 (optional)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
CO2 safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Monitoring procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Zeroing the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sidestream CO2 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mainstream CO2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Setting CO2 waveform setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting CO2 corrections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting Apnea Alarm Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Overview
The monitor provides the sidestream and concentration will compute according to the
mainstream methods for CO2 monitoring. Dräger detecting CO2 absorption intensity of patient
G2 module and Respironics Sidestream CO2 sample.
module are used for sidestream measuring, and
 Sidestream measurement takes a sample of the
Respironics Mainstream CO2 module and Dräger
respiratory gas with a constant sample flow
Mainstream CO2 module M11.1 are used for
from the patient’s airway and analyzes it with a
mainstream measuring. Respironics CO2 module
remote CO2 sensor. The user can measure
is plug-and-play and the monitor can automatically
Sidestream CO2 using the monitor’s built-in
identify sidestream and mainstream modules.
CO2 measurement. Respiration rate is
The principle of CO2 measurement is primarily calculated by measuring the time interval
based on the fact that CO2 molecule can absorb 4.3 between detected breaths.
μm infrared ray. Absorption intensity is proportional
 Mainstream measurement uses a CO2 sensor
to CO2 concentration of patient sample, the CO2
attached to an airway adapter directly inserted
into the patient’s breathing system.
CO2 safety information
WARNING WARNING
Do not use the device in the environment with The accuracy of the CO2 measurement will be
flammable anesthetic gas. affected by the following reasons: the airway
was highly obstructed; a leaky airway
WARNING connection or quick variation of environment
temperature.
The device should be used by trained and
qualified medical personnel.
WARNING
WARNING Follow precautions for electrostatic discharge
Nitrous oxide, elevated levels of oxygen, (ESD) and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
helium, xenon, halogenated hydrocarbons, to and from other equipment.
and barometric pressure can influence the
CO2 measurement. WARNING
Do not place the sensor cables or tubing in a
WARNING way that may cause tangling or strangulation.
The monitor will be damaged if any pipeline
from the CO2 module’s air tube/the air inlet/the WARNING
air outlet are plugged by water or other When using mechanical ventilation, gas
materials. compensation should be well set.
Inappropriate setting may cause incorrect
measurement result.

WARNING WARNING
Respironics module is not equipped with The CO2 module temporally stops measuring
automatic air pressure compensation, before during zeroing.
you start the CO2 measurement for the first
time, you must set the correct altitude. NOTE
Incorrect altitude settings can cause incorrect After the low battery alarm appears, do not start
CO2 readings. Dräger G2 module is equipped the CO2 measurement. The monitor may turn off
with automatic air pressure compensation, from lack of battery power.
and manual setting is not required.
NOTE
WARNING
For disposal of hospital waste such as
Leakage in the respiratory system or sampling accumulated fluids, calibration gases, sampled
system may result in a significant low display gases, where not otherwise specified, follow local
of the etCO2 value. Always keep all regulations regarding disposal of hospital waste.
components connected firmly and check for
leaks according to standard clinical NOTE
procedures.
If the measurement or sensor fails, stop
measurement before the qualified service
WARNING personnel solves the problem.
The etCO2 reading is not always closely
related to the paCO2 value, especially in NOTE
neonatal patients, and patients with The cumulative use time for the sampling line in a
pulmonary disease, with pulmonary embolism single patient should be less than 30 days.
or inappropriate ventilation.
NOTE
WARNING Disconnect the water trap from the holder or set
Don’t measure CO2 while nebulized Work Mode to Standby when the module is not in
medications are being delivered. use. Setting path: CO2 Setup > Work Mode >
Standby.
Monitoring procedures
Zeroing the sensor 1 Wait until the monitor’s warm-up message

disappears; keep the monitor away from CO2
For the Dräger G2 module: source.
Dräger G2 module itself has automatic zero 2 In the CO2 Setup menu, set Work Mode to
function, only when the measurement is abnormal Measure.
or measurement results are doubtful, the user can 3 Select Zero Calibration in CO2 Setup menu.
perform manual zero as following steps:

4 After the zeroing calibration is completed, the Sidestream CO2 Module

zeroing message disappears, and the CO2
monitoring can be performed.
Measurement Steps
For the Respironics Sidestream CO2 Module:
Dräger G2 Module
1 Connect the sample line to the module
correctly, wait until the monitor’s warm-up 1 Fix the water trap to the water trap holder on the
message disappears, keep the inlet of sample left side of the monitor, and confirm it is well
line away from CO2 source. fixed.
2 In the CO2 Setup menu, set Work Mode to 2 Connect the sampling cannula or the sampling
Measure. line to the water trap.
3 Select Zero Calibration in CO2 Setup menu. 3 Set Work Mode to Measure.
4 After the zeroing calibration is completed, the 4 For intubated patients, an airway adapter is
zeroing message disappears, and the CO2 required. For non-intubated patients, place the
monitoring can be performed. If the monitor nasal cannula or the sampling mask onto the
displays Breath Detected or Zero Required, patient.
zeroing has failed. Zero calibration must be CAUTION
performed again.
The water trap collects water drops condensed in
For the Respironics Mainstream CO2 Module: the sampling line and therefore prevents them
from entering the module. If the water trap is
1 Wait until the monitor’s warm-up message
nearly filled, the user should replace it to avoid
disappears; correctly install the mainstream
blocking the airway.
CO2 sensor to airway adaptor and remove it
from breathing circuit, keep the monitor away
CAUTION
from CO2 source.
Based on a sample gas temperature of +37 °C
2 In the CO2 Setup menu, set Work Mode to (+98.6 °F), a room temperature of +23 °C
Measure. (+73.4 °F) and sample relative humidity of 100%,
3 Select Zero Calibration in CO2 Setup menu. the water trap will be filled after approximately
90 hours with the flowrate of 100 ml/min and
4 After the zeroing calibration is completed, the approximately 130 hours with the flowrate of
zeroing message disappears, and the CO2 70 ml/min. In clinical practice, the water trap can
monitoring can be performed. If the monitor be used for a longer time before it is filled. It is
displays Breath Detected or Zero Required, recommended to replace the water trap once
zeroing has failed. Zero calibration must be every month.
performed again.
CAUTION
NOTE When replacing the water trap or suspecting the
CO2 source includes ventilator, patient’s and measurement value, check if the O-rings of the
operator’s breath. water trap holder are normal and well installed.
If the O-rings get damaged or loose, contact
DrägerService.

CAUTION
To prevent the module from abnormal work,
please ensure the water trap detection button is
not mistakenly touched.
CAUTION
Replace and discard the water trap when
blocking. Don’t reuse it, otherwise the reading is
not accurate and even the device may be
damaged.
NOTE
To avoid patient cross infection, do not connect the NOTE
exhaust tube to the ventilator circuit. If the sampled The user must perform a zero calibration as
gas is returned to the breathing system, always described in this procedure each time the ambient
use the bacterial filter of the sample gas return kit. temperature changes more than 10 °C (50 °F) (for
example during transport).
Respironics Sidestream Module
NOTE
1 Plug the sensor cable into the monitor’s CO2
input connector. Allow the sensor two minutes Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor
for warm-up. before inserting the airway adapter into the
breathing circuit. In reverse, always remove the
2 Appropriately connect the cannula, airway airway adapter from the breathing circuit before
adapter or sample line to the sensor. It will click removing the sensor.
into place when seated correctly.
3 To zero the sensor, refer to zeroing the sensor. NOTE
Always disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or
4 For intubated patients, an airway adapter is
sample line from the sensor when the sensor is not
required;
in use.
NOTE
To extend the lifetime of the module, set Work
Mode to Standby when the module is not in use.
NOTE
The sidestream CO2 module continuously extracts
a quantity of gas from the patient's airway per
minute. Please do not use this module in any
patient who will be affected by this sampling rate.
NOTE
If the catheter falls off during the measurement, it
For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal is necessary to re-zero after the catheter is well
cannula onto the patient. connected, and then measurement can be
performed.

Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING
Do not connect the exhaust tube to the
ventilator circuit, connect the outlet to a
scavenging system, cross infection can occur
if sampling gas is returned to the breathing
system. When using the sidestream CO2
measurement on patients who are receiving or
have recently received anesthetics, avoid
exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to

a scavenging system. Attach it to the sidestream
sensor at the outlet connector.
Mainstream CO2 Module

4 To zero the sensor, refer to zeroing the sensor;
Measurement steps 5 Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of

the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator
Respironics Mainstream CO2 Module Y-section.
NOTE
The user must perform a zero calibration as
described in this procedure each time a new
airway adapter is used.
1 Attach the sensor connector to the CO2

connector on the monitor.
2 Wait two minutes, allowing the sensor to reach
its operating temperature and a stable thermal
condition.
3 Choose the appropriate airway adapter and
connect it to the sensor head. The airway
adapter clicks into place when seated correctly.
WARNING
Accuracy is affected by temperature and
barometric pressure.
WARNING
No routine user calibration is required.

NOTE - Reusable adapters

If the catheter falls off during the measurement, it - Disposable adapters
is necessary to re-zero after the catheter is well
To change the adapter type, select CO2 Setup >
connected, and then measurement can be
Other Setups > Adapter Type, and set Adapter
performed.
Type to Reusable or Disposable based on the
adapter used. If the selected adapter type does not
NOTE
correspond to the adapter used, the prompt
Replace the airway adapter if excessive moisture information Ensure the adapter type is fit is
or secretions are observed in the tubing or if the displayed.
CO2 waveform changes unexpectedly without a
change in patient status. CAUTION
Make sure that used type of airway adapter
NOTE (reusable or disposable) is correctly selected.
To avoid cross infection, use only sterilized,
disinfected, or disposable airway adapters. CAUTION
Prior to use check sensor housing and airway
NOTE adapter for mechanical integrity.
Inspect the airway adapters prior to use. Do not
use if airway adapter appears to have been CAUTION
damaged or broken. Observe airway adapter color Since zero has proven rather stable so far, it may
coding for patient population. be checked on other occasion if checking is
inconvenient right at the beginning of use.
NOTE However is it recommended to check zero
Periodically check the flow sensor and tubing for regularly.
excessive moisture or secretion buildup.
To start CO2 measurement,
1 Attach the sensor connector to the CO2
NOTE
connector on the monitor.
Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor
before inserting the airway adapter into the 2 Wait two minutes, allowing the sensor to reach
breathing circuit. In reverse, always remove the its operating temperature and a stable thermal
airway adapter from the breathing circuit before condition.
removing the sensor. 3 Choose the appropriate airway adapter and
connect it to the sensor head. The airway
NOTE adapter clicks into place when seated correctly.
To avoid dead space, place the sensor as close to
the patient as possible.
Dräger MCable Mainstream CO2

Selecting the adapter type
The following airway adapters can be used:

4 To zero the sensor, refer to zeroing the sensor. 5 Insert the airway adapter with vertically
Zeroing must be done without any airway positioned windows between endotracheal tube
adapter in room air. and ventilator circuit (Y-piece).
Checking the calibration of the CO2 sensor with
a test filter
Perform the calibration check of the CO2 sensor
with a test filter at intervals of one month.
Setting CO2 waveform setup
Open the menu CO2 Waveform Setup by clicking 1 Set Mode to Curve or Filled as desired.
on the CO2 waveform area:
2 Set Sweep to an appropriate value from the
pop-up list. The larger the value, the faster the
speed.
Setting CO2 corrections
Temperature, water vapor in the patient’s breath, For the Respironics CO2 modules, there are Baro
barometric pressure, and the proportions of O2, Press, O2 Compens, Anes Agent and Balance
N2O and Helium in the mixture all influence CO2 Gas in the CO2 Other Setup menu. For Dräger
absorption. If values seem inaccurately high or low, MCable Mainstream CO2 module, there are Baro
check that the monitor is using the appropriate Press, O2 Compens., N2O Compen., He
corrections. Compens. and Xe Compens. in the CO2 Other
Setup menu.The concentration of compensated
For Dräger G2 module, the following items are
gas (including O2 and AG) should be set based on
available in the CO2 Other Setup menu: N2O
the current gas concentration which is supplied for
Compen., O2 Compens., Anest. Agent, Vapor
patient. The selection of balance gas depends on
Compen. and Pump Rate. The concentration of
actual situation. For instance, N2O should be
compensated gas should be set based on the
selected as balance gas if the real balance gas is
current gas concentration which is supplied for
N2O.
patient. As for O2 and N2O, Make the supplied gas
concentration multiply to its volume to get the After settings, the interface will display a dialog box:
concentration. For instance, supply 100% O2, and Confirm to change the settings? And the detailed
its volume is 60%, then O2 compensation is: settings are displayed under the warning. Click Yes
100%*60%=60%. AG concentration is decided by to confirm, and click No to cancel the settings.
anaesthesia apparatus.

NOTE
Make sure compensation value is correctly set,
otherwise the measurement accuracy may be
affected.
Setting Apnea Alarm Time
This determines the time when the monitor gives an

alarm if the patient stops breathing.
1 Select the CO2 Setup menu.
2 Select Apnea Alm.
3 Choose the apnea alarm time from the pop-up
list.
WARNING
Safety and effectiveness of the respiration
measurement method in the detection of
apnea, particularly the apnea of prematurity
and apnea of infancy, has not been
established.


Monitoring C.O. (optional)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.O. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
C.O. Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Preparing Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Performing C.O. Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Blood Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Overview
The cardiac output (C.O.) measurement invasively pulmonary artery floating catheter, and the C.O.
measures cardiac output and other hemodynamic value is calculated by using the temperature
parameters by using the Thermodilution method. dilution curve.
The Thermodilution method is to inject a cold
As C.O. is a variable value, a series of
solution into the blood circulation system and
measurements must be carried out to obtain a
measure the temperature changes caused by the
reliable and average C.O. value. Always use the
cold solution through the thermistor of the
average of multiple measurements for thereapy
decisions. The monitor can save a maximum of 6
measurement results.
C.O. Safety Information
WARNING NOTE
Make sure that the C.O. accessories conform To replace the catheter thermistor, enter the
with the applicable medical device safety catheter computation coefficient into the Constant
requirements and regulations and are applied item according to the instruction.
in correspondence with the C.O. accessories'
instructions for use. NOTE
Please set injection switch well. The calculation of
WARNING the cardiac output is based on the state of the
C.O. accessories should be avoided from injection switch at the end of the measurement.
contact with conductive metal body when Therefore, after the selection of the injection
being connected or applied. switch is completed, don’t change until the
measurement is completed.
WARNING
NOTE
All invasive procedures involve risks to the
patient. Use aseptic technique and follow Start C.O. measurement after blood temperature is
catheter manufacturer's instructions. stable, otherwise the measurement may fail.
WARNING
The C.O. measurement results may be
incorrect during electrosurgery.
WARNING
C.O. floating catheter shall be removed or
reinserted after 3 days.

C.O. Monitoring
Preparing Measurement 2 Attach the injective probe connector and

catheter thermistor connector to the appropriate
1 Plug the C.O. interface cable into the C.O. parts of the cardiac output interface cable.
socket and turn on the monitor.
1 Monitor 5 Injectate
2 Thermodilution Catheter 6 Delivery System
3 Cardiac Output Cable 7 In-line injectate Temperature probe
4 Injectate Sensor Housing

3 Open the patient information window to confirm  INJ. TEMP Source: Select Auto or Manual
the patients’ height and weight. from the list, when set as Manual, the system
directly displays the injectate temperature from
4 In C.O. Setup menu, set:
INJ. TEMP. Ensure INJ. TEMP is correct,
 C.O. Constant: The computation constant is otherwise the C.O. measurement may be
associated with catheter and injectate volume. affected. When set as Auto, the system obtains
When the catheter is changed, adjust Constant the injectate temperature through sampling.
in the C.O. Setup menu based on product
description provided by the manufacturer. After
user’s confirmation, the setup takes effect.
Performing C.O. Measurement
1 Pick the C.O. Measure item in the C.O. Option 10 X axis: Change the Scale X (time) value.
menu. The C.O. Measure menu displays as Two modes are available: 0 s to 30 s, 0 s
below: to 60 s. If you start measurement in the 0
s to 30 s mode, it will be switched to 0 s to
60 s mode automatically if the
3 measurement can not finish within 30 s.
4 After the switch, no further adjustment can
5 be made to the Scale X.
6
1 7 11 Y axis: Change the scale Y (temperature)
8 value. Three modes are available: 0 °C
(+32 °F) to +0.5 °C (+32.9 °F), 0 °C
(+32 °F) to +1 °C (+33.8 °F), 0 °C (+32 °F)
2 to +2.0 °C (+35.6 °F). Adjust the scale by
10 11 the temperature differences. A smaller
9 scale results in a larger curve.
The functional keys on the C.O. measure window
1 Measurement curve
are explained in the following table:
2 Prompt message area
3 Cardiac Output Start Start a measurement.
4 Cardiac Index Stop If the blood temperature cannot
resume in a considerably long time,
5 Body Surface Area the measurement could not stop
6 Blood Temperature automatically. Use this button to stop
7 Injectate Temperature the measurement and display the
C.O., CI calculation result.
8 Start time of the measurement
Cancel Cancel the processing measurement or
9 Function keys cancel the result after measurement.
Record Print out the curve.
Review Enter the Review window.

2 Measurement should be taken when the  Contents displayed in the window:

message "Ready for new measurement"
appears on the screen. Press the Start button, 1 Six curves of the six measurements and
and then start injection. The thermodilution C.O. value
curve, current blood temperature and the 2 Average value of C.O.
injective temperature are displayed during the
measurement. Curve drawing will stop 3 Average value of CI
automatically when the measurement finishes,
and the C.O. and CI (3 and 4 in the above WARNING
figure) will be calculated and displayed on the Make sure that the computational constant for
screen. The monitor will display C.O. in the the measurement is appropriate to the
parameter area and the start measurement time catheter used.
(8 in the above figure).
To ensure the accuracy of the measurement, it is WARNING
suggested that a reasonable interval should take Before a C.O. measurement is initiated, check
place between two consecutive measurements. the accuracy of patient setup. The calculation
The length of the interval can be set in the C.O. of C.O. is related to the patient height, weight,
Setup menu (Time unit: second). The interval time and catheter computation coefficient;
counter is displayed on the screen. The next therefore, incorrect input will lead to error in
measurement cannot be performed until the time calculation.
reduces to zero and a message Ready for new
measurement appears. The adjustable range of NOTE
Interval is: 5 to 300 s. The blood temperature alarm will not function
Repeat this procedure until the measurements are during C.O. measurement. It will resume
completed as desired. automatically when the measurement is over.
A maximum of six measurements can be saved. If NOTE
the user performs additional measurements, the
It is strongly recommended that the user must
earliest measurement will be automatically deleted
push the injector within four seconds after pressing
when a seventh curve is saved.
the Start button.
In C.O. review window, select required curves from
the 6 measurement curves, and the monitor will NOTE
automatically calculate and respectively display the It is strongly recommended that wait at least
average values of C.O. and CI as following: 1 minute (or longer depending on the patient’s
clinical condition) before starting the next
measurement.
2 3

Blood Temperature Monitoring
Blood temperature monitoring can function when

C.O. measurement is not taken. The blood
temperature is measured by the thermistor situated
in the distal end of the flotation catheter in the
pulmonary artery.
The blood temperature alarm function will not work
during the C.O. measurement. When the
measurement ends, the function will automatically
resume.
The current blood temperature is displayed in the
C.O. parameter area.
Flotation catheter
Pulmonary artery
Air cell
Thermal resistance
Right atrium
Right ventricle

Gas monitoring (optional)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Switch on the gas analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Multigas monitoring setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Overview
WARNING Refer to the general precautions section for etCO2

and to the safety considerations section for safe
Risk of delayed essential therapy changes.
device operation.
Dräger recommends the user to remain in the
vicinity of the patient monitor, i.e. within a
distance of up to 4 meters (12 feet). This
facilitates fast recognition and response in the
event of an alarm.
Intended use
The Scio Four module samples gas from the

breathing gas of pediatric patients and adults. It
continuously measures the concentration of CO2,
N2O, and anesthetic agents (Halothane, Isoflurane,
Enflurane, Sevoflurane, and Desflurane) in the
breathing gas as well as the O2 concentration
(optional). All measured values as well as derived
values are communicated to a patient monitor.
NOTE
The Scio Four modules are hereafter referred to as
“gas analyzer”.
Getting started
Switch on the gas analyzer 1 Connect the mains plug if necessary and set the
device switch on the back to the ON position.
To prevent condensation and resulting failure of
electrical components, do not switch on the device
after abrupt temperature changes for 1 to 2 hours
(e.g., after storage in unheated rooms).
2 Check the external power indicator on the front of

the gas analyzer.

Upon start-up, the gas analyzer passes through an WARNING

initialization (status message MultiGas
Risk due to defective sensors.
Initialization appears) and warm-up period (status
message MultiGas Warming Up appears). During If the gas sensors are not ready for operation,
this time, concentrations for certain gases may no the patient will not be adequately monitored.
be available and the anesthetic agent may not be
Before using the medical device, ensure a
identified. After the warm-up period, the gas
suitable substitute monitoring.
analyzer will have achieved full ISO-accuracy.
WARNING WARNING
Risk of inaccurate gas measurement values. Risk of inaccurate gas measurement values.
During warm-up, reported values may not be When the monitor is used with a gas analyzer,
accurate. Refer to the Technical Data appendix it meets the Class A limits of CISPR11. The
in the gas analyzer supplement for further system is not intended for connection to
information regarding gas analyzer accuracy. public mains due to possible line-conducted
disturbances.
Operation
Safety information WARNING

Risk due to incorrect settings
WARNING
For patient monitors within the same care
Risk of patient injury area, different standard alarm limits or therapy
The multigas information displayed is settings might be configured. The user must
intended to be used by trained and authorized observe the following:
health care professionals only. – Ensure that the values set for new patients
are appropriate.
WARNING
– Ensure that the alarm system is neither
Risk of misinterpretation rendered useless by setting extreme
Misdiagnosis or misinterpretation of the values for the alarm limits nor deactivated
measured values or other parameters can by switching off the alarms.
endanger the patient.
Do not make therapeutic decisions based WARNING
solely on individual measured values and Risk of inaccurate gas measurement
monitoring parameters. Therapeutic When using three anesthetic agents the
decisions must be made solely by qualified oxygen measurement may be inaccurate.
users.
Only use two agents at a time.

Monitoring of CO2 (AG)

WARNING
Risk of inaccurate gas measurement The CO2 (AG) waveform indicates the
waveforms instantaneous CO2 concentration. The CO2 (AG)
parameter box displays the following parameters:
Under extreme monitoring conditions (and if
network functionality is in use), intermittent  Inspired CO2 (FiCO2) - The level of CO2 in the
spikes may be present on the gas analyzer airway during the inspiration phase.
waveform display. Parameter box data is not  End-tidal CO2 (etCO2) - The level of CO2 in the
affected. airway at the end of expiration phase.
NOTE  Respiration Rate (AwRR) - The patient's

respiration rate, derived from the etCO2* signal
For disposal of hospital waste such as
by calculating an average rate over the two
accumulated fluids, calibration gases, sampled
most recent breaths.
gases, where not otherwise specified, follow local
regulations regarding disposal of hospital waste. The gas analyzer automatically serves as the
etCO2 source, regardless of previous source
NOTE selections. The source selection item on the etCO2
If O2 is detected from the connected SCIO module, Setup menu is only displayed in the OR mode.
the monitor will turn off the O2 measurement Typical CO2 (AG) parameter box displays are
function on the Fabius and Atlan series anesthetic shown below
machines. Otherwise, the monitor will retain the O2
measurement on the anesthetic machine if
applicable.
NOTE
Disconnect the water trap from the holder or set
Work Mode to Standby when the module is not in
use. Setting path: AG Setup > Work Mode > NOTE
Standby. If alarms are disabled, crossed-out bell icons
appear next to the corresponding parameter
values.
Multigas monitoring setup The monitor does not alarm for CO2 (AG) limit
violations until it has established a valid respiratory
The gas analyzer parameters are displayed in the rate.
CO2 (AG), O2 (in some models only), N2O and
anesthetic agent parameter boxes. Each has its To access the CO2 (AG) setup menu, click on the
own setup menu, described on the following pages. CO2 (AG) parameter box.
To execute CO2 (AG) setup functions, click on the
following items:
CO2 (AG) Setup menu

Menu item Description Settings
Work Mode Sets the Scio status to Measure or Standby Measure, Standby
Unit Sets the units for the concentration %, mmHg, kPa

CO2 (AG) Setup menu

Apnea Alarm Sets the time that the monitor waits before 20s, 25s, 30s, 35s, 40s
reporting a cessation of breathing as an apnea
event
Zero Calibration Manually zeroes the Scio module Not applicable
etCO2 Alarm Setup Sets the Alarm switch, Record switch, Level, Alarm switch: ON, OFF
and Alarm limits Record switch: ON, OFF
FiCO2 Alarm Setup
Level: High, Med., Low
AwRR Alarm Setup Alarm limits: digitals
Default Restores all menu setup to factory default Not applicable
To access the CO2 (AG) waveform setup menu,

click on the CO2 (AG) waveform area.
To execute CO2 (AG) waveform setup functions,
click on the following items:
The CO2 (AG) waveform Setup menu

Mode Sets the waveform drawing mode Curve, filled
AMP Sets the waveform scale 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Sweep (mm/s) Sets the waveform sweep speed on screen 6.25, 12.5, 25.0, 50.0
display
Change Changes the current channel to another All the available waveforms
waveform
CO2 (AG) setup Links to the CO2 (AG) setup menu Not applicable
Monitoring of O2  Expired O2 (EtO2) - The level of O2 in the airway

during the expiration phase.
NOTE
Typical O2 parameter box displays are shown
The O2 monitoring function is only available with
below
Scio Four Oxi and Scio Four Oxi plus.
The O2 waveform indicates the instantaneous O2

concentrations. The O2 parameter box displays the
following parameters:
 Inspired O2 (FiO2) - The level of O2 in the airway
during the inspiration phase.

NOTE
The monitor does not alarm for inspiratory and
expiratory oxygen limit violations until it has
established a valid respiratory rate.
To access the O2 setup menu, click on the O2

parameter box.
To execute O2 setup functions, click on the
following items:

O2 Setup menu
EtO2 Alarm setup Sets the Alarm switch, Record switch, Level, and Alarm switch: ON, OFF
Alarm limits
FiO2 Alarm Setup Record switch: ON, OFF
Alarm limits: digitals
To access the O2 waveform setup menu, click on

the O2 waveform area.
To execute O2 waveform setup functions, click on
the following items:
The O2 waveform Setup menu

display
waveform
O2 setup Links to the O2 setup menu Not applicable
Monitoring of N2O
The N2O waveform indicates the instantaneous
N2O concentrations. The N2O parameter box
displays the following parameters:
 Inspired N2O (FiN2O) - The level of N2O in the NOTE
airway during the inspiration phase.
The monitor does not alarm for inspiratory and
 Expired N2O (etN2O) - The level of N2O in the expiratory N2O limit violations until it has
airway during the expiration phase. established a valid respiratory rate.
Typical N2O parameter box displays are shown
To access the N2O setup menu, click on the N2O
below
parameter box.

To execute N2O setup functions, click on the

following items:
N2O Setup menu

EtN2O Alarm setup Sets the Alarm switch, Record switch, Level, Alarm switch: ON, OFF
and Alarm limits Record switch: ON, OFF
FiN2O Alarm Setup
To access the N2O waveform setup menu, click on the N2O waveform area.
To execute N2O waveform setup functions, click on the following items:
The N2O waveform Setup menu

display
waveform
N2O setup Links to the N2O setup menu Not applicable
Monitoring of anesthetic agents  Desflurane = light blue

The agent waveform indicates the instantaneous  Enflurane = orange
agent concentrations. The agent parameter box
 Sevoflurane = yellow
displays the following parameters:
 Isoflurane = purple
 Inspired agent (e.g., FiHAL) - The level of
anesthetic agent in the airway during the The appearance of the agent parameter box varies
inspiration phase. depending on the number of identified agents.
Typical agent parameter box displays are shown
 Expired agent (e.g., etHAL) - The level of
below
anesthetic agent in the airway during the
expiration phase.
The agent waveforms and parameters can be
identified by color as follows:
 Halothane = red

NOTE
If two agents are detected, the one with the higher
expired MAC value is regarded as the primary
agent.
The monitor does not alarm for Inspiratory and
expiratory agent limit violations until it has
established a valid respiratory rate.
To access the anesthetic agent setup menu, click

on the agent parameter box (if displayed).
To execute anesthetic agent setup functions, click
on the following items:
Anesthetic agent (AA) Setup menu

Agent Configures Scio module to identify Agent ID Auto, HAL, ISO, ENF, SEV,
automatically or use a user-specified agent ID DES
Mac Setup Sets the MAC calculate method None, Standard, Age-based
EtAA Alarm setup Sets the Alarm switch, Record switch, Level, and Alarm switch: ON, OFF
Alarm limits Record switch: ON, OFF
FiAA Alarm Setup
To access the anesthetic agent waveform setup

menu, click on the anesthetic agent waveform area.
To execute the anesthetic agent waveform setup
functions, click on the following items:
Anesthetic agent (AA) waveform Setup menu

Sweep (mm/s) Sets the waveform sweep speed on screen display 6.25, 12.5, 25.0, 50.0
Change Changes the current channel to another waveform All the available waveforms
AA setup Links to the AA setup menu Not applicable

Manual agent ID If the gas analyzer has not yet identified or cannot
identify an agent (e.g. due to too low agent
NOTE
concentrations, a leaking vaporizer, or traces of
The manual agent ID setup is only relevant for gas disinfectants), the agent parameter box displays
analyzers without automatic agent recognition - the message AA or AA1.
Scio Four and Scio Four Oxi.
If no anesthetic agent has been selected or the gas Mixed agent

analyzer is not in operation, the message AA is NOTE
displayed in the parameter box.
The measurement of mixed agent is only relevant
To set the agent ID: for gas analyzers with automatic agent recognition -
1 Click on the agent parameter box (if displayed) Scio Four plus and Scio Four Oxi plus.
2 Click on the drop-down list of Agent When the gas analyzer detects a mix of two or more
anesthetic agents, the displayed agent waveform
3 Click and select the desired agent ID.
reflects the agent with the highest level of
WARNING concentration.
Risk due to inaccurate gas measurement The color of the waveform represents the agent
values with the highest level of concentration. If there is a
Use care when setting agent ID manually. change of the anesthetic agent during monitoring,
Measurements will be inaccurate if the wrong the parameter box displays the message
agent ID is selected. AG Agent Mixture and replaces the concentration
values with -?-. The mixed label in waveform area
WARNING indicates only the agent that has the highest level
of concentration. This label will switch to that of the
Risk due to inaccurate gas measurement
second administered agent when its concentration
values
exceeds that of the first agent.
Measurements using a gas analyzer without
automatic agent recognition will be inaccurate
Standard MAC values
if anesthetic gases are mixed.
NOTE
NOTE When the gas analyzer is connected to the
The agent ID resets to blank upon a power cycle or monitor, users need to access the MAC Setup
patient discharge. menu to determine if Standard MAC, Age-based
MAC or no MAC is displayed.
Automatic agent ID The minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) value
NOTE of the agent is a simple navigation aid for anesthetic
The automatic agent ID setup is only relevant for agent delivery.
gas analyzers with automatic agent recognition - 1 standard MAC is equal to the alveolar anesthetic
Scio Four plus and Scio Four Oxi plus. concentration at one atmosphere (760 mmHg) at
which 50 % of all patients no longer respond to
These gas analyzers are able to automatically noxious stimuli. The integrated MAC algorithm is
identify up to two anesthetic agents, even in based on the MAC values shown in the following
mixtures. Then the specific agent (e.g. HAL) will be table. The values specified in the table apply to a
show in the parameter box.

patient age of 40 years and are guiding values only. For gas mixtures, the respective multiples for N2O
The binding values are specified on the package and anesthetic agents are added according to the
information leaflet of the anesthetic agent. following equation.
1 MAC corresponds to:

(in 100 % O2)
CAUTION
Halothane 0.77 Vol% Risk due to incorrect setting for patient age
Enflurane 1.7 Vol% The patient's age is derived from the birth date
Isoflurane 1.15 Vol% entered in the Patient Admit menu. Incorrect
settings can lead to inappropriate MAC values
Desflurane 6.65 Vol% and therefore to inappropriate anesthetic gas
delivery.
Sevoflurane 2.10 Vol%
Always set patient age correctly.
N2O 105 Vol%
Once the monitor has detected an agent, the CAUTION

parameter box shows a MAC value. Age-based MAC values only apply if the patient’s
For gas mixtures, the respective multiples for N2O age is ≥ 1 year. An aged-based MAC of 1 year is
and anesthetic agents are added according to the used if the patient’s age is < 1 year.
following equation.
CAUTION
If patient age is not entered, the default age-
based MAC of 40 years is used.
NOTE
Age and other factors are not taken into account Once the monitor has detected an agent, the
for standard MAC value calculation. parameter box shows a MAC value.
Age-corrected MAC values

NOTE
When the gas analyzer is connected to the
monitor, users need to access MAC Setup menu to
determine if Standard MAC, Age-based MAC or no
MAC is displayed.
The age-corrected MAC values are calculated

using an equation developed by W.W. Mapleson
(British Journal of Anaesthesia 1996, pp. 179-185).
The equation applies to patients older than 1 year.

Zeroing
The gas analyzer purges and zeroes itself and does
not need any interaction by the user. Waveforms
flatline and parameter box values blank from the
screen during this cycle. Status messages are as
follows:
AG Zero In Progress appears The zeroing cycle is in progress.

AG Zero In Progress disappears The zeroing cycle was successful.
AG Zero In Progress keeps displayed in the The zeroing cycle failed and restarted automatically.
display Causes might be occlusions or leaks, polluted
ambient air, hardware or communication problems.
For further technical details on the zeroing process

refer to the gas analyzer's supplement.
WARNING
Risk due to inaccurate gas measurement
values
Delaying zeroing may compromise the
accuracy of gas values.
Troubleshooting
Caution = Medium-priority alarm message (yellow)

CAUTION
Risk due to gas measurement failure Advisory= Low-priority alarm message (blue)
If gas measurement fails, the patient can no The following table lists the alarm messages in
longer be adequately monitored. alphabetical order. If an alarm occurs, the table
– Ensure corresponding substitute monitoring. helps to quickly identify causes and remedies. The
– Check sample line and water trap for damage possible causes and remedial measures should be
or blockage and resolve these as needed. looked through in the order they are listed until the
– Observe the prescribed exchange intervals. alarm is resolved.
Alarm - Cause - Remedy

Alarm messages are displayed in hierarchal form in
the alarm message field of the header bar.
The priority of the alarm messages is indicated by
different background colors.
Warning = High-priority alarm message (red)

Alarm priority Alarm Cause Remedy

Configurable FiCO2 Too High Soda lime is depleted Check soda lime
Increase fresh-gas flow
Check fresh-gas settings
Exchange soda lime
Leakage in breathing system Exchange breathing system
Gas measurement is Adjust alarm limits if
inaccurate due to high necessary
respiratory rate
Large dead space Check ventilation settings
Configurable etCO2 Too High End-tidal CO2 concentration Check ventilation
has exceeded the upper alarm
limit
Configurable etCO2 Too Low End-tidal CO2 concentration Check ventilation
has fallen below the lower
alarm limit
Configurable AwRR Too High The patient is breathing at a Check patient condition
high respiratory rate
Check ventilation settings or
spontaneous respiratory rate
AwRR has exceeded the upper Check ventilation settings
alarm limit
Configurable AwRR Too Low AwRR has fallen below the Check patient condition and
lower alarm limit ventilation settings
High AG APNEA No breathing or ventilation Start manual ventilation!
Check ventilation settings
Check spontaneous breathing
ability of the patient
Sample line is not connected Connect sample line to
breathing circuit or gas
analyzer
Configurable FiO2 Too High Inspiratory O2 concentration Check O2 concentration and
has exceeded the upper alarm fresh-gas settings
limit


Configurable FiO2 Too Low Inspiratory O2 concentration Check O2 concentration and
has fallen below the lower fresh-gas settings
alarm limit
Check breathing system for
large leaks
Check O2 supply
Configurable FiHAL Too High Inspiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and fresh-
FiISO Too High concentration has exceeded gas settings
FiENF Too High the upper alarm limit
FiSEV Too High
FiDES Too High
Configurable FiHAL Too Low Inspiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and fresh-
FiISO Too Low concentration has fallen below gas settings
FiENF Too Low the lower alarm limit
FiSEV Too Low
large leaks
FiDES Too Low
Soda lime is dried out Exchange soda lime
Configurable EtHAL Too High Expiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and fresh-
EtISO Too High concentration has exceeded gas settings
EtENF Too High the upper alarm limit
EtSEV Too High
EtDES Too High
Configurable EtHAL Too Low Expiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and fresh-
EtISO Too Low concentration has fallen below gas settings
EtENF Too Low the lower alarm limit
EtSEV Too Low
large leaks
EtDES Too Low
Soda lime is dried out Exchange soda lime
High CO2 Out Of Range The inspired concentration of Check the patient and treat, if
O2 Out Of Range the parameter is outside the necessary
N2O Out Of Range monitor’s measuring range
AA Out Of Range
High AG Occlusion Sample line, water trap or Check sample line and
patient-side filter is occluded patient-side filter
Water trap is defective or full. Check water trap.
Low Check Sample line is blocked or not Check sample line
Watertrap/Sample connected
Line
Water trap is full or not installed Check water trap


High AG Comm Fail Gas analyzer has become Check cable connections
disconnected
If the problem persists, call
DrägerService
High AG Hardware Error Loss of communication Check cable connections
Unplug and re-plug the gas
analyzer
If the problem persists, call
DrägerService
Failure of the entire gas Call DrägerService
analyzer


Monitoring BIS (optional)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
BIS safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
BIS monitoring setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
BIS continuous impedance check . . . . . . . . 195
BIS sensor check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Starting a sensor check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Stopping a sensor check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
BIS sensor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

BIS Impedance Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing the BIS smoothing rate. . . . . . . . . 197
Switching secondary parameters

on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing the scale of the EEG wave . . . . . . 198
Setting the trend length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Switching BIS filters on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Overview
Bispectral Index monitoring helps to monitor the Note: This chart reflects a general association
hypnotic state of the brain based on acquisition and between clinical state and BIS values. Ranges are
processing of EEG signals. The monitor processes based on results from a multi-center study of the BIS
raw EEG signals to produce a single number, involving the administration of specific anesthetic
namely BIS, which correlates with the patient's agents. BIS values and ranges assume that the EEG
level of hypnosis. The user can view the BIS is free of artifacts that can affect its performance.
measurement result via connected CMS. Titration of anesthetics to BIS range should be
dependent upon the individual goals established for
The BISx device provides the monitor with the each patient. These goals and associated BIS ranges
display consisting of: may vary over time and in the context of patient status
and treatment plan.
 BIS EEG waveform
– SQI: The SQI numeric reflects the signal quality
 BIS trend
for the EEG channel source and provides
 Measure values of BIS, SQI, SR, SEF, TP and information about the reliability of the BIS, SR,
BC SEF, TP and BC numerics during the last
– BIS: The BIS numeric reflects the patient’s level minute. It ranges from 0% to 100%:
of consciousness. It ranges from 100 (fully 0% to15%: the numerics cannot be derived.
awake) to 0 (absence of electrical brain
activity). The BIS range guidelines are 15% to 50%: the numerics cannot be reliably
derived.
illustrated in the following chart.
50% to 100%: the numerics are reliable.
– SR: The SR is the percentage of time over the
BIS Range and Clinical State
last 63-second period that the signal is
100 Awake considered to be in the suppressed state.
 Responds to normal voice – SEF: The SEF is a frequency below which 95%
80 Light/ Moderate Sedation of the total power is measured.
 May respond to loud commands or – TP: The TP numeric indicates the power in the
BIS Index Range
mild prodding/shaking frequency band 0.5 Hz to 30 Hz. The useful

60 General Anesthesia range is 40 dB to 100 dB.
 Low probability of explicit recall – BC: (BISx device used with Extend Sensor
 Unresponsive to verbal stimulus only) The BC numeric helps to quantify
suppression, reported as the number of EEG
40 Deep Hypnotic State bursts per minute, where an EEG burst is
20  Burst Suppression defined as a period of activity followed and
preceded by inactivity (at least 0.5 s). The BC
0 Flat Line EEG numeric is valid when SQI ≥ 15% and SR ≥ 5%.

 EMG bar graph: The EMG bar graph displays No bar represents power less than 30.
the power (in decibels) in the frequency range
1 bar represents power in the 30-38 range.
70 Hz -110 Hz. This frequency range contains
power from muscle activity (i.e., 2 bars represent power in the 39-47 range.
electromyography or “EMG”) as well as power
3 bars represent power in the 48-55 range.
from other high-frequency artifacts. When the
indicator is low, it indicates that EMG activity is 4 bars represent power greater than 55.
low. BIS monitoring conditions are optimal when
the bar is empty.
BIS safety information
WARNING WARNING
Explosion hazard: Do not use the BISx device To reduce the hazard of burns during use of
in a flammable atmosphere or where high- frequency surgical equipment, the
concentrations of flammable anesthetics may sensor or electrodes should not be located
occur. between the surgical site and the electro-
surgical unit return electrode.
WARNING
The BISx device is not designed for use in MRI WARNING
environment. The conductive parts of electrodes or sensor
and connectors should not contact other
WARNING conductive parts, including earth.
The use of accessory equipment not
complying with the equivalent safety WARNING
requirements of this equipment may lead to a To reduce the hazard of burns during use of
reduced level of safety of the resulting brain-stimulating devices (e.g., transcranial
system. Consideration relating to the choice electrical motor evoked potential), place
shall include: use of the accessory in the stimulating electrodes as far as possible from
patient vicinity; evidence that the safety the BIS sensor and make certain that sensor is
certification of the accessory has been placed according to package instructions.
performed in accordance to the appropriate
IEC 60601-1 harmonized national standard. WARNING
The sensor must not be located between
WARNING defibrillator pads when a defibrillator is used
Due to elevated surface temperature, do not on a patient connected to the BISx device.
place the BISx device in prolonged direct
contact with patient’s skin, as it may cause WARNING
discomfort.
To minimize the risk of patient strangulation,
the patient interface cable (PIC) must be
carefully placed and secured.

WARNING CAUTION
Universal precautions shall be observed to When connecting or disconnecting the BISx
prevent contact with blood or other potentially device, take care not to touch the exposed
infectious materials. Place contaminated contacts of either connector. Damage due to
materials in regulated waste container. electrostatic discharge may result.
WARNING CAUTION
Whenever an event such as spillage of blood Using accessories other than those specified may
or solutions occurs, re-test ground leakage result in increased electromagnetic emissions or
current before further use. decreased electromagnetic immunity of the BISx
device.
WARNING
Do not reuse the BIS sensor. CAUTION
The BISx device should not be used adjacent to
CAUTION or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or
stacked use is necessary, the BISx device should
Do not autoclave the BISx device. Autoclaving will
be observed to verify normal operation in the
seriously damage the components.
configuration in which it will be used.
CAUTION
NOTE
Do not open the BISx device for any reason.
The BIS measurements are very sensitive
measurements that measure very small signals.
CAUTION Technological limitations don't allow higher
The BISx device has been designed to operate immunity levels than 1 V/m for radiated RF
with a BIS sensor. The sensor is a silver/silver electromagnetic fields and 1 Vrms for conducted
chloride electrode array that utilizes Aspect's disturbances induced by RF fields.
patented Zipprep™ technology and uses a Electromagnetic fields with field strengths above
proprietary connector. Use of other electrodes is 1 V/m and conducted disturbances above 1 Vrms
not recommended. may cause erroneous measurements. Therefore
Dräger recommends that you avoid using
CAUTION electrically radiating equipment in the close
proximity of these measurements.
Considerations when using Electro-Convulsive
Therapy (ECT) equipment during BIS monitoring:
Place ECT electrodes as far as possible from the
BIS sensor to minimize the effect of interference.
Certain ECT equipment may interfere with the
proper function of the BISx device. Check for
compatibility of equipment during patient setup.
CAUTION
Avoid liquid ingress to the Patient Interface Cable.
Contact of fluids with the PIC sensor connector
can interfere with PIC performance.

BIS monitoring setup
BISx device
Patient interface
cable (PIC)
Adapter cable
1 Connect the BISx device to the monitor with the CAUTION

adapter cable.
Ensure that the BISx device does not come into
2 Using the attachment clip, secure the BISx prolonged contact with your patient’s skin, as it
device to a convenient location near the may generate heat and cause discomfort.
patient's head.
3 Prepare sensor site and place the BIS sensor CAUTION
on the patient in accordance with the The BISx device may remain connected to a
instructions included on the sensor packaging. patient during defibrillation as long as the sensor
Make sure that the patient’s skin is dry. Be is not located between the defibrillator pads.
aware that a wet sensor or a salt bridge may
cause erroneous BIS and impedance values. NOTE
4 Attach the BIS sensor to the PIC. To insert the After you switch the operating mode of the monitor
sensor into the PIC, line up as shown and insert into monitoring mode from demo mode, you need
the sensor tab into the PIC sensor connector to reconnect the BIS device to the monitor before
until an audible “click” is heard. The blank side starting BIS measurement.
of the sensor tab (i.e. the side without the
computer chip) should be facing up.
BIS continuous impedance check
The continuous impedance check is always active This is done continuously and does not affect the
to enable you to understand the sensor condition in EEG wave. As long as the impedances are within
real time. It checks: the valid range, no prompt message of this check or
its results will be announced
 The combined impedance of the signal
electrodes and the reference electrode  The impedance of the ground electrode

This is done every ten minutes and takes the ground electrode does not pass the check,
approximately four seconds. It causes an artifact in another check will be performed. This continues
the EEG wave, and the monitor will announce BIS until the ground electrode passes the check.
Ground Check on the screen during the check. If
BIS sensor check
This measures the exact impedance of each Stopping a sensor check

individual electrode. It causes a disturbed EEG
wave. The sensor check stops automatically if the
impedances of all electrodes are within the valid
range. To manually stop a sensor check, select BIS
Starting a sensor check Setup > Sensor States and click Stop Sensor
Check.
The sensor check is automatically started when a
sensor is connected. To manually start a sensor
check, select BIS Setup > Sensor States and click
Start Sensor Check.
BIS sensor window
To open the BIS sensor window, select Sensor

States on the BIS Setup menu.
The window may look slightly different on your
monitor. The graphic in the BIS sensor window
automatically adapts to show the type of sensor in
use. Each symbol in the graphic represents an 1
electrode and illustrates the most recently- 2
measured impedance status of the electrodes.
Although BIS may still be measured when the
electrode is in Noise or High status, for best 1 The time at which the last sensor check
performance, all electrodes should be in Pass was completed.
status. 2 Click this button to open a window in
which information of the sensor in use is
displayed.

BIS Impedance Indicators
Color Status Electrode-to-skin impedance Action

Green Pass The impedance is within the No action necessary.
acceptable range.
Red Noise The electrode impedance cannot be Check the senor-to-skin contact.
determined due to electrical Press the edges of the sensor to
interference (noise) from another ensure adhesion and proper
source. contact. If the problem persists,
remove sensor, clean skin
High The impedance is above the limit.
thoroughly, and reapply sensor or
apply new sensor in accordance
with instructions on the sensor
packaging.
Lead Off Electrode has no skin contact. Reconnect electrode, or check
the sensor-to-skin contact. If
necessary, clean and dry skin.
Changing the BIS smoothing rate
The smoothing rate defines how the monitor Contrarily, the monitor provides a smoother BIS
averages the BIS value. With the decline in trend with decreased variability and sensitivity to
smoothing rate, the monitor provides increased artifacts.
responsiveness to changes in the patient’s state.
To change the smoothing rate, open the BIS Setup
menu and set Smoothing Rate to 10 sec, 15 sec
or 30 sec.
Switching secondary parameters on and off
A maximum of four secondary parameters can be

added to display on the BIS parameter area.
Select BIS Setup > Secondary Parameter Select
and select four secondary parameter maximum.

Changing the scale of the EEG wave
1 Open the BIS Wave Setup menu;

2 Select the appropriate setting from the Scale
list.
Setting the trend length

2 Select the appropriate length of time for BIS
trend from the Trend Length list.
Switching BIS filters on or off

2 Set Filters to On or Off.

Connecting Ventilators/Anesthesia Machines
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting the baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Opening the Medibus/X Window. . . . . . . . . . 200
Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine
Monitoring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Respiratory Loop Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Viewing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Storing and Reviewing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Changing Loops Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Showing/Hiding the Reference Loop . . . . . . 203
Resizing the Loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Alarms from Ventilator/Anesthesia

Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Overview
A ventilator/anesthesia machine can be connected NOTE

to the monitor via RS232 serial port, which
Installation and debugging should be executed by
transmits data to the monitor. Data imported from
service personnel or authorized technician of the
the ventilator/anesthesia machine, for example
manufacturer.
waveforms, measurement numerics, settings and
alarms, can be displayed on the monitor. The
NOTE
ventilator/anesthesia machine may show more
information than is available on the monitor. If the value of the ventilator/anesthesia machine is
inconsistent with that of the monitor, the
NOTE ventilator/anesthesia machine shall prevail.
The monitor does not perform measurement, but
only display the measurement result from the NOTE
ventilator/anesthesia machine. Displayed Medibus data are for information only
and must not been used as basis for diagnostic
NOTE and therapeutic purpose. Always refer to the
Settings on the ventilator/anesthesia machine are external device before making diagnostic or
independent of those on the monitor. Settings on therapeutic decisions.
the monitor will not influence ventilator/anesthesia
machine’s setting. NOTE
Displayed alarm information is not intended to
supplement the alarms of the external device.
Remain within hearing range of the alarms issued
by the external device.
Setting the baud rate
Ensure the ventilator/anesthesia machine and the can select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain
monitor share the same baud rate, thus they can be > Medibus Maintain > Baud Rate and choose
well communicated. To set the baud rate, the user 9600 or 19200 from the drop-down list.
Opening the Medibus/X Window
To open the Medibus/X window, the user can press Depending on the device connected, the
Medibus/X window varies. There’re three kinds of
the shortcut key on the screen directly or user interfaces: ventilator monitoring interface,
select Menu > Display Setup > View Selection > anesthesia machine monitoring interface, and
Medibus/X. respiratory loop interface. When the device is

connected successfully, the currently-used source

NOTE
device name is shown in the Medibus/X window
title. Ensure that the unit of external device is consistent
with that of the monitor.
Supported ventilators: Evita V500, Evita V300,
Savina 300, Savina, Babylog 8000, Babylog NOTE
VN500, Oxylog 3000+; VT low alarm generated by Evita V300 is not
Supported anesthesia machines: Perseus A500, displayed on the monitor.
Zeus Infinity Empowered, Primus Infinity
Empowered, Apollo, Fabius GS Premium, Fabius NOTE
Tiro, Fabius MRI, Fabius plus, Fabius plus XL, When connecting to Savina 300, it is
Primus, Atlan. recommended to use the Medibus/X protocol.
Otherwise, VT value will not be uploaded to the
monitor.
Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine Monitoring Interface
 Choose Mode and set it to Curve or Filled from

Savina300
the pop-up list.
Waveform area Parameter area  Select Color Setup to make color changes on
parameter and waveform.
Waveform area Parameter area  Select Default to restore factory default for all
setups in this menu.
Waveform area Parameter area  Select Enter Full-param Interface to display all
the sub-parameters’ measurement values,
without waveforms displayed.
1 External device name
 Select Respiratory Loop to enter respiratory
2 Waveform
loop interface. (Only applicable to anesthesia
3 Measurement value machine monitoring interface).
Click on the Medibus/X window to open the setup
menu for the connected device on which the user can NOTE
 Select the parameter to be displayed on the When switching between different devices, the
window in the Parameter list. trend data of the previous device is cleared.
 Select a suitable ruler for the waveform from the NOTE

options TopRuler, MidRuler and BotRuler.
If the patient type on ventilator/anesthesia
MidRuler is not available when anesthesia
machine is inconsistent with that on the monitor,
machine is connected.
there will be a prompt Inconsistent patient type
 Select an appropriate sweep for the waveform (Anes/Vent) on the monitor.
in the Sweep list. The bigger the value is, the
wider the waveform is.

Respiratory Loop Interface
Respiratory loops can indicate a fault in the airway  F-V (flow-volume) loops: it illustrates the
tubing and help physicians to detect respiratory dynamic relation between flow and volume
problems of patients. during respiration and provides information
about condition of the airway tubing.
The two types of loops are available in real time:
 P-V (pressure-volume) loops: it reflects the
dynamic relation between pressure and volume
as well as compliance of the respiratory system.
Viewing Loops
To view respiratory loop interface,

1 Click on the Medibus/X window to open the
setup menu;
2 Select Loop in the Parameter list.
3 Click on Large Loop on anesthesia machine
interface or select Respiratory Loop on the
setup interface for the connected device.
1 Respiratory loop
2 Timestamp of the saved respiratory loop
3 Measurement value
Storing and Reviewing Loops
Up to four loops of each kind can be stored for Selecting the timestamp of a currently hidden loop
reference. When the number of stored loops is over can review the loop. The color-coded loops tell
four, the latest stored loops will replace the whether the loop is currently displayed or not. If
previously stored loops. there is no whole respiratory loop detected within
15 s, the loop cannot be saved.
To save the current loop, click on Save in the
respiratory loop interface. When it is successfully
stored, a timestamp will be displayed in the
rectangle box.

Changing Loops Type
To change the loop type, select Setup > Display

Loop and choose a loop type from the drop-down
list.
Showing/Hiding the Reference Loop
To show/hide the reference loop, select Setup >

Reference Loop and choose On/Off from the
drop-down list.
Resizing the Loops
To resize the loop, select Setup > Paw Top Ruler

or Vol Top Ruler or Flow Top Ruler in which the
user can set up the top ruler for Paw, Vol and Flow.
Alarms from Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine
Physiological alarm limits and alarms from the When it is set to On and the user selects the the
ventilator/anesthesia machine are transmitted to
the monitor. If external device generates
physiological alarms about exceeding the alarm permanent key , the XX Comm. Failed
limits, the monitor prompts visual alarms to notify alarm (including visual and audio alarm indications)
users. The alarms are always non-latching on the will be cleared, even if the alarm condition still
monitor, and announced as a flashing numeric with exists, the monitor won’t generate this technical
alarm. If a new alarm occurs after the alarm is reset,
parameter alarm off icon while the alarm the new alarm will be sounding.
condition persists.
NOTE
When the external device has communication The physiological alarm limits are non-adjustable
failure, the monitor will trigger XX Comm. Failed on the monitor; the users can adjust them on
alarm (XX represents one of the external devices ventilator/anesthesia machine if necessary.
connected.). To configure Clear Comm Fail Alarm
(V/A) function, select Menu > Maintenance > User
Maintain > Alarm Setup and choose Clear Comm
Fail Alarm (V/A) which can be set to On or Off.


Freeze
Freeze
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Entering/exiting freeze status . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Entering freeze status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Exiting freeze status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Setting freeze duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Reviewing frozen waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Freeze
Overview
When monitoring a patient, the user can freeze  Upon freezing, the system exits all other
waveforms and examine them. The Freeze function operating menus. The system freezes all
has the following features: waveforms in the Waveform area of the Basic
Screen, the Full Lead ECG waveforms and
 Freeze status can be activated on any
extra waveforms on the Full Lead ECG
operating screen.
interface (if any). The Parameter area refreshes
normally.
 The frozen waveforms can be reviewed and
recorded.
Entering/exiting freeze status
Entering freeze status After exiting Freeze status, the system will clear
screen waveforms and resume displaying real-time
waveforms. In the Screen Refresh mode, the
In the non-Freeze status, press the hardkey on
system will sweep the waveforms from left to right
the monitor control panel to exit the current menu. in the Waveform Area.
Press the button again, freeze status is entered
and the popup Freeze menu is displayed. In Freeze Press the hardkey on the control panel, and the
status, all waveforms are frozen and will not be Freeze menu will appear on the bottom part of the
refreshed. screen. At the same time, the system freezes the
waveforms.
NOTE
Exiting freeze status
Pressing the hardkey repeatedly over a short
Executing any of the following operations will exit period of time may result in discontinuous
Freeze status: waveforms on the screen.
1 Exit the Freeze menu;
2 Press hardkey on the control panel again;
3 When the freeze time expires;
4 Execute any operation that triggers the
adjustment of the screen or displays a new
menu.

Freeze
Setting freeze duration
By setting the freeze duration, the monitor can exit 1 On the Freeze menu, select Freeze Duration.
freeze status automatically after certain period. To
2 Select the desired setting from the pop-up list.
set the freeze duration:
None/1/2/3/4/5/10/15/20/30/60 min are
optional. When None is selected, the user can
exit freeze status manually based on the actual
situation.
Reviewing frozen waveform
By moving the waveform, the user can review 120 s

of the waveform before it was frozen. For a
waveform of less than 120 s, the remaining part is
displayed as a straight line. Select Time on the
Freeze menu and use the up/down arrow keys to
move the frozen waves so that the user can review
the other parts of the frozen waves not displayed on
the current screen.


Review
Review
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trend graph review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trend table review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
NIBP review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Alarm review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ARR review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Full disclosure waveform review . . . . . . . . . 213

Selecting waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Review
Overview
The monitor provides 150-hour trend data of all

NOTE
parameters, storage of 1200 NIBP measurement
results, 200 alarm events and 200 arrhythmia Parameter labels from external devices
events. This chapter gives detailed instruction for (ventilators/anesthesia machines) are suffixed
review of all data. with (V/A).
Trend graph review
To review the trend Graph, press the shortcut key  Select Parameter and you can choose the
required parameters to be displayed in the trend
on the screen or select Menu > Review >
graph.
Trend Graph.
 To display a different parameter’s trend, you
In the trend graph, the y-axis is the measurement
can either:
value and x-axis represents time. With the
exception of NIBP, other trends are displayed as
continuous curves.  Select beside the parameter name and
choose the desired parameter from the pop-
up list (as shown in red circle above).
 Press the symbols and to switch

parameters in batch.
 Select Zoom to adjust the trend scale. Once the
trend scale on the trend graph review interface
is adjusted, the trend scale of the corresponding
parameter in TrendScreen of the main
interface will also change.
 Select Scale to change the length of trend data
displayed on the current screen. 6 min, 12 min,
30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 6 h, 12 h, 24 h, 36 h and
1 Trend curve area 48 h are optional.
2 Trend data: displays measurement values
at the cursor indicated time.
 Select beside Cursor to move the cursor
3 Cursor
left or right.
4 Cursor time
In the trend graph review window:  Select and to scroll the screen left and
right manually to browse the trend graph.
 Select Trend Table to switch to the trend table
interface.

Review
 Select Record to print out the currently

displayed trends by the recorder.
Trend table review
To review the trend table, press the shortcut key

 Select , , and to scroll the
screen manually to browse the trend table.
Trend Table.
 Select Trend Graph to switch to the trend
In the trend table review window: graph interface.
 Select Parameter and you can choose the  Select Record to print out the currently
required parameters to be displayed in the trend displayed trends by the recorder.
table.
 Select Record All to enter the setup menu.
 Select Interval to change the interval of the Click Record All after setting Start Time and
trend data. 1 s, 5 s, 30 s, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, End Time, then all the trends for that period will
10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min and NIBP are be printed out by the recorder.
optional. Select NIBP to view the trend data
according to the NIBP measurement time.
NIBP review
To review the NIBP measurement data, press the

 Select and to browse more NIBP
shortcut key on the screen or select Menu >
measurement data.
Review > NIBP Review. The NIBP Review.
 Select Record to print out the NIBP
In the NIBP review window: measurement data by the recorder.
 Select Unit to change the pressure unit.
Alarm review
To review the alarm event, press the shortcut key  Select Event Type to choose the required
parameter from the popup list and the user can
review alarm event of the specific parameters.
Alarm Review.
 Select Time Index to set end time of alarm
In the alarm review window: review.

Review
 Current Time: the alarm events occurring  Select Record to print out the alarm events by
before the current time are displayed on the the recorder.
alarm event review interface.
When an alarm event occurs, all the measurement
 User Define: the user can define the review numerics and related waveform 4 (8 or 16) s before
time by setting time box displayed on the and after the event are stored. To set the waveform
interface. The alarm events occurring length, select Menu > Alarm Setup > Alarm Rec.
before the User Define option are displayed Time. 8 s, 16 s and 32 s are optional.
on the alarm event review interface.
NOTE
 Select and to browse more alarm The monitor can store a maximum of 200 alarm
events. events. As soon as the alarm event storage is full,
the earliest alarm event will be replaced by the
latest one.
ARR review
To review the ARR alarm event, press the shortcut

NOTE
If there are more than 200 arrhythmia events, the
key on the screen or select ECG Setup monitor will only keep the recent ones.
> ARR Analysis > ARR Review or Menu > Review
> ARR Review. NOTE
The name of arrhythmia event will be shown on the
In the ARR review window, the latest arrhythmia
alarm status area.
events are displayed. Select and to
NOTE
browse more ARR alarm events. You may select an
alarm event and access the alarm review interface The renaming is only available for the ARR alarm
to get more information. On the alarm review event of the current patient, not for that of the
interface, you can: history patient.
 Right or left shift the waveform to review the

complete 8-second waveform.
 Select Record and output the arrhythmia
waveform by the recorder.
 According to the actual clinical needs, select
another name from the pull-down list of
Rename for the arrhythmia event. Confirm the
changes to make the settings take effect.
 Select Delete to remove a specific arrhythmia
event.
 Select Alarm List or exit to get back to the
arrhythmia review interface.

Review
Full disclosure waveform review
Select Menu > Review > History Patient > Full

Wave. to enter the full disclosure review interface.
Depending on the configuation, the user can review
up to 48-hour or 96-hour waveform data.
Selecting waveform
Before reviewing the waveform, you must select

waveform you want to display. To display the
desired waveforms,
1 Enter the full disclosure review interface;
2 Select Wave Setup to set the desired waveform
(Maximum: 1) to be displayed on the full
disclosure review interface.


Calculation and titration table
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Drug Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Calculation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Calculation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Titration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Hemodynamic Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Calculation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Oxygenation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Ventilation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Renal Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222


Overview
The monitor provides a calculation function and NOTE

titration table. Calculations are patient data that are
The calculation results are for reference only and
not directly measured but calculated by the monitor.
the calculation significance must be determined by
The monitor can perform drug calculation, the physician.
hemodynamic calculation, oxygenation calculation,
ventilation calculation and renal function WARNING
calculation, and also support record function. The correctness of the input parameters and
the suitability of the calculated results should
NOTE
be carefully verified. The manufacturer is not
The drug calculation function acts only as a liable for any consequences arising from
calculator. The patient weights in Drug Dose menu input or operation errors.
and in Patient Information menu are independent
of each other. Therefore changing the Weight in
Drug Dose menu will not change the weight in the
Patient Information menu.
Drug Calculation
Calculation Procedures  Lidocaine

 Nipride
1 The drug calculation window is displayed by
selecting Menu > Common Function > Drug  Nitroglycerin
Dose.  Pitocin
2 Select the right pull-down box of the Drug 3 The system generates values that can not be
option and select the required drug name treated the calculation results. The user must
among the 15 drugs which are listed as follows. enter the correct parameter value based on the
And the drug name of Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, doctor’s instruction.
Drug D and Drug E can be defined by the user.
4 Manually enter the value of patient weight or
 Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, Drug D and Drug E directly obtain the value from the monitor by
 Aminophylline selecting Get Info.
 Dobutamine 5 Enter the correct parameter value.
 Dopamine 6 Confirm whether the calculation result is

correct.
 Epinephrine
The following formulas are applied to dose
 Heparin calculation:
 Isuprel Concentrate = Amount / Volume

INF Rate = DOSE / Concentrate Calculation Unit

Duration = Amount / Dose
Each drug has the fixed unit or unit series to
Dose = Rate × Concentrate calculate. Among the same unit series, the unit
DRIP Rate = INF Rate / 60 × DROP Size binary varies with the entered parameter value.
The calculation units of the drugs are listed as
follows:
Drug Unit
Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, Aminophylline, Dobutamine, DopaminE, g, mg, mcg
Epinephrine, IsupreL, Lidocaine, Nipride, Nitroglycerin
Drug D, Pitocin, Heparin Ku, mu, Unit
Drug E mEq
When defining a drug, select Drug A, Drug B, NOTE

Drug C, Drug D, and Drug E based on the unit
Drip Rate and Drop Size are invalid in the neonatal
series.
mode.
NOTE
The drug calculation is displayed as invalid value
before the user edits the drug name and patient
weight, and the user can not enter any value.
Titration Table
After completing the drug calculation, the user can

open the Titration on the Drug Dose interface.
The user can change the following items in the
titration table:
 Basic
 Step
 Dose Type
The data in the titration table will vary with the
changes above. And the user can perform the
following:
 Select and to observe more data.

 Record the data displayed in the current
window by selecting Record.

Hemodynamic Calculation
Calculation Procedure Input Parameters
1 The hemodynamic calculation interface is

displayed by selecting Menu > Common
Function > Calculation > Hemodynamics.
2 Manually enter the values required on this
interface. The user can also directly obtain the
values of HR, C.O., PA MAP, CVP, and PAWP if
they are available from the monitor by selecting
Get Info.
3 Select Calculate to output parameter value.
Items Unit English Full Name/Description

PAWP mmHg Pulmonary artery wedge pressure
CVP mmHg Central venous pressure
C.O. L/min Cardiac output
HR bpm Heart rate
EDV ml End-diastolic volume
AP MAP mmHg Mean Artery Pressure
PA MAP mmHg Pulmonary artery mean pressure
PAP mmHg Pulmonary artery pressure
Height cm /
Weight kg /
Output Parameters
Items Unit English Full Name/Description Formula

CI L/min/m2 Cardiac index C.O. / BSA
SV ml Stroke volume C.O. / HR × 1000
SVR DS/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance 80 × (AP MAP – CVP) / C.O.
PVR DS/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance 80 × (PA MAP – PAWP) / C.O.
LCW kg·m Left cardiac work 0.0136 × AP MAP × C.O.

LVSW g·m Left ventricular stroke work 0.136 × (AP MAP – PAWP) × SV
EF % Ejection fraction SV / EDV × 100%
SVI ml/m2 Stroke volume index SV / BSA
SVRI DS·m2/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance index SVR × BSA
PVRI DS·m2/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance index PVR × BSA
LCWI kg·m/m2 Left cardiac work index LCW / BSA
LVSWI 2 Left ventricular stroke work index LVSW / BSA
g·m/m
RCW kg·m Right cardiac work 0.0136 × PA MAP × C.O.
RVSW g·m Right ventricular stroke work 0.0136 × (PAP-PAWP) × SV
BSA m2 Body surface area Weight0.425 × Height0.725 × 0.007184
RCWI kg·m/m2 Right cardiac work index RCW / BSA
RVSWI 2 Right ventricular stroke work index RVSW / BSA
g·m/m
Oxygenation Calculation
Calculation Procedure
Calculation > Oxygenation.
values of patient height, patient weight, C.O.
and FiO2 if they are available from the monitor
by selecting Get Info.
Input Parameters

FiO2 % Percentage fraction of inspired oxygen
PaO2 mmHg Partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries
PaCO2 mmHg Partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries

PiO2 mmHg Partial pressure of oxygen in inspired gas

SaO2 % Arterial oxygen saturation
PvO2 mmHg Partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood
SvO2 % Venous oxygen saturation
Hb g/L Hemoglobin
RQ / Respiratory quotient
Height cm /
Weight kg /
CI l/min/m2 Cardiac index
Output Parameters
English Full
Items Unit Formula
Name/Description
VO2 ml/(min.m2) Oxygen consumption Ca-v O2 × CI
CaO2 ml/L Arterial oxygen content Hb × 1.34 × SaO2/100% + (0.0031 × PaO2)
CvO2 ml/L Venous oxygen content Hb × 1.34 × SvO2/100% + (0.0031 × PvO2)
Arterial venous oxygen
Ca-v O2 ml/L CaO2 – CvO2
content difference
O2ER / Oxygen extraction ratio (VO2 / DO2) × 100%
DO2 ml/(min.m2) Oxygen transport CaO2 × CI
Partial pressure of PiO2-PACO2 × [FiO2/100% + (1-
PAO2 mmHg
oxygen in the alveoli FiO2/100%) / RQ]
Alveolar-arterial oxygen
AaDO2 mmHg PAO2 – PaO2
difference
CC’O2 ml/L Capillary oxygen content PAO2 × 0.003 + 1.34 × SaO2/100% × Hb
Qs/Qt / Venous admixture (CC’O2 – CaO2) / (CC’O2 – CvO2) × 100%
C.O. L/min Cardiac output VO2 /( Ca-v O2 × BSA)
AaDO2/PaO2 / Spiro-index (PAO2 – PaO2) / PaO2× 100%
DO2I ml/(min.m2) Oxygen delivery index DO2/BSA
Oxygen consumption
VO2I ml/(min.m2) index
VO2/BSA

Ventilation Calculation
Calculation Procedure 3 Select Calculate to output parameter value.

Calculation > Ventilation.
Input Parameters
values of FiO2, RR, PIP and PEEP if they are
available from the monitor by selecting Get
Info.

RR rpm Respiration rate
VT ml Tidal volume
PEEP cmH2O Positive end-expiratory pressure
PEEPi cmH2O Intrinsic PEEP
PeCO2 mmHg Partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2
Ppeak cmH2O The peak inspiratory pressure
Output Parameters

PiO2-PaCO2 × [FiO2/100%
PAO2 mmHg Partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli
+ (1-FiO2/100%)/RQ]
AaDO2 mmHg Alveolar-arterial oxygen difference PAO2 – PaO2
MV L/min Minute volume VT × RR/1000
(PAO2 – PaO2) / PaO2×
AaDO2/PaO2 / Spiro-index
100%
VA L/min Alveolar volume (VT – VD) × RR/1000

[(PaCO2 – PeCO2) × VT] /

VD ml Volume of physiological dead space
PaCO2
Physiological dead space in percent of (PaCO2 – PeCO2) / PaCO2
VD/VT /
tidal volume × 100%
VT / (Ppeak – PEEP –
Cdyn ml/cmH2O Compliance dynamic
PEEPi)
Renal Function Calculation
Calculation Procedure
Calculation > Renal Function.
interface.
Input Parameters

URK mmol/L Urine potassium
URNa mmol/L Urinary sodium
Urine ml/24h Urine
Posm mOsm/kgH2O Plasm osmolality
Uosm mOsm/kgH2O Urine osmolality
SerNa mmol/L Serum sodium
SCr umol/L Serum creatinine
UCr umol/L Urine creatinine
BUN mmol/L Blood urea nitrogen
UUN mmol/L Urine urea nitrogen
Height cm /
Weight kg /
Type / Patient type: Adult, Pediat, Neonat

Gender / Male, Female, N/A.
Output Parameters

URNaEx mmol/24h Urine sodium excretion URNa × Urine / 1000
URKEx mmol/24h Urine potassium excretion URK × Urine / 1000
CUUN ml/min Urine urea nitrogen clearance rate UUN × Urine / (BUN × 24 × 60)
CNa ml/24h Clearance of sodium URNa × Urine / (SerNa)
CCr ml/min Creatinine clearance rate (UCr × Urine) / (SCr × 24 × 60)
Cosm ml/min Osmolar clearance (Uosm × Urine) / (Posm × 24 × 60)
(URNa × SCr) / (UCr × SerNa) ×
FENa % Fractional excretion of sodium
100%
FEUr % Fractional Excretion of Urea (SCr × UUN) / (UCr × BUN) × 100%
BUN/SCr / Blood urea nitrogen creatinine ratio (BUN / SCr) × 1000
CH2O ml/24h Free water clearance Urine – Uosm ×Urine / Posm
U/P osm / Urine to plasma osmolality ratio Uosm / Posm
U/SCr / Urine-serum creatinine ratio UCr / SCr
Na/K % Sodium potassium ratio URNa / URK × 100%


Strip recording
Strip recording
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Performance of the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Starting and stopping strip recording . . . . . 227
Recorder operations and status

messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Record paper requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Proper operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Paper out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Installling paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Removing paper jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Strip recording
General information
A thermal dot matrix recorder is used for the

monitor and can support a number of recording
types and output patient information, measurement
data, and review data waveforms.
1 Start/Stop key. Press this key to start or stop

recording task.
2 Recorder door
3 Paper outlet
4 Recording indicator
Performance of the recorder
 Waveform record printed at the rate of

12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s.
 48 mm wide printout paper.
 Record up to three waveforms.
 User-selectable real-time recording time and
waveform.
 Auto recording interval is set by the user and
the waveform displays in real time.
NOTE
Do not use the strip recorder with a low battery as
recorder usage will more quickly deplete the
battery.

Strip recording
Starting and stopping strip recording
The monitor provides several types of stripe

recording. The strip recording can be started and
stopped in the following ways:
Recording Type Description/Procedure

Continual real-time Select at least one Rec waveform in Recorder Setup (A maximum of
recording three waveforms can be selected), select Continual in R-T Rec Time.
Press the Record button on the front panel to start the recording.
Press the button again to stop recording.
8-second/20-second real- Select at least one Rec waveform in Recorder Setup (A maximum of
time recording three waveforms can be selected), select 8 s or 20 s in R-T Rec Time,
set Record Interval as needed, press the Record button on the front
panel to start the recording. Press the button again to stop recording
or when R-T Rec time ends, the monitor stops recording automatically.
The runtime for each wave is 8 s or 20 s. The record Interval can be
set as: Off, 10 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h,
4 h. The default recording time is 8 s.
Trend graph recording Select Menu > Review > Trend Graph, click Record to start
recording.
Trend table recording Select Menu > Review > Trend Table, click Record to start
recording.
NIBP review recording Select Menu > Review > NIBP Review, click Record to start
recording.
Arrhythmia review recording Select Menu > Review > ARR Review, select one arrhythmia alarm
and click Record to start recording.
Alarm review recording Select Menu > Review > Alarm Review, select one alarm and click
Record to start recording.
Drug calculation titration Select Menu > Common Function > Calculation > Drug Dose >
recording Titration, click Record to start recording.
Hemodynamic Calculation Select Menu > Common Function > Calculation > Hemodynamics,
result recording click Record to start recording.
Oxygenation Calculation Select Menu > Common Function > Calculation > Oxygenation,
Ventilation Calculation result Select Menu > Common Function > Calculation > Ventilation, click
recording Record to start recording.
Renal Function Calculation Select Menu > Common Function > Calculation > Renal Function,

Strip recording
Recording Type Description/Procedure

C.O. measurement Select C.O. Option > C.O. Measure, click Record to start recording.
recording
Frozen waveform recording In the Freeze window, click Record to start recording.
The recorder will stop recording in the following

NOTE
situations:
 The strip recording task is finished. The button on the front panel enables users to
manually start or stop recording.
 When the Start/Stop button on the front panel of
the printer is pressed while the printer is
NOTE
printing.
For waveforms with sweep of 6.25 mm/s, after
 No paper in the recorder. entering freeze status, the recording speed will
 Because of malfunction. automatically be adjusted to 12.5 mm/s. Users can
modify the recording speed according to their
actual needs. The options are 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s
and 50 mm/s.
Recorder operations and status messages
Record paper requirement Paper out
CAUTION When the Recorder Out Of Paper alarm is

displayed, the strip recorder will not start.
Only use standard thermo-sensitive record paper.
If non-standard record paper is used, the recorder
might not function, the recording quality may be
poor, and the thermo-sensitive printhead could be
damaged.
Proper operation
 When the strip recorder is operating, do not pull

the paper.
 Do not operate the strip recorder without record
paper.

Strip recording
Installling paper 3 Position the paper correctly.
1 Pull out the upper arc of the strip recorder

casing as shown in the following figure.
4 Pull 2 cm of paper out and close the strip

recorder casing.
NOTE
2 Insert a new roll of paper into the paper Be careful when inserting paper. Avoid damaging
cassette, printing side facing upwards. the thermo-sensitive print head. Do not leave the
strip recorder door open except to insert paper or
troubleshoot printing problems.
Removing paper jam
When the strip recorder malfunctions, open the

strip recorder door to check for a paper jam.
Remove the paper jam in the following way:
 Cut the record paper from the feeding edge.
 Open the strip recorder door.
 Re-install the paper.
NOTE
If the monitor is not installed with a strip recorder,
it will indicate Recorder Setup Needed after
pressing the Record button in the dialog box.

Strip recording
NOTE
Do not touch the thermo-sensitive print head when
performing continuous recording.

Other Functions
Other Functions
Nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Analog Output and Defibrillator

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wi-Fi (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Storing Data in the Storage Device. . . . . . . . 234

Data Stored in the Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . 234
Activating/ Deactivating Data Storing . . . . . . . . 234
Selecting a Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Reviewing Data Stored in the
Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting Data Stored in the
Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Exporting data stored in the internal
storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Formatting the internal storage device . . . . . . . 235
Ejecting a Removable Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Other Functions
Nurse call
The monitor provides a dedicated nurse call port 3 Choose On in the Nurse Call list.
which can be connected to the hospital’s nurse call
system. The user should activate the function
NOTE
following the steps below:
Before using nurse call function, check whether it
1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, is working normally.
and input the password;
2 Select Other Setups > Aux Output;
Analog Output and Defibrillator Synchronization
The monitor provides analog output signals to 1 Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain,
accessory equipment. Also, if a defibrillator is and input the password;
connected to the monitor, a defibrillator
2 Select Other Setups > Aux Output;
synchronization pulse can be output. The user
should activate the function following the steps 3 Choose Analog Output or Defibrillation in the
below: Aux Output list.
Wi-Fi (optional)
Wi-Fi modules are optional to be configured in the 4 Choose a network from the window, in which
monitors. And The user should configure the the user can check the network’s encryption
settings on the monitor following the steps below information (Security). The user will be
before connecting the monitor to a wireless prompted to enter the password of that network
network: if a password is required. After entering the
password and setting the IPv4 address, the
and input the password. user can click to connect the network.
2 In the User Maintain menu, select Network
Maintain. 5 Or select to connect the hidden networks.
After entering Network Name, Security,
3 In the Network Maintain menu, select Wi-Fi password and setting the IPv4 address, the
from the Network Type list. And click Config to
open the Wi-Fi Setup window. The available user can click to connect the hidden
networks will be listed in this window. network.

Other Functions
If the monitor is successfully connected to the

selected network, it will be indicated by the Connect the network
message Connected, and the local IP address of
the monitor will be displayed in the Wi-Fi Setup Disconnect the network
window. Also, a symbol indicating the networking
state will be displayed on the lower portion of the NOTE
main screen. The meanings of the networking state
Be aware that some network-based functions may
symbols are explained below:
be limited for monitors on wireless networks in
comparison with those on wired networks.
Wi-Fi signal intensity: Level 4
NOTE
Wi-Fi signal intensity: Level 3
The obstacle may interfere with data transmission
Wi-Fi signal intensity: Level 2 and even cause data loss.
Wi-Fi signal intensity: Level 1 NOTE

If the monitor fails to connect to any wireless
network or no available wireless network is in the
Click to review the historically connected
Wi-Fi Setup window, switch the Network Type
networks. After choosing certain network, the user
from Wi-Fi to Wired and then to Wi-Fi again. Then
can select Forget This Network or Join This
retry to connect to a wireless network. If the
Network.
wireless network still fails to be connected, please
If the encryption information of the currently try to restart the monitor and connect again.
connected network is modified, the network will
automatically disconnect and attempt to reconnect. NOTE
Use the wireless device recommended by Dräger,
At this time, click first to ignore this network and
otherwise some exceptional situations such as
then connect manually.
frequent network disconnection may occur on the
The following symbols may appear when monitor.
configuring Wi-Fi:
NOTE
Symbol Description
The wireless driver is compatible with channels
Connect to hidden networks 1-11 only.
View historically connected networks

NOTE
Refresh network list When signal intensity is level 2 or less, signal may
be unstable and quality of the signal transmission
Turn the page left and right. to view may be degraded.
more networks
Secure network NOTE
When the monitor is connected to Vista 120 CMS
Insecure network (not via the wireless network, the user should set the
recommended). Icon color is red. router to a secure encryption/authentication mode
Hide password (Recommended option: WPA2-PSK, with a high
complexity, non-dictionary password).
Show password

Other Functions
Storing Data in the Storage Device
Data Stored in the Storage Device NOTE

The storage time varies according to the patient's
Refer to Section Data management for more parameter data volume. When the single patient
information about single patient data volume. data store reaches 240 hours, the monitor will
When the single patient data reach the maximum, automatically create a new folder for continuous
the user can choose to Keep Storing or Stop data store.
Storing by selecting Menu > Common Function >
Data Store > if one patient data full. NOTE
Threshold Detection is only applicable to the
If Keep Storing is selected, as soon as the single
removable devices.
patient data is full, the earliest data will be replaced
by the latest one. When the remaining storage
space is less than 15 M, the earliest patient data in
the storage space will be deleted in order to store Activating/ Deactivating Data Storing
the latest data.
To activate/ deactivate the data storing function,
If Stop Storing is selected, the monitor will stop select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain >
data storing and the latest data cannot be stored Other Setups, and set Data Store to On or Off.
when the single patient data reach the maximum.
For instance, if all the patient data (such as the The monitor will stop storing data in the storage
trend graph, trend table, NIBP measurements, device under the following circumstances:
arrhythmia event, and alarm event ) except  No storage devices are selected.
waveforms reach the maximum, the monitor will
stop storing, while only the waveforms keep storing  There is no enough space in the storage device
until they are full. When the remaining storage for storing data.
space is less than 10 M, the monitor will stop  The removable device is read-only.
storing new data, prompting insufficient storage
space.  The data storing function is deactivated.
The monitor can detect the storage space  The monitor is switched off.
threshold. Select Menu > Common Function >  The power supply is off.
Data Store and set Threshold Detection to On.
When the removable device is newly inserted and
its remaining storage space is less than 300 M, the Selecting a Storage Device
monitor will stop storing data, prompting The space
in U disk is less than 300 M. Please clean it up.. To configure the storage device, select Menu >
The user needs to clean up the space manually till Common Function > Data Store > Storage
the remaining space is more than 300 M, thus the Medium, and choose the storage medium from the
monitor will keep storing data. pop-up list as desired. Internal Storage Device
and Removable Device can be selected.
When Internal Storage Device is selected as the
storage medium, if configured, the storage device
name will automatically become Internal Storage
Device. When Removable Device is selected as

Other Functions
the storage medium, the user may plug several Deleting Data Stored in the Storage
removable devices into the monitor at the same Device
time, but only one is operative. The user can select
a removable device as a working one among the To delete data of one patient, choose the patient
plugging devices by selecting Menu > Common from the list after selecting Menu > Review >
Function > Data Store > Storage Device and History Patient, and then click Delete Data on the
choosing the device name from the list. By default, Review menu. Further confirmation of deletion is
the first plugged removable device is the working required.
one.
To delete data of all patients, select Menu >
After configuring the appropriate storage device, Review > History Patient and click Delete all data
click exit. If the storage device is successfully on the History Patient Review menu. Further
starting data storing, the monitor will be indicated confirmation is required.
by the symbol . If there is no enough space in
storage device, or the storage device is read-
Exporting data stored in the internal
only/damaged, the symbol will be displayed. storage device
CAUTION To export data of one patient from the internal

Not all the removable devices are compatible with storage device to the removable device, choose the
the monitor. Use the removable devices patient from the list after selecting Menu > Review
recommended by Dräger. > History Patient, and then click Export Current
Data on the Review menu.
CAUTION To export data of all patients, select Menu >
DO not set the read-only switch on the removable Review > History Patient and click Export all
device to on when the removable device is data on the History Patient Review menu.
inserted in the monitor.
CAUTION
Formatting the internal storage device
It is recommended to format the USB flash drive To format the internal storage device, select Menu
to the FAT file type via PC prior to use. > Maintenance > User Maintain > Other Setups
> Format internal storage device. Further
confirmation is required.
Reviewing Data Stored in the Storage
Device NOTE
As soon as the internal storage device is
To review data stored in the storage device, select formatted, all the data will be cleared.
Menu > Review > History Patient. The user can
choose to review the storage device as desired NOTE
from the pop-up list. Choose a patient from the list
You have no need to restart the monitor after
to review the data including patient information,
formatting is successful. The internal storage
trend graph, trend table, NIBP measurements,
device can be identified and loaded automatically.
arrhythmia event, alarm event, and full disclosure
waveform. The user can choose to record trend
graph, trend table, NIBP measurements, and full
disclosure waveform via recorder.

Other Functions
NOTE
If formatting is failed, try again. Restart the monitor
and retry the formatting, or contact the service
personnel of the manufacturer if formatting is failed
repeatedly.
Ejecting a Removable Device
Before unplugging a removable device from the

monitor, the user needs to select Menu >
Removable Device and click Eject to uninstall the
removable device. In this menu, the user can also
check the remaining capacity of the storage device.
CAUTION
Do not remove the removable device without
ejecting it during data storing, or the removable
device might be damaged.

Using battery
Using battery
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Battery power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Battery status on the main screen . . . . . . . . 238
Checking battery performance . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Recycling the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Maintaining the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Using battery
Overview
This monitor can run on battery, which ensures the interrupted, the monitor will take power from the
uninterrupted operation even when AC power internal battery. If the monitor is powered by battery,
supply is interrupted. The battery recharges the monitor will switch off automatically before the
whenever the monitor is connected to the AC battery is completely depleted.
power source. During monitoring, if the AC power is
Battery power indicator
The indicator labeled Battery on the front panel of

the monitor illuminates green when the monitor is
battery powered and yellow when being charged.
The indicator is not illuminated when the monitor is
not powered or when using AC power.
Battery status on the main screen
The Battery Status shows the status of each battery

detected and the combined battery power
remaining. It also includes an estimate of the
monitoring time remaining.
Icon is shown when the monitor is
not equipped with a battery.
Remaining battery power: 100%.
Batteries are almost depleted and

need to recharge immediately.
When the monitor is battery powered, the monitor

switches off automatically if there is no power.

Using battery
Checking battery performance
NOTE WARNING
Remove the battery from the monitor when the Do not connect the positive (+) and negative
monitor is not used for a long period of time. (-) terminals with metal objects, and do not put
the battery together with metal objects, which
The performance of rechargeable batteries may can result in short circuits.
deteriorate over time. The battery should be
conditioned regularly as follows: WARNING
1 Disconnect the patient from the monitor and Do not destroy, disassemble or modify the
stop all monitoring and measurement. battery in any way. Do not short circuit the
battery, or its terminals, to a metal object.
2 Switch the monitor power on and charge the
battery for more than 6 hours continuously.
WARNING
3 Disconnect the monitor and let it run until there
Do not unplug the battery while the monitor is
is no battery power remaining and the monitor
working.
shuts off.
4 Reconnect the monitor to mains. WARNING
This should improve the battery running time. If the Do not heat or throw battery into a fire.
running time is less than listed in the specification,
change the battery or contact the customer service. WARNING
Do not use, leave the battery close to fire or
WARNING other places where temperature may be above
Before using the rechargeable lithium-ion +60 °C.
battery (hereinafter called battery), be sure to
read these Instructions for Use and follow all
WARNING
safety precautions.
Do not immerse, throw, or wet battery in
water/seawater.
WARNING
The service life of the battery depends on the
WARNING
service interval. The service life of the battery
is about three years if the battery is well Do not destroy the battery: do not pierce the
maintained and stored. The service life of the battery with a sharp object such as a needle;
battery may shorten if it is used do not hit with a hammer, step on or throw or
inappropriately. If the battery life is exhausted drop to cause strong shock; do not
and not replaced in time, it may cause damage disassemble or modify the battery.
or heat to the device.
WARNING
WARNING The recommended battery can only be used
Periodic checks on the battery performance for this monitor. Do not connect battery
are required. Change the battery if necessary. directly to an electric outlet or cigarette lighter
charger.

Using battery
WARNING WARNING
Do not solder the leading wire and the battery Stop using the battery if abnormal heat, odor,
terminal directly. discoloration, damage, deformation, or
abnormal condition is detected during use,
WARNING charge, or storage. Keep it away from the
If liquid leaking from the battery gets into monitor.
eyes, do not rub eyes. Wash them well with
clean water and go to see a doctor WARNING
immediately. If liquid leaks of the battery Do not use a battery with serious scratch or
splash onto skin or clothes, wash well with deformation.
fresh water immediately.
WARNING
WARNING When the monitor is running on battery power,
If leakage or foul odor is detected, ensure that do not replace the battery during monitoring
there’s no fire around. patients; or the monitor will be powered off,
which may result in patient injury.
WARNING
Do not place battery in the monitor with the (+)
and (-) in the wrong way.
Replacing the battery
WARNING
Replacement of lithium batteries or fuel cells
by inadequately trained personnel would
result in an unacceptable risk (e.g., excessive
temperatures, fire or explosion).
To install or replace the battery: 1 Pull the battery door downwards to open it.
2 Pull the metal retainer until the battery can be
removed.
3 Insert the new battery into the battery
compartment.
4 Pull the metal retainer downward to fix the
battery and close the battery door.
Battery door

Using battery
Recycling the battery
When the battery no longer holds a charge, it NOTE

should be replaced. Remove the old battery from
To prolong the life of rechargeable battery, charge
the monitor and recycle it properly.
it at least once every six months for a charging
time of about five hours.
Maintaining the battery
Batteries should be conditioned regularly to

maintain their useful life.
Remove the batteries from the monitor if they are
not used for a longer period of time. And recharge
the batteries at a minimum of every 6 months when
they are stored.
Discharge the battery completely once every
month.


Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
General points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Cleaning the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Cleaning the Reusable Accessories. . . . . . . . . 245
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Disinfecting the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Disinfecting the Reusable Accessories . . . . . . 247
Cleaning and Disinfecting Other

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Care and cleaning
Overview
Use only the Dräger-approved substances and Dräger has validated the cleaning and disinfection
methods listed in this chapter to clean or disinfect instructions included in this User Manual. It is the
the equipment. The warranty does not cover responsibility of the healthcare professional to
damage caused by using unapproved substances ensure that the instructions are followed so as to
or methods. ensure adequate cleaning and disinfection.
Dräger makes no claims regarding the efficacy of
the listed chemicals or methods as a means for
controlling infection. Contact infectious disease
experts in the hospital for details.
General points
Keep the monitor, cables and accessories free of  Do not pour liquid onto the system.
dust and dirt. To prevent the device from damage,
 Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
follow the procedure:
 Never use abrasive material (such as steel wool
 Use only recommended cleaning substances
or silver polish).
and disinfectants listed in this manual. Others
may cause damage (not covered by warranty),  Inspect the monitor and reusable accessories
reduce product lifetime or cause safety after they are cleaned and disinfected.
hazards.
CAUTION
 Always dilute according to the manufacturer’s
If the user spills liquid on the equipment, battery,
instructions.
or accessories, or they are accidentally immersed
 Unless otherwise specified, do not immerse any in liquid, contact service personnel or Dräger
part of the equipment or any accessories in service engineer.
liquid.
Cleaning
If the device or accessory has been in contact with  Mild near neutral detergent
the patient, then cleaning and disinfection is
 Ethanol (75%)
required after every use. If there has been no
patient contact and there is no visible  Isopropanol (70%)
contamination then daily cleaning and disinfection
Cleaning agents should be applied and removed
is appropriate.
using a clean, soft, non-abrasive cloth or paper
The validated cleaning agents for cleaning the towel.
monitor and reusable accessories are:

Care and cleaning
Cleaning the monitor 3 Rinse the cuff and after cleaning, wipe off the
cleaning solution with a fresh cloth or towel
dampened with tap water until no visible
CAUTION cleaning agent remains.
Before cleaning the monitor, make sure that the
monitor is switched off and disconnected from the 4 Wipe off residual moisture with a dry cloth.
power line. 5 Air dry the cuff thoroughly after cleaning.
To surface-clean the monitor, follow these steps: Replacing the Air Bladder:
1 Switch off the monitor and disconnect it from the After cleaning, replace the air bladder into the cuff
power line. following the steps below:
2 Wipe the entire exterior surface, including the 1 Roll the bladder lengthwise and insert it into the
screen, of the equipment using a soft cloth cuff from the large opening at one end of the
dampened with the cleaning solution thoroughly cuff.
until no visible contaminants remain. 2 Thread the hose from within the cuff and out
3 After cleaning, wipe off the cleaning solution through the small hole at the top of the cuff.
with a fresh cloth or towel dampened with tap 3 Adjust the bladder until it is in position.
water until no visible cleaning agent remains.
4 Dry the monitor in a ventilated and cool place. Cleaning the SpO2 Sensor
1 Wipe the surfaces of the sensor and cable using
Cleaning the Reusable Accessories a soft cloth dampened with the cleaning solution
until no visible contaminants remain.
Cleaning the ECG Cable Assembly 2 Wipe the patient contact area of the sensor with
the cotton swab dampened with the cleaning
1 Wipe the cable assembly with a soft cloth solution. until no visible contaminants remain.
dampened with the cleaning solution until no
visible contaminants remain. 3 After cleaning, wipe off the cleaning solution
with a fresh cloth or towel dampened with tap
2 After cleaning, wipe off the cleaning solution water until no visible cleaning agent remains.
water until no visible cleaning agent remains. 4 Wipe off residual moisture with a dry cloth.
3 Wipe off residual moisture with a dry cloth. 5 Leave the sensor to air dry.
4 Leave the cable assembly to air dry.

Cleaning the IBP/C.O. cables/BIS patient
interface cable
Cleaning the Blood Pressure Cuff
1 Wipe the cables with a soft cloth dampened with
Cleaning the Cuff: the cleaning solution until no visible
1 Take out the air bladder before cleaning. contaminants remain.
2 Hand wash the cuff with the cleaning solution; 2 After cleaning, wipe off the cleaning solution
clean the air bladder with a soft cloth dampened with a fresh cloth or towel dampened with tap
with the cleaning solution until no visible water until no visible cleaning agent remains.
contaminants remain. 3 Wipe off residual moisture with a dry cloth.
4 Leave the cables to air dry.

Care and cleaning
Cleaning the TEMP Sensor 3 Wipe off residual moisture with a dry cloth.
1 Wipe the patient contact area with a soft cloth 4 Leave the sensor/probe to air dry.
dampened with the cleaning solution until no
visible contaminants remain.
2 After cleaning, wipe off the cleaning solution
water until no visible cleaning agent remains.
Disinfection
For devices or accessories that have been in WARNING

contact mucosal surface, High Level disinfection
The monitor and reusable accessories shall
must occur, for all other accessories, low level
be disinfected to avoid patient cross infection.
disinfection is appropriate. Clean the monitor and
reusable accessories before they are disinfected.
The validated disinfectants for cleaning the monitor
and reusable accessories are:
Disinfecting the Monitor
 Ethanol (75%)
WARNING
 Isopropanol (70%) Before disinfecting the monitor, make sure
 Cidex OPA (High level disinfection of that the monitor is switched off and
intracavitary temperature probe only) disconnected from the power line.
If Ethanol or Isopropanol is used for both cleaning To disinfect the monitor, follow these steps:
and disinfecting, then a new cloth is required to be
used for the disinfection step. 1 Switch off the monitor and disconnect it from the
power line.
CAUTION
2 Wipe the display screen using a soft, clean cloth
Do not use any disinfectant containing additional dampened with the disinfectant solution.
active ingredients other than those listed, such as
disinfectant didecyl dimethyl ammonium bromide 3 Wipe the exterior surface of the equipment
which contains quanternary ammonium salt. using a soft cloth dampened with the
disinfectant solution.
CAUTION 4 Wipe off the disinfectant solution with a dry cloth
Although the monitor is chemically resistant to after disinfection if necessary.
most common hospital cleaners, disinfectants
5 Dry the monitor for at least 30 minutes in a
and non-caustic detergents, unvalidated cleaners
ventilated and cool place.
or disinfectants are not recommended and may
stain the monitor, such as disinfectant didecyl
dimethyl ammonium bromide which contains
quanternary ammonium salt.

Care and cleaning
Disinfecting the Reusable Accessories Disinfecting the IBP/C.O. cables/BIS patient

interface cable
Disinfecting the ECG Cable Assembly 1 Wipe the cables with a soft cloth dampened with
the disinfectant solution.
1 Wipe the cable assembly with a soft cloth
dampened with the disinfectant solution. 2 Wipe off the disinfectant solution with a dry cloth
after disinfection.
2 Wipe off the disinfectant solution with a dry cloth
after disinfection. 3 Leave the cables to air dry for at least 30
minutes.
3 Leave the cable assembly to air dry for at least
30 minutes.
Disinfecting the TEMP sensor
Disinfecting the Blood Pressure Cuff The intracavitary TEMP sensors should be
reprocessed by high-level disinfection before and
Disinfecting the Cuff: after use on each new patient. Cidex OPA is the
1 Take out the air bladder before disinfection. validated agent for high level disinfection. Refer to
the instructions of the disinfectant for the methods
2 Wipe the cuff and the air bladder with a soft of disinfection. High level disinfection has been
cloth dampened with the disinfectant solution. validated with a 12 minute soak. Rinse and dry
3 Leave the cuff and air bladder to air dry for at according to the labeled instructions of Cidex OPA.
least 30 minutes. Do not dampen the sensor connector.
Replacing the Air Bladder: For the skin TEMP sensors, disinfect them as
follows using ethanol or isopropanol only:
After disinfection, replace the air bladder into the
cuff. Refer to Section Cleaning the blood pressure 1 Wipe the patient contact area with a soft cloth
cuff for more information. dampened with the disinfectant solution
(ethanol or isopropanol).
NOTE
Prolonged use of disinfectant may cause 2 Wipe off the disinfectant solution with a dry cloth
discoloration of the cuff. after disinfection.
3 Leave the sensor to air dry.
Disinfecting the SpO2 Sensor
1 Wipe the surfaces of the sensor and cable using NOTE
a soft cloth dampened with the disinfection Do not use phenol disinfectants because vinyl
solution. absorbs them. Do not use strong aromatic,
chlorinated, ketone, ether or ester solvents. Do not
2 Wipe the patient contact area of the sensor with
immerse the cables for any prolonged period in
the cotton swab dampened with the disinfection
alcohol, mild organic solvents, or highly alkaline
solution.
solutions. Never boil or autoclave the cable. Vinyl
3 Wipe off the disinfection solution with a dry cloth withstands temperatures up to 100 °C but begins
after disinfection. to soften at around 90 °C. Handle gently when hot
and wipe away from the tip toward the cable.
4 Leave the sensor to air dry for at least 30
minutes.

Care and cleaning
Cleaning and Disinfecting Other Accessories
For cleaning and disinfecting other accessories,

refer to the instructions delivered with the
accessories. If the accessories are not
accompanied by instructions, refer to this manual
for the methods of cleaning and disinfecting the
monitor.

Maintenance
Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Replacing fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Maintenance
Overview
WARNING WARNING
Failure on the part of the responsible If the user finds any problems with the
institution to implement a satisfactory equipment, contact service personnel or
maintenance schedule may cause undue authorized supplier.
equipment failure and possible health
hazards. WARNING
The maintenance operations such as software
WARNING upgrade of the device shall only be conducted
If the monitor is mechanically damaged, or if it by Dräger-qualified service professionals.
is not working properly, do not use it. Contact
technical personnel. WARNING
Any serious incident that has occurred in
relation to the device should be reported to
the manufacturer and the competent authority
of the Member State in which the user and/or
patient is established.
Inspection
The overall check of the monitor, including the  If grounding resistance and leakage function
safety check, should be performed by trained properly.
service personnel every 24 months, and following
If any damage or abnormality is found, do not use
repair.
the monitor and contact customer support.
The following items should be checked:
Maintenance shall be carried out at least once
 If the environmental condition and power supply every two years, or as specified by local
meet requirements. regulations. The following tasks are for Dräger-
qualified service professionals only. Contact an
 If the power supply cord is damaged and the
Dräger-qualified service provider if the monitor
insulation is not cut.
needs a safety or performance test. Clean and
 If the device and accessories are damaged. disinfect equipment to decontaminate it before
testing or maintaining it.
 Specified accessories.
 If the alarm system works properly.
 If the recorder works properly and there is
sufficient paper.
 Battery performance
 If all monitoring functions are in good condition.

Maintenance
Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency

Safety checks. Selected tests on At least once every two years, or as needed, after any repairs where
the basis of IEC60601-1 the power supply is removed or replaced, or if the monitor has been
dropped.
Check all monitoring functions At least once every two years, or as needed.
and measuring functions
Repair
Dräger recommends that all repairs are carried out

by DrägerService and that only authentic Dräger
repair parts are used.
Replacing fuse
Only applicable to Vista 120.

To replace the blown fuse:
1 Switch off the monitor and unplug the power
cable.
2 Carefully place the monitor upside down on a
flat surface covered with cloth or other
protecting pad.
3 Pull out the fuse box from the groove and the
user will see the fuse.
4 1.Remove the old fuse. Take out a new fuse

with the following specifications:
ø 5 mm x 20 mm: Model: T3.15AH250VP.
5 Place the new fuse in the fuse socket and push
the box back into position.


Disposal
Disposal
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Disposal
Overview
CAUTION
The device and its components must be
disinfected and cleaned before disposal!
For countries subject to EU Directive

2002/96/EC:
This device is subject to EU directive 2002/96/EC
(WEEE). In order to comply with its registration
according to this directive, it may not be disposed
of at municipal collection points for waste electrical
and electronic equipment. Dräger has authorized a
company to collect and dispose of this device. To
initiate take-back or for further information, visit us
on the Internet at www.draeger.com and navigate
to the DrägerService area where the user will find a
link to “WEEE”. If the user has no access to our
website, contact the local Dräger organization.

Accessories
Accessories
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
ECG accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
SpO2 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
NIBP accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Temp accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
IBP accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
CO2 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
C.O. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
BIS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Anesthesia gas accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Device accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Accessories
Overview
Accessories can be ordered from the local Dräger WARNING

representative.
IBP and C.O. sterilized accessories are
WARNING already sterilized, refer to the package
labeling for detailed method. Do not use a
Never reuse disposable transducers, sensors
sterilized accessory if its packaging is
or other accessories that are intended for
damaged.
single-use or single patient use only. Reuse
may compromise device functionality and
system performance and cause a potential NOTE
hazard. Transducers and sensors have a limited shelf life.
Refer to the package labeling.
WARNING
The following cables may not all be available in all
Only use accessories that are approved by countries. Check availability with the local Dräger
Dräger. Using accessories that are not supplier.
approved by Dräger may compromise device
functionality and system performance and
cause a potential hazard.
ECG accessories
The following table lists the optional configuration

for the monitor:
Part Number Accessory

2606495 ECG trunk cable, 3-lead, IEC/AHA
2606496 ECG trunk cable, 5-lead, IEC/AHA
2606492 ECG trunk cable, 3-lead, for Neonates, IEC & AHA*
2606493 ECG limb wires, 3-lead, Grabber, IEC
2606494 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, Grabber, IEC
2606497 ECG limb wires, 3-lead, Grabber, AHA
2606498 ECG limb wires, 5-lead, Grabber, AHA
2612000 ECG leadwire, 3-lead single-pin, IEC, 1m
2612001 ECG leadwire, 3-lead single-pin, AHA, 1m
2612002 ECG leadwire, 5-lead single-pin, IEC, 1.5m
2612003 ECG leadwire, 5-lead single-pin, AHA, 1.5m

Accessories

2612020 ECG defib trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 1.5m
2612021 ECG defib trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 2.5m
2612026 ECG defib trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 1.5m
2612027 ECG defib trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 2.5m
2612024 ECG ESU trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 1.5m
2612025 ECG ESU trunk cable, 3/5-lead single-pin, 2.5m
2612028 ECG ESU trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 1.5m
2612029 ECG ESU trunk cable, Neonate, single-pin, 2.5m
MS14555 MonoLead 3, EURO, 2m *
MS14556 MonoLead 3, AHA/US, 2m *
MS28561 ECG cable MonoLead 3, EURO, 4.1m *
MS28557 ECG cable MonoLead 3 AHA/US 4.1m *
MS14559 MonoLead 5, EURO, 2.5m *
MS14560 MonoLead 5, AHA/US, 2.5m *
MS28559 ECG cable MonoLead 5, EURO, 5.3m *
MS28558 ECG cable MonoLead 5 AHA/US 5.3m *
MP03401 ECG 3-Lead single-pin EURO, 1m *
MP03402 ECG 3-Lead single-pin AHA, 1m *
MP03403 ECG 5-Lead single-p EURO, 1.5m *
MP03404 ECG 5-Lead single-p AHA, 1.5m *
MP00875 Single Patient Use ECG 3-Lead IEC1 *
MP00877 Single_Patient_Use_ECG_3_Lead_IEC2 *
MS25951 ECG Neo Adapter cable, 2m *
5195024 Neonatal electrodes with attached lead wire, 100 packages of 3 electrodes
2606247 Adhesive ECG Electrodes, Adult, Disposable, 300 pcs
2606248 Adhesive ECG Electrodes, Children/Neonatal, Disposable, 500 pcs
2606249 Adhesive ECG Electrodes, Adult, Disposable, 1000 pcs
* Note: For use with the following part numbers: 2612020, 2612021, 2612024, 2612025.

Accessories
SpO2 accessories

2606483 SpO2 Finger Sensor, adult, 2.5 m, reusable
2606484 SpO2 Finger Sensor, adult, 1 m, reusable
2606485 SpO2 Silicone Soft-tip Sensor, adult, 1 m, reusable
2606486 SpO2 Silicone Soft-tip Sensor, pediatric, 1 m, reusable
2606487 SpO2 Extension cable, 2m, reusable
2606208 SpO2 Sensor, adult, 0.5 m, disposable, 25 pieces
2606209 SpO2 Sensor, pediatric, 0.5 m, disposable, 25 pieces
2606210 SpO2 Sensor, Infant, 0.5 m, disposable, 25 pieces
2606211 SpO2 Sensor, Neonate, 0.5 m, disposable, 25 pieces
7262764 Nellcor Reusable Adult SpO2 Sensor (DS-100A OxiMax)
MS20979 Nellcor SpO2 Extension cable (Compatible with Nellcor OXI-Max SpO2 module
and Nellcor sensor) 3 meter
MP00748 Nellcor SpO2 Extension cable (Compatible with Nellcor OXI-Max SpO2 module
and Nellcor sensor) 1.2 meter
MX01004 SpO2 Multipurpose sensor Nellcor Dura-Y reusable
MX01005 Earclip for Nellcor Dura-Y
MX50070 SpO2- Sensor Nellcor Oximax Max-Fast
NIBP accessories

2606151 NIBP Cuff, E5, Infant, 10 cm - 15 cm, reusable
2606152 NIBP Cuff, E6, Small child, 13 cm - 17 cm, reusable
2606153 NIBP Cuff, E7, Child, 16 cm - 21.5 cm, reusable
2606154 NIBP Cuff, E8, Small adult, 20.5 cm - 28 cm, reusable
2606155 NIBP Cuff, E9,Adult, 27 cm - 35 cm, reusable

Accessories

2606156 NIBP Cuff, E10,Larger Adult, 34 cm - 43 cm, reusable
2607034 NIBP Cuff, Neonatal #1, 3 cm – 6 cm, disposable
2601195 NIBP Tube, 3m
Temp accessories
2601197 Temperature Probe Skin, adult, 3m, reusable

2601198 Temperature Probe, rectal/oral, adult, 3m, reusable
2601199 Temperature probe, rectal/oral, neonatal/infant, 3m, reusable
2601200 Temperature probe, skin, neonatal/infant, 3m, reusable
MP00943 TEMP adapter, jack connector
7014616 Protective cover for general-purpose temp probe, contains latex
MP00991 General-purpose temp probe, single-pat. use, adult, 7-pin connector, 1.6 m
MP00992 General-purpose temp probe, single-pat. use, adult, 7-pin connector, 3 m
MP00993 General-purpose temp probe, single-pat. use, child, 7-pin connector, 1.6 m
MP00994 General-purpose temp probe, single-pat. use, child, 7-pin connector, 3 m
MP00995 Skin temp probe, single-pat. use, adult, 7-pin connector, 1.6 m
MP00996 Skin temp probe, single-pat. use, adult, 7-pin connector, 3 m
MP00997 Skin temp probe, single-pat. use, child/neonatal, 7-pin connector, 1.6 m
MP00998 Skin temp probe, single-pat. use, child/neonatal, 7-pin connector, 3 m

Accessories
IBP accessories

2606488 IBP cable Becton Dickinson
2606489 IBP cable Edwards
2606490 IBP cable Abbot, Medex, Hospira
2606491 IBP cable Utah
2607558 IBP cable 7-Pin
2607559 IBP cable 10-Pin
2606225 Disposable pressure transducer kit, BD
CO2 accessories

CO2 Respironics Mainstream
2606226 etCO2 Module with disp. Adult airway adapter
2606227 CO2 Airway Adapter, Adult, disposable, 10 pieces
2606228 CO2 Airway Adapter, Neonatal (infant/pediatric), 10 pcs.
CO2 Sidestream Respironics LoFlow
2605125 Respironics etCO2 module/(Side-stream)
2605126 LoFloTM Module Mounting Bracket
2605127 Disposable CO2 Nasal Cannula - Adult
2605128 Adult/Pediatric Airway adapter kit with dehumidification tubing
2605129 Disposable Sampling Line Kit with Dehumidification Tubing
2605130 Adult Nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula(Respironics 3469ADU-00)
2605081 Pediatric Nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
2605082 Infant Nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
2605083 Adult Nasal/Oral CO2 sampling cannula
2605084 Pediatric Nasal/Oral CO2 sampling cannula

Accessories

2605085 Adult Nasal/Oral CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
2605086 Adult/Pediatric Airway adapter kit
2605087 Disposable CO2 Nasal Cannula - Pediatric
2605088 Disposable CO2 Nasal Cannula - Infant
2605089 Pediatric/Infant Airway adapter kit with dehumidification tubing
CO2 Dräger G2 Sidestream
2605115 1 x Dräger G2 CO2 Module Kit
1 x Dräger G2 CO2 Module Mounting Bracket
2607550 Disposable CO2 Sampling line with male luer lock
2607551 Adult Nasal CO2 sampling cannula
2607552 Child Nasal CO2 sampling cannula
2607553 Infant Nasal CO2 sampling cannula
2607554 Adult Nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
2607555 Child Nasal CO2 with O2 delivery sampling cannula
2605124 Water Trap
CO2 Dräger MCable Mainstream
6871950 Dräger MCable Mainstream CO2
2607032 CO2 interface cable for Dräger CO2
MP01062 CO2 cuvette, adult, disp, 10 pcs
MP01063 CO2 cuvette, pedi., disp, 10 pcs
6870279 CO2 cuvette, adult, reusable
6870280 CO2 cuvette, pediatric, reusable
8416352 Parking Holder for Dräger Mcable CO2 Sensor
C.O. Accessories
Part Number Accessories

2601190 In-line Injection temperature probe (BD 684056-SP4042)
2601191 In-line Injection temperature probe housing (BD 680006-SP5045)

Accessories

2601192 Control Syringe (Medex MX387)
2601201 Cardiac output cable
NOTE
The Thermodilution Catheter is required when
measuring C.O.. Swan-Ganz catheter (Type
131HF7 and 741HF7), manufactured by Edwards
Lifesciences Corporation, has been validated to be
compatible with the monitor. Refer to Edwards for
more details.
BIS Accessories

2607560 BISx adapter cable Vista120
2607561 BISx Pod Vista120
MP00005 BIS 4 Electrode Sensor (box of 25)
MP00003 BIS Pediatric Sensor (box of 25)
Anesthesia gas accessories

8601473 SCIO direct connect cable to Vista 120
Device accessories

2606229 Vista 120 Rechargeable Lithium-Ion Battery, 5000 mAh

Accessories
2606231 Vista 120 Printing paper, 4 rolls

2606232 Vista 120 Ground Cable
2607062 Vista 120 Mounting adaptor 2
2601146 Vista 120 New mounting adaptor
2601147 Vista 120 Mounting arm
2601148 Vista 120 Mounting Arm, with basket
2601149 Vista 120 Rolling stand
2607115 RS232 cable for Savina
2603244 RS232 cable for Zeus/IE
2603245 RS232 cable for VN500/V300/V500/A500/Atlan
NOTE
The part description may vary depending on
context, but the part number is constant.


Technical data
Technical data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Defibrillator Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Nurse Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
USB Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Device specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 VGA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
SCIO Interface/ Medibus/X Interface. . . . . . . . 296
Function configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Data management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Data review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wi-Fi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
3-, 5-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
RESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
SpO2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
PR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
IBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
CO2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
BIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Technical data
Overview
NOTE
The performance of the equipment with ☆ mark is
determined to be essential performance.
Classification
Protection class Class I equipment and internal powered equipment

Degree of protection against electric CF: ECG (RESP), TEMP, IBP, C.O.
shock
BF: SpO2, NIBP, CO2, AG, BIS
Defibrillation protection Yes
Liquid ingress protection IPX1
Disinfection/sterilization method Refer to chapter “Care and Cleaning” for details.
Mode of operation Continuous
Compliant with Standards IEC 60601-1: 2005+A1 :2012; IEC 60601-1-2: 2014;
EN 60601-1: 2006+A1 :2013; EN 60601-1-2: 2015;
IEC 60601-2-49: 2011
Device specifications
Model Size (W × H × D) Weight (standard configuration,

without battery and accessories)
Vista 120 (408±3) mm × (316±2) mm × (157±2) mm < 7 kg
Vista 120S (344±3) mm × (266±2) mm × (145±2) mm < 5 kg

Technical data
Function configuration
Product Model Configuration
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2 (Dräger), NIBP, AG

A
 Wired network, Wi-Fi
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2 (Nellcor), NIBP, AG

A+
 Wired network, Wi-Fi, recorder
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2(Dräger), NIBP, AG, IBP, C.O.,

Vista 120 CO2(Dräger G2), CO2(Respironics C5, LoFlo), CO2 (Dräger
C MCable), BISx
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2(Nellcor), NIBP, AG, IBP, C.O.,

CO2(Dräger G2), CO2(Respironics C5, LoFlo), CO2 (Dräger
C+ MCable), BISx
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2 (Dräger), NIBP, AG

A
 Wired network
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2(Nellcor), NIBP, AG

A+
Vista 120S  ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2 (Dräger), NIBP, AG, IBP, C.O., CO2
C (Dräger G2), CO2(Respironics C5, LoFlo), CO2 (Dräger MCable)
 ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2(Nellcor), NIBP, AG, IBP, C.O., CO2

C+ (Dräger G2), CO2 (Respironics C5, LoFlo), CO2 (Dräger MCable)

Technical data
Ambient conditions
WARNING
The monitor may not meet the performance
specifications given here if stored or used
outside the specified temperature, humidity
and altitude ranges.
Temperature
Operating +0 °C to +40 °C (+32 °F to +104 °F)
Transport and storage -20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to +131 °F)
Relative humidity
Operating 15%RH to 95%RH (non-condensing)
Transport and storage 15%RH to 95%RH (non-condensing)
Ambient pressure
Operating 86 kPa to 106 kPa
Transport and storage 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Leakage current
Applied part Normal condition Single fault condition

Earth leakage current < 0.5 mA < 1 mA
Enclosure leakage current < 0.1 mA < 0.5 mA
Patient leakage current CF AC: < 0.01 mA AC: < 0.05 mA

DC: < 0.01 mA DC: < 0.05 mA
BF AC: < 0.1 mA AC: < 0.5 mA
DC: < 0.01 mA DC: < 0.05 mA
Patient leakage current (Mains on CF < 0.05 mA
applied parts)
BF < 5 mA

Technical data
Patient auxiliary current CF AC: <0.01 mA AC: <0.05 mA

DC: <0.01 mA DC: <0.05 mA
BF AC: <0.1 mA AC: <0.5 mA
DC: <0.01 mA DC: <0.05 mA
Power supply
Power supply 100 V to 240 V~, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Current =1.4 A-0.7 A
FUSE T 3.15 AH, 250 VP
Battery (optional)
Quantity 1
Capacity 5000 mAh
Battery life Vista 120 ≥ 300 min (At 25±2 °C, with (a) new fully charged
battery/batteries, continuous SpO2 measurement
and NIBP automatic measurement mode at interval
of 15 minutes, Dräger ECG/TEMP module
connected, recording at interval of 10 minutes,
brightness set to “1”)
Vista 120S ≥ 350 min (At 25±2 °C, with (a) new fully charged
battery/batteries, continuous SpO2 measurement
and NIBP automatic measurement mode at interval
of 15 minutes, Dräger ECG/TEMP module
connected, recording at interval of 10 minutes,
brightness set to “1”)
Battery charge time Vista 120 ≤ 390 min, 100% charge
≤ 351 min, 90% charge (Monitor is on or in standby
mode.)
Vista 120S ≤ 390 min, 100% charge
≤ 351 min, 90% charge (Monitor is off.)

Technical data
Display
Product Display Messages

Vista 120 Display screen: 15” color TFT A maximum of 13 waveforms
Resolution: 1024 × 768 One power LED
Two alarm LEDs
One charge LED
Vista 120S Display screen: 12.1” color TFT A maximum of 11 waveforms
Resolution: 800 × 600 One power LED
Two alarm LEDs
One charge LED
Recorder
Record width 48 mm
Paper speed 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Trace Up to 3
Recording types Continual real-time recording
8-second/20-second real-time recording
Trend graph recording
Trend table recording
NIBP review recording
Arrhythmia review recording
Alarm review recording
C.O. measurement recording
Frozen waveform recording
Drug calculation titration recording
Hemodynamic Calculation result recording
Oxygenation Calculation result recording
Ventilation Calculation result recording
Renal Function Calculation result recording

Technical data
Data management
Data review
Trend Data Short: 3 hours, resolution: 1 s

Long: 150 hours, resolution: 1 min
Alarm Events Up to 200 sets
NIBP Measurement Data 1200 sets
Arrhythmia Events Up to 200 sets
Refer to Chapter Review for more information

about data review.
Data storage
A single piece of patient data maximally contains

the following information:
MRN, name, date of birth, date of admission, gender, type, height,

Patient information
weight, blood type, pace, doctor, bed No., department
Trend graph and trend table 240 hours, resolution: 1 min
NIBP measurement review 1200 sets
Alarm review 200 sets
Arrhythmia event 200 sets
Vista 120S: 48 hours
Vista 120: 96 hours
Full disclosure waveforms
The specific storage time depends on the waveforms stored and the
number of stored waveforms.
The following storage capacity for 1G extended

space is for reference:
Continuous parameter data 720 hours, resolution: 1 min

NIBP data At least 68000 sets
Physiological alarm event At least 4500 sets
Arrhythmia event At least 4500 sets
Full disclosure waveforms 30 hours

Technical data
Refer to Section Storing data in the storage device

for more information about storing data in the
storage medium.
Wi-Fi
IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM band
Modulation OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, and 64-QAM

802.11b with CCK and DSSS
Typical Transmit Power (±2 dBm) 17 dBm for 802.11b DSSS

17 dBm for 802.11b CCK
15 dBm for 802.11g/n OFDM
ECG
3-, 5-lead monitoring
Complies with IEC 60601-2-27: 2011.
Lead Mode 3-Lead: I, II, III

5-Lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
Lead Naming Style AHA, IEC
☆ Display Sensitivity 1.25 mm/mV (×0.125), 2.5 mm/mV (×0.25),

(Gain Selection) 5 mm/mV (×0.5), 10 mm/mV (×1), 20 mm/mV (×2),
40 mm/mV (×4), AUTO gain
☆ Sweep 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Bandwidth (-3dB) Diagnosis: 0.05 Hz to 150 Hz

Monitor: 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz
Surgery: 1 Hz to 20 Hz

Technical data
☆ CMRR (Common Mode Diagnosis: >95 dB

Rejection Ratio) Monitor: >105 dB
Surgery: >105 dB
Notch In diagnosis, monitor and surgery modes: 50 Hz/60 Hz (Notch

filter can be turned on or off manually)
☆ Differential Input Impedance >5 MΩ
☆ Input Signal Range ±10 mV PP
☆ Accuracy of Signal An error of ≤ ±20 % of the nominal value of the output or

Reproduction ±100 μV, whichever is greater.
The total error and frequency response comply with
IEC 60601-2-27: 2011, Sect. 201.12.1.101.1.
☆ Electrode Offset Potential ±800 mV

Tolerance
Auxiliary Current (Leads off Active electrode: <100 nA

detection) Reference electrode: <900 nA
☆ Recovery Time After < 5 s (measured without electrodes as IEC60601-2-27:2011, Sect.

Defibrillation 201.8.5.5.1 requires.)
Leakage Current of Patient < 10 μA
Scale Signal 1 mV PP, accuracy is ±5%
☆ System Noise < 30 μVPP
☆ Multichannel Crosstalk ≤ 5% of the input signal

Complied with IEC 60601-2-27: 2011, Sect. 201.12.1.101.5.
☆ Frequency and Impulse Frequency response:

Response Input a 5 Hz, 1 mV sine wave signal, and the output signal
amplitude remains within the range of 71 % to 110 % at 0.67 Hz
and 40 Hz.
Input a 1 Hz, 1.5 mV 200 ms triangular wave input signal, and the
output shall be within 11.25 mm~15 mm.
Impulse response:
Displacement value: ≤ 0.1 mV
Slope: ≤ 0.3 mV/s following the end of the pulse.
Sampling Frequency 1000 Hz
Sampling Channel Switch Time < 80 μS

Technical data
A/D Precision 24 Bits (Minimum resolution: 0.077uV/LSB)
☆ ESU Protection Cut mode: 300 W

Coagulation mode: 100 W
Restore time: ≤10 s
Electrosurgical Interference Test according to ANSI/AAMI EC13:2002, Sect. 5.2.9.14.

Suppression Complied with ANSI/AAMI EC13:2002, Sect. 4.2.9.14.
Minimum Input Slew Rate > 2.5 V/s

(Lead II)
☆ Baseline Reset Time <3s
Pace Pulse
☆ Pulse Indicator Pulse is marked if the requirements of IEC 60601-2-27: 2011,

Sect. 201.12.1.101.12 are met:
Amplitude: ±2 mV to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 ms to2.0 ms
Ascending time: 10 μs to 100 μs
☆ Pulse Rejection Pulse is rejected if the requirements of IEC 60601-2-27: 2011,

Sect. 201.12.1.101.13 are met:
Amplitude: ±2 mV to ±700 mV
Width: 0.1 ms to 2.0 ms
Ascending time: 10 μs to 100 μs
Pace Pulse Detecting Lead: one among I, II, III, AVR, AVL, AVF, V
Heart Rate
HR Calculation
☆ Range ADU: 15 bpm to 300 bpm

PED/NEO: 15 bpm to 350 bpm
☆ Accuracy ±1% or 1 bpm, whichever is greater
Resolution 1 bpm
Sensitivity ≥ 300 μVPP

Technical data
☆ QRS Detection Range The detection range has exceeded the requirement described in
the standard:
Width: 70 ms~120 ms for adult, 40 ms~120 ms for
Pediatric/neonate.
Amplitude: 0.5 mv~5 mv
In adult mode, these two signals are not responded:
1 when QRS amplitude of 0.15 mV or less is applied;
2 when QRS duration of 10 ms and QRS amplitude of 1 mV or
less is applied.
PVC
Range ADU: (0 to 300) PVCs/ min

PED/NEO: (0 to 350) PVCs/ min
Resolution 1 PVCs/min
ST value
Range -2.0 mV to +2.0 mV
Accuracy -0.8 mV to +0.8 mV: ±0.02 mV or 10%, whichever is greater.

Beyond this range: not specified.
Resolution 0.01 mV
HR Averaging Method
Method 1 Heart rate is computed by excluding the minimum and maximum

values from the 12 most recent RR intervals and averaging the
residual 10 RR intervals.
Method 2 If each of three consecutive RR intervals is greater than 1200 ms,

then the four most recent RR intervals are averaged to compute
the HR.
Range of Sinus and SV Rhythm
Tachy Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≤ 0.5 s.

complex ≤ 0.375 s.
Normal Adult: 0.5 s < RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex < 1.5 s.
Pediatric/neonatal: 0.375 s < RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS
complex < 1 s.

Technical data
Brady Adult: RR interval for 5 consecutive QRS complex ≥ 1.5 s.

complex ≥ 1 s.
Range of Ventricular Rhythm
Ventricular Tachycardia The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats is less than 600 ms
Ventricular Rhythm The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats ranges from 600 ms to
1000 ms
Ventricular Bradycardia The interval of 5 consecutive ventricular beats is more than 1000 ms
Maximum Start-up Alarm Time for Tachycardia
Ventricular Tachycardia Gain 0.5: 10 s

1 mV 206 bpm Gain 1.0: 10 s
Gain 2.0: 10 s
Ventricular Tachycardia Gain 0.5: 10 s

2 mV 195 bpm Gain 1.0: 10 s
Gain 2.0: 10 s
Response Time of Heart Rate HR range: 80 bpm to 120 bpm

Meter to Change in HR Range : Within 11 s
HR range: 80 bpm to 40 bpm
Range : Within 11 s
☆ Tall T-wave Rejection Complied with IEC 60601-2-27: 2011, Sect. 201.12.1.101.17
minimum recommended 1.2 mV T-Wave amplitude
Accuracy of Heart Rate Meter Complied with IEC 60601-2-27: 2011, Sect. 201.7.9.2.9.101 b) 4),
and Response to Irregular the HR value after 20 s of stabilization is displayed as follows:
Rhythm Ventricular bigeminy: 80 bpm±1 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy: 60 bpm±1 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy: 120 bpm±1 bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 91 bpm±1 bpm
Time to Alarm for Heart Rate Asystole alarm: ≤ 10 s

alarm conditions HR low alarm: ≤ 10 s
HR high alarm: ≤ 10 s

Technical data
Arrhythmia analyses Asystole V-Fib/V-Tach Couplet
Run PVCs PVC Bigeminy PVC Trigeminy
Vent Rhythm R on T PVC
Tachy Brady MISSED BEATS
IRR Brady Pacer not Capture
Pacer not Pacing
RESP
Method Impedance between RA-LL, RA-LA

Measurement lead Options are lead I and II. The default is lead II.
Calculation Type Manual, Automatic
Baseline Impedance Range 200 Ω to 2500 Ω(with ECG cables of 1 KΩ resistance)
Measuring Sensitivity Within the baseline impedance range: 0.3 Ω
Waveform Bandwidth 0.2 Hz to 2.5 Hz (-3 dB)
Respiration Excitation Sinusoid, 45.6 kHz(±10%), < 350 μA
Waveform
☆ RR Measuring Range
☆ Adult 0 rpm to120 rpm
☆ Neo/Ped 0 rpm to150 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
☆ Accuracy
☆ Adult 6 rpm to 120 rpm: ±2 rpm
0 rpm to 5 rpm: not specified
☆ Neo/Ped 6 rpm to 150 rpm: ±2 rpm
0 rpm to 5 rpm: not specified
☆ Gain Selection ×0.25, ×0.5, ×1, ×2, ×3, ×4, ×5
☆ Sweep 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
☆ Apnea Alarm Time Setup 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s; default value is 20 s.

Technical data
NIBP
Complies with IEC 80601-2-30: 2009+A1: 2013.
Method Oscillometric
Mode Manual, Auto, Continuous
Measuring interval in AUTO 1/2/2.5/3/4/5/10/15/30/60/90/120/180/240/360/480

mode (unit: minutes)
Continuous 5 min, interval is 5 s
Measuring type SYS, DIA, MAP
☆ Alarm type SYS, DIA, MAP
☆ Measuring range
☆ Adult mode SYS: 40 to 270 mmHg

DIA: 10 to 215 mmHg
MAP: 20 to 235 mmHg
☆ Pediatric mode SYS: 40 to 230 mmHg

DIA: 10 to 180 mmHg
MAP: 20 to 195 mmHg
☆ Neonatal mode SYS: 40 to 135 mmHg

DIA: 10 to 100 mmHg
MAP: 20 to 110 mmHg
☆ Cuff pressure 0 to 300 mmHg

measuring range
Pressure resolution 1 mmHg
☆ Maximum mean error ±5mmHg
☆ Maximum standard 8 mmHg

deviation
Maximum measuring period
Adult/Pediatric 120 s
Neonate 90 s
Typical measuring period 20 to 35 s (depend on HR/motion disturbance)

Technical data
Dual independent channel overpressure protection
Adult 297 ±3 mmHg
Pediatric 245 ±3 mmHg
Neonatal 147 ±3 mmHg
Pre-inflation pressure
Adult Default: 160 mmHg

Range: 80/100/120/140/150/160/180/200/220/240 mmHg
Pediatric Default: 140 mmHg

Range: 80/100/120/140/150/160/180/200 mmHg
Neonatal Default: 100 mmHg

Range: 60/70/80/100/120 mmHg
Venipuncture pressure
Adult Default: 60 mmHg

Options: 20 mmHg, 30 mmHg, 40 mmHg, 50 mmHg, 60 mmHg,
70 mmHg, 80 mmHg, 90 mmHg, 100 mmHg, 110 mmHg,
120 mmHg
Pediatric Default: 40 mmHg

Options: 20 mmHg, 30 mmHg, 40 mmHg, 50 mmHg, 60 mmHg,
70 mmHg, 80 mmHg
Neonatal Default: 30 mmHg

Options: 20 mmHg, 30 mmHg, 40 mmHg, 50 mmHg
SpO2
Complies with ISO 80601-2-61: 2011.
Measuring Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%
☆ Data Update Period 1s
☆ Accuracy

Technical data
☆ Adult /Pediatric ±2% (70% to 100% SpO2)
Undefined (0% to 69% SpO2)
☆ Neonate ±3% (70% to 100% SpO2)
Undefined (0% to 69% SpO2)
Sensor
Red Light (660±3) nm
Infrared Light (905±10) nm
Emitted Light Energy < 15 mW
PI (Perfusion Index)
Measuring Range 0-10, invalid PI value is 0.
Resolution 1
Nellcor Module
Measuring Range 1% to 100%
☆ Adjustable Range of Alarm 20% to 100%

Limits
Resolution 1%
☆ Data update period 1s
DS-100A, OXI-A/N(Adult): ± 3%
OXI-A/N(Neonate): ± 4%
☆ Accuracy D-YS (Infant to Adult): ± 3%
(70% to 100% SpO2) D-YS (Neonate): ± 4%
D-YS with D-YSE Ear Clip: ± 3.5%
MAX-FAST: ± 2%
Sensor Wave length: approximately 660 and 900nm
Emitted light energy: <15mW
NOTE
Information about the wave length range can be
especially useful to clinicians (for instance, when
photodynamic therapy is performed).

Technical data
PR
Measuring range Accuracy Resolution
Dräger 25 bpm to 300 bpm ±2 bpm 1 bpm

☆ PR (SpO2)
Nellcor 20 bpm to 300 bpm ± 3 bpm (20 bpm to 250 bpm) 1 bpm
±3 bpm or 3.5%, whichever is

☆ PR (NIBP) Dräger 40 bpm to 240 bpm 1 bpm
greater
30 bpm to 300 bpm: ±2 bpm
☆ PR (IBP) Dräger 20 bpm to 300 bpm or ±2%,whichever is greater; 1 bpm
20 bpm to 29 bpm: undefined
TEMP
Technique Thermal resistance
Position Skin, oral, rectum
Channel 2
Sensor Type YSI-10K, YSI-2.252K
Unit °C, °F
Measuring range 0 °C to +50 °C (+32 ºF to +122 ºF)
Resolution +0.1 °C (+0.1 ºF)
☆ Accuracy1 ±0.3 °C (±32.54 ºF)
Accuracy (without sensor) ±0.1 °C (±32.18 ºF)
Refresh time Every 1 to 2 s
Self-test At an interval of 5-10 minutes
Measuring Mode Direct Mode
Transient Response Time ≤ 30 s

Technical data
NOTE NOTE
The accuracy consists of two parts, as following: The claimed response time is valid without probe
covers.
 Accuracy (not including sensor): ± 0.1 °C
(± 32.18 ºF)
 Sensor accuracy: ≤ ±0.2 °C (± 32.36 ºF)
IBP
Technique Direct invasive measurement
Channel 3 channels
IBP Measure ☆ Measuring Art (0 to +300) mmHg

Range
PA/PAWP (-6 to +120) mmHg
CVP/RAP/LAP/ICP (-10 to +40) mmHg
P1/P2 (-50 to +300) mmHg
Resolution 1 mmHg
☆ Accuracy (not including sensor) ± 2% or ±1 mmHg, whichever is greater

ICP:
0 mmHg to 40 mmHg: ± 2% or ±1 mmHg,
whichever is greater;
-10 mmHg to 0 mmHg: undefined
Pressure Unit kPa, mmHg, cmH2O
Pressure sensor
Sensitivity 5 μV/V/mmHg
Impedance Range 300 Ω to 3000 Ω
Filter DC~ 12.5 Hz; DC~ 40 Hz

Zero Range: ±200 mmHg
Pressure Calibration IBP (excluding ICP) 80 mmHg to 300 mmHg

Range
ICP 10 mmHg to 40 mmHg
Volume Displacement 7.4 x 104 mm3 / 100mmHg

Technical data
CO2
G2 Module.
Intended Patient Adult, pediatric, neonatal
Measure
etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Parameters
Unit mmHg, %, kPa
CO2 0 mmHg to 150 mmHg (0% to 20%)

☆ Measuring
Range
AwRR 2 rpm to 150 rpm
etCO2 1 mmHg
Resolution FiCO2 1 mmHg
AwRR 1 rpm
± 2 mmHg, 0 mmHg to 40 mmHg

Typical conditions:
Ambient temperature:
± 5% of reading, 41 mmHg to 70 mmHg (25± 3) °C (77±37.4) °F
Barometric pressure:
(760±10) mmHg
etCO2 ± 8% of reading, 71 mmHg to Balance gas: N2
☆ Accuracy 100 mmHg Sample gas flowrate:
100 ml/min
± 10% of reading, 101 mmHg to
150 mmHg
±12% of reading or ± 4 mmHg,

All conditions
whichever is greater
AwRR ± 1 rpm
Drift of Measure
Meets the requirements of the measure accuracy
Accuracy

Technical data
Sample Gas
70 ml/min or 100 ml/min(default), accuracy: ±15 ml/min
Flowrate
Warm-upTime Display reading within 20 s; reach to the designed accuracy within 2 minutes.
< 400 ms (with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate: 100 ml/min)
Rise Time
<500 ms (with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate: 70 ml/min)
< 4 s (water trap with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate: 100 ml/min)
Response Time
<4 s (with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas flowrate: 70 ml/min)
Work Mode Standby, measure
Range: 0% to 100%
O2 Compensation Resolution: 1%
Default: 16%
Range: 0% to 100%
N2O
Resolution: 1%
Compensation
Default: 0%
Range: 0% to 20%
AG
Resolution: 0.1%
Compensation
Default: 0%
Humidity
Compensation ATPD(default), BTPS
Method
Barometric
Automatic (The change of barometric pressure will not add additional errors to
Pressure
the measurement values.)
Compensation
Zero Calibration Support
Calibration Support (It is recommend to be operated by trained personal.)
☆ Alarm etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
☆ Apnea Alarm 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s, 60s; default value is 20 s.

Delay
Data Sample Rate 100 Hz

Technical data
etCO2 Change1 AwRR ≤ 80 rpm, meet the with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas
accuracy mentioned above; flowrate: 100 ml/min)
AwRR >80 rpm, etCO2
descending 8%
AwRR >120 rpm, etCO2
descending 10%
AwRR ≤ 60 rpm, meet the with 2 m gas sampling tube, sample gas
accuracy mentioned above; flowrate: 70 ml/min)
AwRR > 60 rpm, EtCO2
descends 8%;
descends 10%;
descends 15%;
NOTE
Use a test device equivalent to EN ISO 80601-2-55
fig 201.101 to measure at 1:2 I/E ratio. Respiration
rate accuracy is determined by frequency of
device, and end-tidal gas reading change refers to
the nominal value.
Interfering Gas Effects:
Gas Gas Level (%) Quantitative Effect/Comments

Nitrous oxide 60 The interfering gas will have no effect on the
Halothane 4 measurement value if compensation of O2, N2O,
Enflurane 5 anesthetic agents has been correctly set.
Isoflurane 5
Sevoflurane 5
Desflurane 15

Technical data
Respironics Module (Mainstream and

Sidestream)
Applicable Patient Type Adult, pediatric and neonatal patients
Technique Infra-red Absorption Technique
Measure Parameters etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Unit mmHg, %, Kpa
☆ Measuring Range
☆ etCO2 0 mmHg to 150 mmHg
☆ FiCO2 3 mmHg to 50 mmHg
☆ AwRR 0 rpm to 150 rpm (Mainstream)

2 rpm to 150 rpm (Sidestream)
Resolution etCO2 1 mmHg
FiCO2 1 mmHg
AwRR 1 rpm
☆ etCO2 Accuracy ± 2 mmHg, 0 mmHg to 40 mmHg
± 5 % of reading, 41 mmHg to 70 mmHg
± 12% of reading, RR is over 80 rpm (sidestream)

There will be no degradation in performance due to Respiration
Rate. (mainstream)
☆ AwRR Accuracy ± 1 rpm
Operation Mode Measure, standby
Sample Gas Flowrate (sidestream) (50 ±10) ml/min
O2 Compensation
Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%

Technical data
Default 16%
Barometric Pressure Compensation User setup
Anesthetic Gas Compensation
Range 0% to 20%
Resolution 0.1%
Default 0.0%
Balance Gas Compensation Room air, N2O, helium
Stability
Short Term Drift Drift over 4 hours < 0.8 mmHg
Long Term Drift 120 hours
☆ Alarm Type etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
☆ Apnea Alarm Delay 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s; default value is 20 s.
Data Sample Rate 100 Hz
CO2 Rise Time/Response Time Less than 60 ms

(mainstream)
Sensor Response Time < 3 s, including transport time and rise time
(sidestream)

Technical data
Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects on etCO2

Measurement Values:
Gas or Vapor Gas Level (%) Quantitative Effect/Comments

Nitrous oxide 60 Dry and Saturated Gas
Halothane 4 (0 to 40) mmHg: ± 1 mmHg additional error
Enflurane 5 (41 to 70) mmHg: ± 2.5% additional error
Isoflurane 5 (71 to 100) mmHg: ± 4% additional error
Sevoflurane 5 (101 to 150) mmHg: ± 5% additional error
Xenon 80 *Additional worst case error when compensation for PB, O2,
Helium 50 N2O, anesthetic agents, or helium is correctly selected for
Desflurane 15 the actual fractional gas constituents present.
Desflurane:
The presence of desflurane in the exhaled breath at
concentrations greater than 5% will positively bias Carbon
Dioxide values by up to an additional 3 mmHg at 38 mmHg.
Xenon:
The presence of Xenon in the exhaled breath will negatively
bias Carbon Dioxide values by up to an additional 5 mmHg
at 38 mmHg.
Barometric Pressure on etCO2 Measurement

Values:
Quantitative Effect
Ambient Barometric, Operational

(0 to 40) mmHg: ± 1 mmHg additional error
(41 to 70) mmHg: ± 2.5% additional error
(71 to 100) mmHg: ± 4% additional error
(101 to 150) mmHg: ± 5% additional error
*Additional worst case error when compensation for PB, O2, N2O, anesthetic agents, or helium is
correctly selected for the actual fractional gas constituents present.
NOTE
Respiration Rate accuracy was verified by using a
solenoid test setup to deliver a square wave of
known CO2 concentration to the device. 5% and
10% CO2 concentrations were used. Respiration
rate was varied over the range of the device.
Pass/Fail criteria was comparison of the
respiratory rate output from the sensor to the
frequency of the square wave.

Technical data
Dräger MCable Mainstream CO2 Module.
Measure Parameters etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
Unit mmHg, %, Kpa
☆ Measuring Range
☆ etCO2 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg
☆ FiCO2 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg
☆ AwRR 3 rpm to 150 rpm (PGM algorithm)
Resolution etCO2 1 mmHg
FiCO2 1 mmHg
AwRR 1 rpm
☆ etCO2 Accuracy < 0.5 mmHg rms, 0 mmHg to 40 mmHg
< 1 mmHg rms, 40.1 mmHg to 100 mmHg
Operation Mode Measure, standby
Local Barometric Pressure 57 kPa to 110 kPa
O2 Compensation
Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%
Default 16%
N2O Compensation
Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%
Default 0%
He Compensation
Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%

Technical data
Default 0%
Xe Compensation
Range 0% to 100%
Resolution 1%
Default 0%
☆ Alarm Type etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR
☆ Apnea Alarm Delay 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s; default value is 20 s.
Data Reporting Rate Every 10 msec or 20 msec
Response Time Rise Time: t10-90 = 24 msec

Delay Time: 150 msec
Warm Up The sensor meets the specified operating performance within

2 minutes typical from power on or reset at ambient temperatures from
20 °C to 40 °C. At 10 °C ambient temperature, time from power on to
reach the specified operating performance is 10 min approximately.
Interfering Gases and Vapours
N2O 100 Vol.% 0.00 Vol.%
Halothane 5 Vol.% 0.02 Vol.%
Enflurane 5 Vol.% 0.03 Vol.%
Isoflurane 5 Vol.% 0.02 Vol.%
Sevoflurane 5 Vol.% 0.02 Vol.%
Desflurane 20 Vol.% 0.00 Vol.%
Ethanol 4 %o * 0.00 Vol.%
Acetone 1 %o * 0.00 Vol.%
Isopropanol 1 % 0.00 Vol.%
Methane 3 Vol.% <0.02 Vol.%

Technical data
NO 100 ppm 0.01 Vol.%
NO2 50 ppm 0.00 Vol.%
CO 4 Vol.% 0.00 Vol.%
Freon R21 100 Vol.% 0.07 Vol.%
Freon R134a 100 Vol.% 0.19 Vol.%
Heptafluorpropane 0.7 Vol.% 0.00 Vol.%
Water vapour 37 °C (98.6 °F) saturated 0.01 Vol.%
*blood concentration equivalent spilled onto the airway adapter windows and of
contamination, as long as still some measurement
NOTE
light passes the airway adapter windows, is largely
The numbers given at the end of each line are compensated for, water droplets and other window
typical CO2 readings of the sensor for the pure contamination may slightly influence measurement
interfering gas or vapour, balance N2 (if bias, up to 0.3 Vol.% approximately at 5 Vol.% CO2
applicable), without CO2 content. CO2 reading of (normally much less). Precision, of course,
common mixtures like CO2, O2, N2O, anaesthetic worsens if less light passes (i.e., noise of reading
agent (in physiological concentration) or CO2, O2, gets higher). After some time, water droplets are
N2, water vapour is within specified bias, provided heated away.
that the major foreign gases (see above: O2, N2O,
He, Xe) are entered to the sensor. If measurement light is blocked such that noise of
reading gets unacceptably high, an error message
Effects of Humidity or Condensate: is sent from the CO2 sensor indicating that the
airway adapter has to be checked (cleaned or
The airway adapter windows are indirectly heated
replaced).
via the sensor to prevent moisture condensation.
While by sensor design the effect of water droplets
C.O.
Technique Thermodilution Technique
Measure Parameters C.O., TB, TI
Measuring Range
C.O. 0.1 L/min to 20 L/min
TB +23 °C to +43 °C (+73.4 ºF to +109.4 ºF)

Technical data
TI -1 °C to +27 °C (+30.2 ºF to +80.6 ºF)
Resolution
C.O. 0.01 L/min
TB, TI +0.1 °C (+0.1 ºF)
Accuracy
C.O. ±5% or ± 0.2 L/min, whichever is greater
TB ±0.1 °C (±32.18 ºF) (not including sensor)
TI ±0.1 °C (±32.18 ºF) (not including sensor)
NOTE
At least 90% of the C.O. data should reside inside
the bounded region, and the lower 95%
confidence interval should not exceed 85%.
AG
NOTE
Regarding the AG specifications, refer to the
Supplement Scio Four modules.

Technical data
BIS
Technique Bispectral index, power spectrum analysis
☆ Measure Primary Parameter BIS 0 to 100

Parameters
Secondary SQI 0% to 100%
Parameters
SR 0% to 100%
EMG 30 dB to 80 dB
SEF 0.5 Hz to 30.0 Hz
TP 40 dB to 100 dB
BC (only applicable to 0 to 30
BIS™ Extend Sensor)
Sweep Speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Wave Scale 50 μv, 100 μv, 200 μv, 500 μv
BIS Trend Length of BIS trend: 6 min, 12 min, 30 min, 60 min
Smoothing Rate 10 s, 15 s, 30 s
Noise (EEG < 0.3 μV (0.25 Hz to 50 Hz)

Waveform)
EEG Bandwidth 0.25 Hz to 100 Hz
☆ BIS Alarm Range 0 to 100
Interfaces
Analog Output
Bandwidth (-3dB; reference Diagnosis/Monitor: 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz

frequency: 10Hz) Surgery: 1 Hz to 20 Hz

Technical data
Maximum Transmission Delay 500 ms

(Diagnosis Mode)
Sensitivity 1 V/1 mV ±10%
PACE Rejection/ Enhancement Not applicable.
Compliant with Standard and Complies with the requirements in terms of short circuit
Directive protection and leakage current in EN60601-1.
Output Impedance < 500Ω
Interface Type PS2 connector
NOTE
While using analog output, set the calculation lead
as following:
1 In 3-lead mode, set to Lead I, Lead II, or Lead
III.
2 In 5-lead mode, set to Lead I, Lead II, Lead III
or Lead V.
Defibrillator Synchronization
Output Impedance <500Ω
Maximum Time Delay 35mS (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)
Waveform Rectangular wave
Amplitude High level: 3.5 V to 5.5 V, providing a maximum of 1 mA

output current;
Low level: < 0.5V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current
Minimum Required R-wave 0.3 mV

Amplitude
Pulse Width 100 mS ±10%
Limited Current 15 mA rating
Rising and Falling Time < 1mS

Technical data
Nurse Call
Drive Mode Voltage output
Power Supply ≤ 12VDC, 200 mA Max.
Interface Signal 12 V power supply and PWM waveform
PS2 connector Definition for Analog

Output/Defibrillator Synchronization/Nurse Call
PIN.NO. Signal name Signal Description

1 ANALOG_OUT Analog out signal
2 GND Ground
3 SYS_OUT Defibrillator Synchronization signal
4 +12V Nurse call power
5 GND Ground
6 NURSE_OUT Nurse call control signal
USB Interfaces
Number of USB Interfaces 2
Drive Mode HOST interface, USB1.0/2.0 protocol
Power Supply 5VDC±5%, 500mA Max.
Interface Type USB A-type port
VGA Interface
Number of VGA Interface 1
Horizontal Refreshing Rate 30-94 KHZ
Video Signal 0.7 Vpp @ 75 Ohm, HSYNC/VSYNC signal TTL
Interface Type DB-15 female receptacle

Technical data
SCIO Interface/ Medibus/X Interface
Level RS232
Interface Type DB-9 female receptacle
Network Interface
Bandwidth 10M
Interface Type Standard RJ-45 network interface
HL7 XML format

The data transmission will be finished within 8 s. The actual
transmission time cost will depend on the XML file size.

EMC Declaration
EMC Declaration
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Electromagnetic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Electromagnetic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Electromagnetic immunity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Recommended separation distances

to portable and mobile RF
telecommunication devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

EMC Declaration
General information
The EMC compliance of the Vista 120 series The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120,
patient monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S) is also Vista 120S) may only be used adjacent to or
applicable to the external cables, transducers, and stacked with other devices when the configuration
accessories specified in the list of accessories. In is approved by Dräger. If adjacent or stacked use of
addition, accessories which do not affect EMC non-approved configurations is inevitable, the Vista
compliance may be used if no other reasons forbid 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S)
their use (see other sections of the Instructions for must be observed to verify normal operation in the
Use). The use of non-compliant accessories may said configuration. In any case, strictly observe the
result in increased emissions or decreased Instructions for Use of the other devices.
immunity of the Vista 120 series patient monitors
(Vista 120, Vista 120S).
Electromagnetic emissions
When selecting wireless systems (wireless

communication devices, pager systems, etc.) for
use in installations where wireless networking is
used, ensure that operating frequencies are
compatible. Low-level signals such as ECG are
particularly susceptible to interference from
electromagnetic energy. While the equipment
meets the testing described below, it will not ensure
perfect operation. The ‘quieter’ the electrical
environment the better. In general, increasing the
distance between electrical devices decreases the
likelihood of interference.

EMC Declaration
Electromagnetic environment
The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120,

Vista 120S) are intended for use in an
electromagnetic environment as specified below.
The user must ensure its use in such an
environment.
Emissions Compliance according to Electromagnetic environment

Radio frequency Group 1 The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120,
emissions Vista 120S) use RF energy only for its internal
function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low
(CISPR 11)
and are not likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
Class A The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120,
Vista 120S) are suitable for use in all
Harmonic emissions Class A
establishments other than domestic
(IEC 61000-3-2)
establishments and those directly connected to
Voltage Complies the public low-voltage power supply network that
fluctuations/flicker supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
emissions
(IEC 61000-3-3)
NOTE
The EMISSIONS characteristics of the Vista 120
series patient monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S)
make it suitable for use in industrial areas and
hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a
residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class
B is normally required) the Vista 120 series patient
monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S) might not offer
adequate protection to radio-frequency
communication services. The user might need
to take mitigation measures, such as relocating or
re-orienting the equipment.
Electromagnetic immunity
The Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120,

Vista 120S) are intended for use in an
electromagnetic environment as specified below.
The user must ensure its use in such an
environment.

EMC Declaration
Immunity against Test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment

(IEC 60601-1-2)
Electrostatic Contact discharge: Contact discharge: Floors should be wood,
discharge (ESD) ±8 kV ±8 kV concrete or ceramic tile. If floors
(IEC 61000-4-2) are covered with synthetic
Air discharge: Air discharge:
material, the relative humidity
±15 kV ±15 kV
should be at least 30 %.
Electrical fast Power supply lines: Power supply lines: Mains power quality should be
transients/ bursts ±2 kV ±2 kV that of a typical commercial or
(IEC 61000-4-4) hospital environment.
Longer input / output Longer input / output
lines: ±1 kV lines: ±1 kV
Surge on AC mains Common mode: Common mode: Mains power quality should be
lines (IEC 61000-4-5) ±2 kV ±2 kV that of a typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Differential mode: Differential mode:
±1 kV ±1 kV
Power frequency 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency magnetic
magnetic field fields should be at levels
(50/60 Hz) characteristic of a typical
(IEC 61000-4-8) location in a typical commercial
or hospital environment.
Voltage dips and 0 % UT; 0.5 cycle 0 % UT; 0.5 cycle Mains power quality should be
short interruptions on At 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, At 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°,that of a typical commercial or
AC mains input lines 180°, 225°, 270° and 180°, 225°, 270° and hospital environment. If the user
(IEC 61000-4-11) 315° 315° of the Vista 120 series patient
monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S)
0 % UT; 1 cycle 0 % UT; 1 cycle
requires continued operation
and and
during mains power supply
70 % UT; 25/30 cycles ) 70 % UT; 25/30 cycles )
interruptions, it is
Single phase: at 0° Single phase: at 0°
recommended that the Vista
0 % UT; 250/300 cycle 0 % UT; 250/300 cycle 120 series patient monitors
(Vista 120, Vista 120S) be
powered from an uninterruptible
power supply or a battery.

EMC Declaration

(IEC 60601-1-2)
Radiated RF 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz: 3 V/m (1 V/m when Portable and mobile RF
(IEC 61000-4-3) using the BIS module) communications equipment
3 V/m
should be used no closer to any
80 MHz to 2.7 GHz
part of the Vista 120 series
Conducted RF 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 3 VRMS (1 VRMS when patient monitors (Vista 120,
(IEC 61000-4-6) 3 VRMS using the BIS module) Vista 120S), including cables,
than the recommended
6 Vrms3 in ISM bands 150 kHz to 80 MHz
separation distance calculated
between
6 Vrms3 in ISM bands from the equation applicable to
0.15 MHz and 80 MHz
between the frequency of the transmitter.
0.15 MHz and 80 MHz
Recommended separation
distance
150 KHz to 80 MHz
( 150 KHz to 80 MHz)
80 MHz to 800 MHz
( 80 MHz to 800 MHz)
800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
( 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz)

EMC Declaration

(IEC 60601-1-2)
6 at RF wireless
communications equipment
bands (Portable RF
(including peripherals such as
antenna cables and external
antennas) should be used no
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to
any part of the monitor,
including cables specified by
the manufacturer).
Where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in
See Table 1 Comply with Table 1 watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d
is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined
by an electromagnetic site
survey1, should be less than the
compliance level in each
frequency range2.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:
NOTE
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.

EMC Declaration

(IEC 60601-1-2)
1
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S) are used exceeds
the applicable RF compliance level above, the Vista 120 series patient monitors (Vista 120, Vista
120S) should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the Vista 120 series patient monitors
(Vista 120, Vista 120S).
2
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
3
The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 0.15 MHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to
6.795 MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
The amateur radio bands between 0.15 MHz and 80 MHz are 1.8 MHz to 2.0 MHz, 3.5 MHz to
4.0 MHz, 5.3 MHz to 5.4 MHz, 7 MHz to 7.3 MHz, 10.1 MHz to 10.15 MHz, 14 MHz to 14.2 MHz,
18.07 MHz to 18.17 MHz, 21.0 MHz to 21.4 MHz, 24.89 MHz to 24.99 MHz, 28.0 MHz to 29.7 MHz
and 50.0 MHz to 54.0 MHz.
Table 1 Test specifications for ENCLOSURE

PORT IMMUNITY to RF wireless
Test Immunity
Band a) Maximum Distance
frequency Service a) Modulation b) test level
(MHz) power (W) (m)
(MHz) (V/m)
Pulse
385 380-390 TETRA 400 modulation b) 1.8 0.3 27
18 Hz
FM c)
GMRS 460, ± 5 kHz
450 430-470 deviation 2 0.3 28
FRS 460
1 kHz sine
710
Pulse
LTE Band
745 704-787 modulation b) 0.2 0.3 9
13, 17
217 Hz
780

EMC Declaration
Test Immunity
Band a) Maximum Distance
frequency Service a) Modulation b) test level
(MHz) power (W) (m)
(MHz) (V/m)
810 GSM
800/900,
870 TETRA Pulse
800-960 800, iDEN modulation b) 2 0.3 28
820, CDMA 18 Hz
930 850, LTE
Band 5
1720 GSM 1800;

CDMA
1845 1900; GSM
Pulse
1900;
1700-1990 modulation b) 2 0.3 28
DECT; LTE
217 Hz
1970 Band 1, 3,
4, 25;
UMTS
Bluetooth,
WLAN,
Pulse
802.11
2450 2400-2570 modulation b) 2 0.3 28
b/g/n, RFID
217 Hz
2450, LTE
Band 7
5240
Pulse
WLAN
5500 5100-5800 modulation b) 0.2 0.3 9
802.11 a/n
217 Hz
5785
NOTE If necessary to achieve the IMMUNITY TEST LEVEL, the distance between the transmitting
antenna and the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM may be reduced to 1 m. The 1 m test distance is
permitted by IEC 61000-4-3.
a) For some services, only the uplink frequencies are included.

b) The carrier shall be modulated using a 50 % duty cycle square wave signal.
c) As an alternative to FM modulation, 50 % pulse modulation at 18 Hz may be used because while it
does not represent actual modulation, it would be worst case.

EMC Declaration
Recommended separation distances to portable and mobile RF

telecommunication devices
The separation distances below are in accordance with IEC 60601-1-2.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter(m)

output power of
transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
(W)
( ) ( ) ( 800 kHz to
2.5 GHz)
The separation distance values in the brackets are specific to the occasion
when the BIS module is used.
0.01 0.12 (0.35) 0.12 (0.35) 0.23 (0.70)
0.1 0.38 (1.1) 0.38 (1.1) 0.73 (2.2)
1 1.2 (3.5) 1.2 (3.5) 2.3 (7.0)
10 3.8 (11) 3.8 (11) 7.3 (22)
100 12 (35) 12 (35) 23 (70)
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.


Default settings
Default settings
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Patient information default settings . . . . . . . 308
Alarm default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
ECG default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
RESP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SpO2 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
PR default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
NIBP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
TEMP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
IBP default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
CO2 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
C.O. default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
C.O. default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine
Monitoring default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Default settings
Overview
This appendix documents the most important

default settings of the monitor as it is delivered from
the factory.
NOTE
If the monitor has been preconfigured according to
the requirements, the settings at delivery will be
different from the default settings listed below.
Profile
To set default configuration, select Menu > Profile. To check the configuration currently used, select
On the Profile menu, users can choose a factory Menu > Profile. The one labeled with (√) is current
configuration (adult, pediatric or neonate) based on configuration. If there's no labeled configuration, it
the patient category. Also, users can choose a user means the currently used configuration is not one
configuration saved in the monitor if it is available. of them.
For more information about user configuration,
refer to User configuration.
User Configuration
Select Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain, enter configuration can be saved in the monitor. User can
the required password, users can save the current select as desire. The one labeled with (√) is current
monitor's configuration, delete the saved user configuration.
configuration and rename it. Three pieces of user
Patient information default settings
Patient information settings

Patient type Adult
Pace Off

Default settings
Alarm default settings
Alarm settings
Pause time 120 s
Sensor off alarm On
Alarm latch Off
ECG default settings
ECG settings ADU PED NEO
Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Alarm high limit 120 160 200
Alarm low limit 50 75 100
ARR Analysis ThresholdValue
PVCs High 10/min
Pace Off
Lead type 5 Leads
Display Normal
Filter Monitor
Smart lead off Off
Heart volume 3
ST analysis Off
Alarm switch Off

Default settings
Alarm level Medium
Alarm record Off
Alarm high limit (ST-X) 0.2
Alarm low limit (ST-X) -0.2
X stands for I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V.
ARR analysis
ARR analysis On
ARR alarm settings Alarm switch Alarm level Alarm record
Asystole On (non-adjustable) High (non-adjustable) Off
V-Fib/V-Tach On High (non-adjustable) Off
R on T On Medium Off
Run PVCs On Medium Off
Couplet On Medium Off
PVC On Medium Off
PVC Bigeminy On Medium Off
PVC Trigeminy On Medium Off
Tachy On Medium Off
Brady On Medium Off
Missed Beat On Medium Off
Irr Rhythm On Medium Off
Pacer not Capture On Medium Off
Pacer not Pacing On Medium Off
Vent Brady On High (non-adjustable) Off
Vent Rhythm On Medium Off

Default settings
RESP default settings
RESP settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Apnea time 20 s
Calculation type Auto
Resp hold type Auto
Sweep 12.5 mm/s
Amplitude 1
SpO2 default settings
SpO2 settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Pitch tone Off
SatSeconds (Nellcor Off
Module)
Sweep 12.5 mm/s

Default settings
PR default settings
PR settings ADU PED NEO

PR source SpO2
Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Pulse volume 3
Alarm source Auto
NIBP default settings
NIBP settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Alarm high limit (SYS) 160 120 90
Alarm low limit (SYS) 90 75 40
Alarm high limit (Mean) 110 90 70
Alarm low limit (Mean) 60 50 30
Alarm high limit (Dia) 90 70 60
Alarm low limit (Dia) 50 40 20
Inflation value 160 140 100
Venipuncture pressure 60 40 30
Unit mmHg
Interval Manual

Default settings
TEMP default settings
TEMP settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Alarm high limit (T1) 39.0 39.0 39.0
Alarm low limit (T1) 36.0 36.0 36.0
Alarm high limit (T2) 39.0 39.0 39.0
Alarm low limit (T2) 36.0 36.0 36.0
Alarm high limit (TD) 2.0 2.0 2.0
Unit °C
IBP default settings
IBP settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Unit mmHg
Filter 12.5 Hz
SYS, DIA, MEAN SYS, DIA, MEAN SYS, DIA, MEAN
Alarm high limit 160, 90, 110 120, 70, 90 90, 60, 70
(ART, P1, P2)
Alarm low limit 90, 50, 70 70, 40, 50 55, 20, 35
(ART, P1, P2)
Alarm high limit (PA) 35, 16, 20 60, 4, 26 60, 4, 26
Alarm low limit (PA) 10, 0, 0 24, -4, 12 24, -4, 12
MEAN MEAN MEAN

Default settings

(CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP)
(CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP)
CO2 default settings
CO2 settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm switch On
Alarm record Off
Alarm level Medium
Work mode Standby
Unit mmHg
Apnea time 20 s
O2 compensate 16 %
Anes agent 0%
Alarm high limit (etCO2) 50 50 45
Alarm low limit (etCO2) 25 25 30
Alarm high limit (FiCO2) 4 4 4
Alarm high limit (AWRR) 30 30 100
Alarm low limit (AWRR) 8 8 30
Sweep 6.25 mm/s
Amplitude Low
C.O. default settings
BIS Settings ADU/PED

Default settings
Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Unit /
BIS Alarm High Limit 70
BIS Alarm Low Limit 20
C.O. default settings
C.O. Settings ADU PED NEO

Alarm Switch On
Alarm Record Off
Alarm Level Medium
Alarm High Limit (TB) 43.0 43.0 43.0
Alarm Low Limit (TB) 23.0 23.0 23.0
Injective Temperature Source Auto
Temperature Unit °C
Interval 30
Constant 0.542
Ventilator/Anesthesia Machine Monitoring default settings
Ventilator/Anesthesia
ADU PED NEO
Machine Monitoring Settings
Top Ruler: 40 Top Ruler: 40 Top Ruler: 40
Paw Ruler
Bottom Ruler: 0 Bottom Ruler: 0 Bottom Ruler: 0

Default settings

Flow Ruler
Bottom Ruler: -80 Bottom Ruler: -80 Bottom Ruler: -80
Vol Ruler
CO2 Ruler
O2 Ruler
HAL/ISO/ENF/SEV Ruler
DES Ruler
Sweep 6.25 mm/s
Mode Filled
Loop Type P-V
Reference Loop On
Paw: 40
P-V
Vol: 800
Vol: 800
F-V
Flow: 150

Passwords
Passwords
The following dialog boxes are protected by a

password to prevent unauthorized changes:
 User Maintain
 Demo Mode
The password can be found on this page of these
Instructions for Use. Cut out this section and store
it in a safe place to keep it from unauthorized
persons.
If the section with the password has been removed,
ask the person responsible for the device about the
possibility of making changes in the above
mentioned dialog boxes.
If the password is lost, contact DrägerService.
Passwords for the Vista 120 series patient

monitors (Vista 120, Vista 120S)
Cut out this section and store it in a safe place to
keep it from unauthorized persons.
The following dialog boxes are protected by a
password to prevent unauthorized changes:
Dialog box Password

Menu > Maintenance > User Maintain ABC (default initial password)
Menu > Common Function > Demo Mode 3045


Vista 120 CMS
WARNING
To properly use this medical device,
read and comply with these
instructionsfor use.
Screen images
Schematic renderings of screen images are used,

which may differ in appearance or in configuration
from the actual screen images.
Definition of safety information
WARNING
A WARNING statement provides important
situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
A CAUTION statement provides important
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury to the user or patient or in
damage to the medical device or other property.
NOTE
A NOTE provides additional information intended
to avoid inconvenience during operation.
Abbreviations and symbols
For explanations refer to sections “Abbreviations”

and “Symbols” in chapter “Overview”.
2 Instructions for use Vista 120 CMS SW 1.n

Contents
Contents
Intended use and safety guidance . . . . . . . . 7 Real-Time Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Intended use/Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Alarm Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Viewing Single Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Application scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Display of Single Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hiding/Showing Multi-Lead Waveform . . . . . . 43
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Short Trend Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 OxyCRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Mouse Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Viewing bedside monitor’s work status . . . 45
Display screens of Vista 120 CMS . . . . . . . . 17 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 NFC Mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
System Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Privacy Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Patient Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Setting Monitors via Vista 120 CMS. . . . . . . 49
Quick Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Auxiliary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Changing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Large Font Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Layout of Patient Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Configuring NIBP Measurement
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Switching Vista 120 CMS on and off. . . . . . . 25 Parameters Alarm Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Starting monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Shutting down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Patient Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Patient List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Admitting a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Patient Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Obtaining patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 History Patient Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Synchronizing patient information* . . . . . . . . . . 31 Backup Patient Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Changing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Wave Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Switching Patient sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Reviewing Normal Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . 55
Discharging a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Reviewing ECG Compressed
Setting Idle Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Transferring a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Setting Wave Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Monitoring Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Refreshing Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Selecting Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Patient Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Networked Monitoring Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Alarm Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Menu in the Patient Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Locking and Unlocking Alarm
Parameter/ Waveform Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Printing Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Sequencing the Alarm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Instructions for use Vista 120 CMS SW 1.n 3

Contents
Annotating Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Printing Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Filtering Alarm Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Trend Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Exporting the PDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Viewing Parameters selectively . . . . . . . . . 57 Database Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Refreshing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Printing Trend Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Database backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Selecting Trend Table, trend Graph . . . . . . 58 Reviewing backup database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NIBP Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
C.O. Measure Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Calculation and Titration Table . . . . . . . . . . 77
Quick Temp review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
PAWP review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Drug Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Drug Calculation Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Calculation of Titration Table . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Hemodynamic Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Common Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Parameter Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Color Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Renal Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
User Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Oxygenation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Monitor Batch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Date/Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Alarm Setup for Vista 120 CMS . . . . . . . . . 64 Ventilation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Database Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
EMR database maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 64 CMS-WEB Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Other Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
User Password Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Typical Screens of the CMS-WEB. . . . . . . . . . 86
Operation Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Starting/ Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . 88
Certificate Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Common Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Administrator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Physiological Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Viewing Single Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Technical Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarm Level of the Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Single Bed View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarm Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Waveform Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Audio Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Alarm Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Alarm Prompt/Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Trend Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Alarms for Networking Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 NIBP Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Printing Report with a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Control and safety index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Printing Preview/ Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . 72 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Contents
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Cleaning the filter mat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Recommended Hardware Configuration . . . . . 102
Software Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Vista 120 CMS System Alarms and

Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


Intended use and safety guidance
Intended use/Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . 8
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Application scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Intended use/Indications for Use
Vista 120 CMS Central Station provides centralized Vista120 CMS is just the secondary monitor for all
monitoring and critical care management for bedside monitors displayed on the Main screen, so
bedside Vista 120 monitored patients. From the it is not intended to be the only one approach relied
Vista 120 CMS Central Station, clinicians can gain on by users to make therapeutic and diagnostic
access to patient information for patients on the decisions for monitoring patient. Clinical decision
Network. The Vista 120 CMS Central Station making based on the output of the Vista120 CMS is
displays waveforms, parameters, and alarm status left to the discretion of the provider.
of Vista 120 bedside monitors for up to 32 patients
on a single screen or up to 64 patients using two
screens.
Components
Vista 120 CMS Central Monitoring System  Mouse/keyboard

(abbreviated to Vista 120 CMS) consists of:
 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS, optional)
 Vista 120 central monitoring software
 Loudspeaker
(watchdog included)
 Laser printer (optional)
 Vista 120 central monitoring PC workstation
(abbreviated to PC workstation)  Bedside Vista 120 series patient monitors
(supplied separately)
Application scope
Vista 120 CMS is intended to monitor patients’

ECG, respiration, non-invasive and invasive blood
pressure, pulse oxygen saturation, pulse rate, body
temperature, and cardiac output.
The physiological waveforms, parameters and
alarm information displayed on Vista 120 CMS can
only be used for reference for the doctor, not as the
basis for carrying out clinical treatment. Prior to
intervening based on this data, check the displayed
results on the corresponding bedside monitor.

Safety guidance
WARNING WARNING
The system should be installed by a qualified Vista 120 CMS system can only collect,
service engineer. Do not switch on power until supervise, record, store and display the
all cables have been properly connected and information from patient monitor but can not
verified. replace the monitoring function of the patient
monitor.
WARNING
The user of this system should get WARNING
professional training and read this manual The wireless monitors and Vista 120 CMS form
thoroughly before using it. a wireless local area network (WLAN), and
bidirectional data transmission between them
is achieved by radio. Its RF emissions may
WARNING
cause interference in nearby electronic
Do not use the PC workstation in the presence equipment. So the RF device must comply
of flammable anesthetic due to explosion risk. with the local standards and certification
requirements. Data transmission loss
WARNING between them may occur due to interference
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not open caused by other RF signals.
the case of the PC workstation.
WARNING
WARNING Ensure that the system can meet the
Do not move the main unit and monitor while requirements of standard IEC/EN 60601-1
powering on the central monitoring PC before other devices are connected to the
workstation. system. Other equipments connected to the
interfaces of PC station must comply with the
WARNING respective IEC/EN standards (e.g. IEC/EN
60950 for data processing equipment and
Only the accessories supplied or
IEC/EN 60601-1 for medical equipment).
recommended by the manufacturer can be
Furthermore, all configurations should
connected to the PC workstation.
comply with the valid version of the system
standard IEC/EN 60601-1. Everybody who
WARNING connects additional equipment to the signal
Ensure that the environment in which the input connector or signal output connector
system is operated is not subject to any configures a medical system, and is therefore
sources of strong electromagnetic responsible for the system complying with the
interference, such as radio transmitters, requirements of the valid version of the
mobile telephones, etc. Keep them far away. system standard IEC/EN 60601-1. If in doubt,
consult our technical service department or
WARNING local distributor.
This equipment must be used by or under the
guide of medical professional. This equipment
is not intended for home use.

WARNING CAUTION
The Vista 120 central monitoring software can The user must check that the equipment, cables
only be installed on the device recommended and transducers do not have visible evidence of
by Dräger. damage that may affect patient safety or
monitoring capability before using it. The
WARNING recommended inspection interval is once per
week or less. If damage is evident, replacement is
Only use operating systems that are approved
recommended before using it.
by Dräger, such as Window 7. Using operating
systems that are not approved by Dräger may
compromise the system performance and CAUTION
cause a potential hazard. Turn off the system power before connecting or
disconnecting any accessory.
WARNING
Refer to Vista 120 CMS Central Monitoring CAUTION
System Installation Instructions for detailed Do not operate the system if it is not operating
information of installation and uninstallation. normally or requires service.
WARNING CAUTION
Restart Vista 120 CMS host once the prompt Turn off the system power and remove the power
“System running time is too long, please cable before maintaining the system.
restart” appears. According to the practical
situation, restart cycle is 3 to 6 months.
CAUTION
Preventive maintenance of the system including
WARNING
periodic cleaning and appearance check can be
When Network Encryption is turned on, only finished by the user.
monitors with AES or TLS encryption can be
connected to Vista 120 CMS. Contact
DrägerService for Network Encryption CAUTION
settings. Avoid using attrite material to clean the PC
workstation. Remove all dust from the exterior
surface of the equipment with a soft brush or
CAUTION
cloth, slightly dampened with a mild detergent
Read this manual prior to using the Vista 120 solution or cool disinfector. Especially the tie-in
CMS. and panel edge should be noticed.
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the environment clean. Avoid vibration. Avoid pouring liquids on the equipment while
Keep it far from corrosive reagents, dust areas, cleaning, and do not immerse any parts of the
high-temperature and humid environment. equipment into any liquids.
CAUTION
The system data will be delayed for no more than
5 s.

CAUTION
Additional multi-socket outlet or extension cord
can’t be connected to the system.
CAUTION
The maintenance operations like software
upgrade of the system can only be completed by
qualified service professionals of the
manufacturer.
NOTE
Clinical decision making based on the output of the
device is left to the discretion of the provider.
NOTE
Prior to intervening based on data displayed on the
Central Monitoring System, providers must verify
this data with the corresponding bedside monitor.
NOTE
The illustrations in this manual are for reference
only.


Introduction
Introduction
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mouse Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Introduction
General
Vista 120 CMS connects bedside monitors via  AG: etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR; EtO2, FiO2; EtN2O,
cable network and displays physiological FiN2O; HAL/ISO/ENF/SEV/DES: Et, Fi, MAC
information of the patients being monitored by
 C.O.: C.O., TB
bedside monitors. This system can simultaneously
display the information from up to 64 bedside  Parameters from ventilator/anesthesia
monitors. machine: PEEP, PIP, Pmean, AwRR, MV, MVi,
VT, VTi, etCO2, FiCO2, EtN2O, FiN2O, EtO2,
Physiological waveforms of each bedside monitor
FiO2, EtAA, FiAA, EtHal, FiHal, EtEnf, FiEnf,
that can be displayed on Vista 120 CMS include:
EtIso, FiIns, EtDes, FiDes, EtSev, FiSev, Mac
 2 ECG waveforms (Up to 7 ECG waveforms
 BIS: BIS, EMG, SQI, SR, SEF, TP, BC
in multi-lead interface of Single Bed View sub-
window) Vista 120 CMS can also generate both audio and
visual alarms from bedside monitor in order to
 1 RESP waveform
attract the doctor's attention, thus the alarm event
 1 PLETH waveform can be dealt with in time.
 3 IBP waveforms (Only IBP waveforms Vista 120 CMS supports various kinds of
supported by the monitor will be displayed) peripheral devices such as printer that can output
monitoring report. The typical central monitoring
 1 CO2 waveform
system network is shown in the following figure:
 4 AG waveforms for CO2, O2, N2O and AA
 3 waveforms from ventilator/anesthesia HIS/EMR System
machine
 1 BIS waveform
Physiological parameters of each bedside monitor Mirth Connect
that can be displayed on the Vista 120 CMS
include:
 ECG: HR, ST value, PVCs
 RESP: RR CMS-WEB
Vista 120 CMS
observer
 NIBP: SYS, DIA, MAP
 SpO2: SpO2, PR, PI, SpO2 bar graph
 TEMP: T1, T2, TD Wireless
Network
Wired
Network
 Quick TEMP
Monitors with Monitors without
 IBP: ART, PA, CVP, RAP, ICP, LAP, P1, P2, Wi-Fi module Wi-Fi module
PPV, PAWP
 CO2: etCO2, FiCO2, AwRR

Introduction
System functions
The standard Vista 120 CMS Central Station  Review 240-hour Quick TEMP measurements
includes a PC and one display, mouse and (up to 20000 pieces)
keyboard, instructions for use, and the following
 Review 240-hour PAWP measurements (up to
features:
20000 pieces)
 Internal speaker
 Comprehensive system help information
 Patient data from bedside Vista 120 collected
 Power off data storage function
and displayed including ECG (3-lead or 5-lead),
Respiration (ECG), ST, ARR, SpO2, TEMP,  Drug calculation and titration table
Quick TEMP, NIBP, IBP, etCO2 C.O.,
 Hemodynamic calculation
anesthesia gas monitoring data via Dräger
SCIO 4 module, data from Dräger ventilator or  Oxygenation calculation
anesthesia machine, and BIS measurement
 Renal Function calculation
data via BISx device.
 Ventilation calculation
 Audio alarm annunciation
 Bidirectional alarms configuration and NIBP
 96 or 240 hour full disclosure waveform
setting
 Store and review 240-hour alarm events (up to
 Supporting wired connected and wireless
20000 pieces) for each bedside monitor
connected monitor
 Export of waveforms
 Web observation in the hospital local area
 240 hour graphical and tabular trends network
 12-hour short trend per patient  Perform information interaction with HIS system
or EMR system
 Review 240-hour NIBP measurements (up to
20000 pieces)  HL7
 Review 240-hour C.O. measurements (up to
20000 pieces)
Mouse Operation
Usually, we use the following terms to describe 2 Double-click: move mouse to the target, then
mouse operation: quickly press left-key twice and release it.
Left-key: 3 Drag: move mouse to the target, press left-key
and move to the destination and then release it.
1 Click: move mouse to the target, then quickly
press left-key once and release it. Right-key:

Introduction
1 Click: move mouse to the target, then quickly

press right-key once and release it.
2 Double-click: move mouse to the target, then
quickly press right-key twice and release it.

Display screens of Vista 120 CMS
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Patient Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Quick Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Auxiliary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Large Font Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Layout of Patient Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Overview
Vista 120 CMS can display the monitoring data The patient sectors can be displayed in two modes:
using a single display or using dual displays. The the general display mode with waveforms and
main screen and the auxiliary screen are the main physiological parameter values displaying on the
operation screens. The main screen and auxiliary screen and the large font display mode with only
screen on a single display are different from those parameter values displaying on the screen. The
on dual displays. number of patient sectors which the user can
simultaneously view on the main screen and the
size of the patient sectors depend on the layout of
the patient sectors.
Main Screen
If a single display is used, Vista 120 CMS system System Information Area
will enter the main screen for the single display after
the system starts up. If dual displays are used, it will The following information will be displayed in this
enter the main screen for dual displays. area:
 The hospital and department information.
 Alarm sound pause indicator and alarm
mute indicator .
 Alarm information and prompts of Vista 120 CMS.
If more than one piece of message occurs, they
will be displayed circularly.
 The system time.
 EMR (Electronic Medical Record)

indicator. Please refer to section Synchronizing
1 System information area patient information.
2 Patient sectors
3 Quick control area
Patient Sectors
xxx xx xx xx xx xxx xx xx xx xx xxx xx xx xx xx xxx xx xx xx xx
60 99 60 99 60 99 60 99
A patient is monitored by a monitor. This monitor
xxx xxx xxx xxx
xxx
60 99 xxx
60 99
xxx
60 99 xxx
60 99 will occupy a patient sector when it is connected to
Vista 120 CMS; meanwhile, the monitoring data will
xxx
60 99 xxx
60 99
xxx
60 99 xxx
60 99
xxx
xxx
xx
60 99
xx xx xx xxx
xxx
xx
60 99
xx xx xx xxx
xxx
xx
60 99
xx xx xx xxx
xxx
xx
60 99
xx xx xx
be displayed in this patient sector. Vista 120 CMS
supports 64 monitors connected to the system;
therefore, a total of 64 patient sectors are available
in Vista 120 CMS. The layout of patient sectors may
cause some patient sectors temporarily invisible,
refer to Section Layout of Patient Sectors.

The patient sector has four types of state:  Networked Monitoring: Display of patient
information, waveforms, trend data and alarm
 Network Disconnected: The black background
information indicates the patient in this sector
with the white font Disconnected in a patient
has been admitted and is properly networked
sector indicates no device is assigned to this
and under observation.
patient sector or this patient sector has been set
to idle status (refer to Section Setting Idle Bed). Refer to Chapter Patient Sector for more
information about the patient sectors in networked
 Patient discharged: The black background with
monitoring state.
bed No. at top left corner in patient sector
indicates patient has been discharged.
 Improper Offline: Patient information and the Quick Control Area
message Monitor is offline with yellow
background are displayed in the patient sector
and accompany with low level alarm sound. Function Buttons
Improper Offline indicates the patient in this The quick control area contains the following
sector has been admitted but is offline. The function buttons:
alarm sound for improper offline will be given
out only once.
Button Button Label Function
Main Screen Click on it to return to the main screen.
Click on this symbol to make the alarm pause and the
symbol appears in place of the symbol . And
click on the symbol to disable the pause function

Audio Pause
and the symbol appears in place of the symbol
. When the alarm sound pauses, the symbol as

well as the related prompt will be displayed in the
system information area.
Click on it to enter the review interface, including

patient information review, waveform review, alarm
Review
review, trend review, NIBP review, C.O. measurement
review, Quick TEMP review and PAWP review.
System Setup Click on it to enter the system setup menu.

Click on it to shut down Vista 120 CMS and the

Shut Down
operating system.
Admission Click on it to open the patient admission window.
Click on it, and the volume adjustor icon

appears. Select the Mute check box, and then enter the
password ABC in the text box on the pop-up window;
the entire system become mute, and the symbol

System Volume Adjustor appears. To disable the silence function, tick the Mute
check box again and the symbol appears.

Additionally, the user can drag the volume adjustor to
the desired volume.
NOTE:
Vista 120 CMS will keep mute as soon as mute check
box is ticked. If a new alarm occurs, the system will not
break mute status and will keep mute until mute check
box is ticked again. Use it with caution.

Review physiological alarms for all patients online.

Events Review interface includes:
 Bed No.
 Events, name of the events
 Events level, same as alarm level
 Time, when the event is triggered
 Length, the event timeline duration. 30 min, 60min,
120 min and 240 min are optional. Default value is
30 min.
Events Review  Refresh, for data refreshing.
The user can sequence the events ascendingly or
descendingly by clicking on the heading of any column:
Bed No., Events, or Time. Chronological order is the
default.
To exit events review, the user can click the exit button
in the top right corner, or double-click any events to
enter into alarm review interface for single patient.
NOTE:
Events review interface will be blank if there are no
patients online.
Networked State  With yellow background: Networked

monitoring, with medium or low level
The networked state window has 64 panes
physiological alarm.
representing the 64 monitors that can be supported
and connected to the Vista 120 CMS. The pane  With red background: Networked monitoring,
only displays the bed number. The user can access with high level physiological alarm.
the single bed interface by clicking on the pane.
1 2 3 4 …
…
The pane has the several types of state:

 Blank: Network disconnected.
 With grey background: Improper offline or
patient discharged.
 With green background: Networked monitoring,
without physiological alarm.

Auxiliary Screen
If the patient sector is either in improper offline The auxiliary screen contains a group of sub-
status or networked monitoring status, the user can windows including Single Bed View, Patient
access the auxiliary screen by clicking the Mgmt, Wave Review, Alarm Review, Trend
waveform area or parameter area (except for NIBP Review, NIBP Review, Parameter/Waveform
parameter area) on the patient sector. The auxiliary Setup, C.O. measure review, Quick TEMP
screen on a single display and dual displays are as Review, PAWP Review and Calculation. The sub-
shown below. window of Single Bed View will be displayed by
default when the user enters the auxiliary screen.
In the switch and setup area for the sub-window,
the user can:
 Click a tag to switch the current sub-window to
another sub-window.
 Click to scroll leftward and click to scroll
rightward in the tag bar.
 Click to open the drop-down list in which the
user can set the tags to show/hide.
 Click to exit the auxiliary screen and enter
the main screen.
1 System information area  Drag a tag to adjust its location.
2 Patient sectors
3 Switch and setup area for sub-window  Click or to switch between full screen
4 Sub-window of auxiliary screen display mode and half screen display mode for
5 Quick control area the auxiliary screen when using a single display.
1 System information area

2 Patient sectors
3 Quick control area
4 Switch and setup area for sub-window
5 Sub-window of auxiliary screen

Large Font Display
Choose Display the window in large font from Choose Display all windows in large font from
the menu in the patient sector, and this sector will the menu in the patient sector, and all sectors will
be displayed in the large font display mode. be displayed in the large font display mode.
Choose Display the window in large font again, Choose Display all windows in large font again,
and the sector will be displayed in the general and all sectors will be displayed in the general
display mode. In the large font display mode, display mode.
parameter values are displayed in the patient
sector, but no waveform is shown. xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
60 99 36.5 40 60 99 36.5 40
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
60 99 36.5 40 60 99 36.5 40
60 99 36.5 40 60 99 36.5 40
60 99 36.5 40 60 99 36.5 40
1: Large font display mode

2-8: General Display Mode
Layout of Patient Sectors
The number of patients the user can view on the  Switch between the visible and invisible patient
screen and the size of each patient sector depend sectors, refer to Section Switching Patient
on the layout of the patient sectors. If 64 monitors sector.
are connected to the Vista 120 CMS and the
 Click bed number to view the 64 patient sectors
number of patient sectors displayed on the main
in the networked state window.
screen is set to 32, the screen will only display 32
patient sectors and the other 32 sectors are Refer to Section Display Setup for more information
invisible. The user may: about setting the layout of the patient sectors.


Switching Vista 120 CMS on and off
Starting monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Shutting down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Starting monitoring
NOTE
Before starting the system, verify that the dongle
has been installed. Otherwise, the user may fail to
access the system.
NOTE
Dongle will give out alarm sound if system gets
blocked till resuming normal status.
When all of its components are correctly

connected, press the power button on the front
panel of the device. The power indicator on the
front panel lights up and the device performs
hardware self-test. If the device works normally, the
main screen appears. If the device detects
abnormity during self-test, it beeps to show alarm
and displays error information on the screen. In this
case, the user should record the error information,
shut down the device and contact DrägerService
representative. After the system self-test is
completed, the user will access the Vista 120 CMS
system interface and the system will also finish the
environment self-test automatically. Meanwhile, the
system will sound Do-Do-Do, a test sound. The
user should set the volume system and confirm that
the volume of the system can be heard clearly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the audio adapter of the PC is
activated and the loudspeaker is on.
CAUTION
The audio adapter and network adapter should be
correctly installed, or the user may not access
Vista 120 CMS.

Shutting down the System
It is important to shut down the system properly. CAUTION

Follow this simple procedure to properly shut down
Hospitals without a stable power source should
the system. This prevents inadvertent errors from
use a UPS to provide power to Vista 120 CMS.
occurring during system shut down.
The UPS must not be turned off. When there is a
Vista 120 CMS can work continuously for a long power failure, the system should be shut down by
time. The user does not need to shut it down in following the specified shutdown procedure
order to achieve a longer working life. before the UPS is exhausted. If the system has a
sudden power failure, system failure may occur
The user should follow the procedure to shut down
and consequently the system might not work
Vista 120 CMS.
properly next time.
Method 1:
Select Shut Down on the main menu and enter the NOTE
password of user maintain. Confirm the password If the user forgets the password, contact Dräger
by clicking OK, and the Vista 120 CMS as well as service engineer.
the operating system will be shut down.
Method 2:
Select System Setup > User Maintain, and enter
the password of user maintain; select Other Setup.
 Select Shut Down: Vista 120 CMS as well as
the operating system will be shut down.
 Select Return to Windows: the user will exit
from Vista 120 CMS, but the operating system
will not be shut down.
WARNING
Shut down the system by strictly observing
the shutdown procedure to avoid losing the
central monitoring of bedside patients.
WARNING
When using an UPS (optional) do not switch
off the UPS by force. Otherwise it can result in
a system failure and can affect the future
operation of the system.
WARNING
If power cut-off occurs, turn off the system
before the UPS exhausts its electricity.


Patient Management
Patient Management
Admitting a Patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Obtaining patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Synchronizing patient information* . . . . . . . 31
Changing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching Patient sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Discharging a Patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting Idle Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transferring a Patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Monitoring Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Patient Management
Admitting a Patient
Once Vista 120 CMS starts up and the monitor is

WARNING
properly connected with Vista 120 CMS, the system
will prompt the user to admit patients by displaying For those bedside monitors that have been
the number of pending patients at the information networked with Vista 120 CMS for the first time,
area. the user has to complete patient admission by
using the methods mentioned above, which
Click Admission in the quick control area to enables the monitors to be online and
display a window of Pending patient list. Select observed by Vista 120 CMS. Otherwise, the
the patients the user wants to admit from the left list monitors will not be online on Vista 120 CMS,
in the window, and enter the patient information in and the monitoring data will not be saved by
the right area of the window. Click the Admission Vista 120 CMS.
button at the bottom of the window to complete
patient admission. WARNING
After being admitted, a patient will occupy a patient Before accepting a new patient, no matter the
sector. Vista 120 CMS displays the real-time former one on patient sector is in networked
monitoring data which will also be stored in the monitoring status or improper offline status,
database.
the operation of discharging the former one is
For the monitor that has been offline due to network needed.
problems and is networked with Vista 120 CMS
later, the user needs not readmit the patient of this
monitor. This monitor will be automatically online in
the patient sector which it has occupied.
Obtaining patient information
If configured, patient information from a Hospital 2 Input a query condition for ALL, MRN, Last
Information System (HIS) or Electronic Medical Name or First Name, and then click Query
Record (EMR) system can be obtained through button. The required patient information is
Mirth Connect (MC) and will display on Vista 120 displayed. The user also can select Display all
CMS. patients or Display pending patients to show
the required patient information.
There are two routes to obtain patient information:
3 Select a patient from the patient information list.
Route 1:
Click Confirm and then Admission, or click
1 Click Admission in the quick control area > Confirm and then Update Monitor. The
EMR Patient List or click on the patient sector corresponding patient information in Vista 120
and select Patient Mgmt > EMR Patient List, CMS and the monitor will be updated.
and the EMR patient list is displayed.

Patient Management
Route 2:
NOTE
Select User Maintain > HL7 and tick Auto If patient’s MRN is modified during monitoring,
Admitting via MRN. When the monitor is Vista 120 CMS will not perform automatical query.
networked with Vista 120 CMS and gets online for
the first time, Vista 120 CMS will automatically
search for the patient’s MRN in EMR patient list. If
the patient is found, the patient information will
automatically be updated to Vista 120 CMS and the
monitor.
NOTE
EMR Patient List button is available only when
Mirth Connect function is enabled. For Mirth
Connect settings, contact DrägerService.
Synchronizing patient information*
*Only applicable to patients admitted from EMR **Discharged/Bed ** Transferred) is displayed in

patient list. EMR Message List. In this case, the user needs to
confirm whether to synchronize the patient
When Vista 120 CMS is associated with a HIS/EMR
information with HIS/EMR system or ignore the
system, Vista 120 CMS will be informed to
synchronize and update the patient information message.
with the HIS/EMR system. For instance, whenever Likewise, if patient information is modified in Vista
the patient is updated/discharged/transferred in 120 CMS, prompt information will also be sent to
inform HIS/EMR system of the update. Meanwhile,
HIS/EMR system, will be displayed in Vista
the patient’s physiological data will also be sent to
120 CMS to prompt the user. Click , and a list HIS/EMR system.
of EMR handling messages (Bed ** Updated/Bed
Changing Patient Information
The user can change the patient information on  Modify the patient information via the monitor.
Vista 120 CMS when the information is incorrect. To For more information, refer to the user manual
modify the patient information, click on the patient of the monitor.
sector and select Patient Mgmt, enter the correct
 Modify patient information via Vista 120 CMS.
information in the appropriate fields and click
Update Monitor. NOTE
There are two ways to modify the patient If the patient type is changed via Vista 120 CMS,
information: the patient type on the monitor will be changed
accordingly.

Patient Management
Switching Patient sector
 For a disconnected patient sector (refer to

Section Patient Sectors), click anywhere in it
and choose a patient to be assigned to this
sector from the patient list.
 For a patient sector which is in patient
discharged status or improper offline status or
networked monitoring status (refer to Section
Patient Sectors), select Show from the list on
the patient sector, and select another bedside
monitor from the patient list; the selected
bedside monitor will be displayed in this patient
sector.
Discharging a Patient
When the monitoring on a patient is completed, the After discharging patient, open patient sector menu
user needs to discharge this patient by any of the by clicking on patient information area. The user
following methods: can set this patient sector to idle status by clicking
Set Idle Bed and switch patient sector by clicking
 Choose Discharge Patient from the menu in
Show.
the patient sector.
 Choose Patient Mgmt > Discharge Patient on
the auxiliary screen.
 Discharge the patient via the Review window.
The operation of discharging a patient will cause
the patient offline from Vista 120 CMS, and there
will be no patient admitted in the related patient
sector. The discharged patient will be shown in the
history patient list.
Setting Idle Bed
A patient sector displays monitoring information for The user can set idle bed by following methods:
one monitoring device only. Setting idle bed will
Method 1: After discharging patient, click Set Idle
discharge monitoring device from the patient
Bed in patient sector menu;
sector.

Patient Management
Method 2: Select System Setup > Common NOTE

Setup > Display Setup, and click the area which
Switching patient sector is not equal to setting idle
displays bed No., and then click Set Idle Bed. Or
bed. They are mutual independent and will not
the user can drag the area to change monitoring
influence each other.
device’s position on patient sector.
NOTE
Because the number of beds to be viewed on the
screen is optional (refer to Section Display Setup),
the monitoring device’s position on patient sector
is in a relatively fixed order, that is, from top to
bottom and then left to right.
Transferring a Patient
Select Patient Mgmt >Transfer on the auxiliary

NOTE
screen, and the user will see a list of online
patients. From this list, select a patient whose bed Transferring a patient to the destination bed will at
will be considered as the destination bed and click the same time discharge the selected patient on
OK, and then the current patient will be transferred the destination bed.
to the destination bed.
Monitoring Statistics
The monitoring statistics of the selected patients  Analyze the average value, maximum/minimum
will be shown in the patient management window. value, and measure time of the
The monitoring statistics covers the total monitoring maximum/minimum value for the trend values.
time for waveforms and trends, the number of
alarm events, the number of NIBP measuring, the
number of C.O. measuring, the number of Quick
TEMP measuring and the number of PAWP
measuring.
Click Analysis, the system will:
 Analyze the number of high and low limit alarms
for each physiological parameter and analyze
the percentage of the limit alarms of the
parameter in all limit alarms.
 Analyze the number of arrhythmia events for
each type of arrhythmia and analyze the
percentage of a certain type of arrhythmia.


Patient Sector
Patient Sector
Networked Monitoring Display . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu in the Patient Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Parameter/ Waveform Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Setting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Real-Time Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Alarm Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Patient Sector
Networked Monitoring Display
 Physiological alarm area: It displays the

physiological alarm messages. Click on the
physiological alarm message, and the list for
the current physiological alarms will be
displayed.
NOTE
Due to the delay of network transmission, data
1 Waveform area viewed on Vista 120 CMS has a delay of 5 s
compared with data generated at the
2 Parameter area corresponding bedside monitor.
3 Patient information area
NOTE
4 Technical alarm/ Prompts/ indicator area
Due to the operating system schedule, the
5 Physiological alarm area waveform scan of Vista 120 CMS might be
 Waveform area and parameter area: It displays suspended for about 20 ms in very few occasions.
some of real-time monitoring waveforms and After the suspension, waveform scan will go back
parameter values. to normal status. The quality of patient monitoring
during the suspension will not be affected.
 Patient information area: It displays the bed
number and patient name.
 Technical alarm/ Prompts/ Indicator area: It
displays the technical alarm messages when a
technical alarm occurs. Click on the technical
alarm message, and the list for the current
technical alarms will be displayed. When no
technical alarms and no prompts occur, it
displays the indicators indicating the state of the
monitors:
Indicator Description
Pace on
Pace off
Alarm mute of the monitor
Alarm pause of the monitor

Patient Sector
Menu in the Patient Sector
When the patient sector is in the improper offline state  Monitor Parameter Setup: Switch to Monitor
or in the networked monitoring state, the user can Parameter Setup window on the auxiliary
open a menu by clicking on the patient information screen.
area. The available items in this menu are:
 NIBP MEASURE: Start a NIBP measurement.
 Display the window in large font: Switch
 Discharge Patient: Discharge the patient in the
between the large font display mode and the
current patient sector.
general display mode for the current patient
sector.  Freeze: Freeze/ unfreeze the waveform in the
current patient sector.
 Display all windows in large font: Switch
between the large font display mode and the  Print: Print the monitoring data in the current
general display mode for all patient sectors. patient sector.
 Parameter/Waveform Setup: Switch to the  Show: Switch between patient sectors.
Parameter/Waveform Setup window on the
 Alarm Reset: Activate alarm reset function.
auxiliary screen.
Parameter/ Waveform Setup
Due to the limited display space of the patient Setting Waveforms

sector, the numbers of waveforms and parameters
to be displayed depends on the numbers of Select or deselect the check box before a Wave
monitors displayed on patient sector. Six Name to display or not display the waveform. Click
waveforms and four parameters to be displayed on Update Wave Setup to confirm the configuration.
patient sector are the maximum. The user can set The patient sector will only display the selected
the displayed waveforms and parameters by waveforms.
setting configuration in the Parameter/Waveform
Setup window. The user may access this window Choose Speed and set the desired sweep speed
by either of the two methods below: for the waveform. Click Update Wave Setup to
confirm the configuration. The waveform will be
 Choose Parameter/ Waveform Setup from the displayed according to the speed the user has set.
menu on the patient sector.
 Click the tag Parameter/ Waveform Setup on
the auxiliary screen. Setting Parameters
 Adding a parameter to be displayed

To add a new parameter to be displayed, select the
desired parameter name in Available Params and
click on Add to add it into Current Params, and
then click on Refresh ParamGroup to update the
parameters displayed on the patient sector.

Patient Sector
 Removing a parameter displayed

NOTE
To remove a parameter displayed, select the Due to the limited display space, the displayed
parameter in the Current Params box, and click on waveforms and parameters of each patient sector
Remove and Refresh ParamGroup. will decrease as the displayed patient sectors
 Setting Parameter Order for Display increase. If the user wants more waveforms and
parameters to be displayed in one patient sector,
To adjust the display position of the parameter, modify the display layout by reducing the patient
select the parameter name in the Current Params sectors displayed on the main screen.
box, and click on Move UP or Move Down. To
make the change valid, click on Refresh
ParamGroup.
Freeze
Choose Freeze from the menu in the patient sector,

the user can freeze the waveform displayed in this
patient sector. And the item name Freeze is
changed into Unfreeze. The user can unfreeze the
waveform by choosing Unfreeze. And then the item
name will resume Freeze.
The waves stop scanning during freeze. The freeze
time and a timeline will also be displayed in the
window. The user can use the arrow buttons
and beside the timeline or drag the pointer on
the freeze wave to review more details.
The user can review 3-minute frozen waveform in
this menu.

Patient Sector
Real-Time Printing
To print real-time data from Vista 120 CMS, click collecting, a dialog box for printing setup will
Print from the menu in the patient sector or click the appear. The printout includes the 11-second
Print button in the single bed window. waveform data at the point of starting printing, data
of all physiological parameters at the time the user
After Print is selected, Vista 120 CMS starts to
selects Print and the latest NIBP measurement
collect data for printing and the system will indicate
before finishing collecting.
Collecting Data… at the top of the main screen.
After the system completes 11-second data
Alarm Reset
Choose Alarm Reset from the menu in the patient

sector to activate the alarm reset function. During
the alarm reset status:
 The audio alarm is turned off, and no alarms are
sounding.
 The visual alarm indications are still displayed.
 Clear all the latched alarms.
 Alarm reset on Vista 120 CMS will also
influence alarm status on bedside monitors.
The on-going alarms are reset both on bedside
monitors and on the corresponding patient
sector on Vista 120 CMS.
NOTE
If a new alarm occurs during the alarm reset
period, the new alarm on Vista 120 CMS will
recover normal. That is, the new alarm will be
sounded and displayed.


Viewing Single Bed
Viewing Single Bed
Display of Single Bed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hiding/Showing Multi-Lead Waveform . . . . . 43
Short Trend Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
OxyCRG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Viewing Single Bed
Display of Single Bed
The Single Bed View sub-window will be displayed  Indicator area: It displays indicators indicating
by default when the user enters the auxiliary screen. the state of the monitors.
 Technical alarm area/ Prompts area: It displays
technical alarm messages consistent with the
messages displayed in the patient sector. The
mouse operation here of technical alarm is the
same as the one in patient sector.
 Physiological alarm area: It displays
physiological alarm messages consistent with
the messages displayed in the patient sector.
The mouse operation here of physiological
alarm is the same as the one in patient sector.
 Short trend area: When the short trend display
is on, the short trend will be displayed in this
1 Patient information area
area. When the short trend display is off,
2 Toolbar waveforms will be displayed in this area.
3 Indicator area  Waveform area: It displays all waveforms from
4 Technical alarm area/ Prompts area the networked monitor.
5 Physiological alarm area  Parameter area: It displays all parameters from

the networked monitor.
6 Short trend area
 Scroll bar: The user can drag the scroll bar to
7 Waveform area view more waveforms and parameters in this
8 Parameter area window.
9 Scroll bar
 Patient information area: It displays the bed
No., patient name, gender and patient type.
 The user can perform the following functions via
the toolbar:
– Freezing or unfreezing the waveforms
displayed in the Single Bed View sub-
window.
– Real-time printing.
– Display setup: choosing the multi-lead
waveform of ECG to be hidden or shown;
setting the short trend display to on or off;
choosing the OxyCRG window to be
opened or closed.

Viewing Single Bed
Hiding/Showing Multi-Lead Waveform
Choose View Selection > Multi-lead on the

toolbar in the Single Bed View sub-window. The
waveform area can display multi-lead waveforms
for ECG. Choose View Selection > Multi-lead
again, and the multi-lead waveform display for ECG
will become unavailable. When 3-lead is used,
multi-lead waveform display is unavailable.
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
Short Trend Review
After entering the single bed view interface, choose Param Select and Interval. The user may select
View Selection > Trend Screen on the toolbar and the desired parameters to be displayed from the
the short trend will be displayed on the left of the drop-down list of Param Select. Also, the user can
interface. Click short trend area and a dialog box of choose Interval on the interface to open the list and
short trend settings will pop up. The user can set select an appropriate interval among 1h, 2h, 4h, 8h
the display mode of the short trend by configuring and 12h.
OxyCRG
In the Single Bed View window, choose View waveform by clicking RR and RESP. The user can
Selection > OxyCRG on the toolbar, and the also set the interval of the OxyCRG to 1 minute,
OxyCRG window will be open. The user can switch 2 minutes or 4 minutes.
the display between respiratory rate and respiratory

Viewing Single Bed
Freeze
The user can freeze the waveform displayed in this

window by choosing Freeze on the toolbar and
unfreeze the waveform by choosing Unfreeze.
The display of freezing waveform in the Single Bed
View sub-window is consistent with the one in the
patient sector.

Viewing bedside monitor’s work status
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
NFC Mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Privacy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Overview
When the bedside monitor is connected to Vista

120 CMS, its real-time work status will be
transmitted to Vista 120 CMS.
Standby Mode
When the monitor is in standby mode, 4 Vista 120 CMS can normally review the history
data.
1 Vista 120 CMS won’t update monitoring data,
and will display monitor's standby mode. The monitor exits standby mode in any of the
conditions:
2 Vista 120 CMS will neither store data
1 The user clicks Exit Standby Mode in the
transmitted from the monitor, nor display
waveforms/parameters/alarms. specific patient sector’ menu.
3 Vista 120 CMS cannot transfer or discharge the 2 Vista 120 CMS admits a new patient.
patient. Printing and freezing functions are
disabled. The patient information cannot be
modified.
NFC Mode*
* This is for French users only and NFC has nothing 5 The audio alarm off status will be finished and
to do with "Near Field Communication". Vista 120 CMS enters normal alarm response
status. Audio Pause will automatically switch to
When the monitor is in NFC mode,
2 minute, which can be set to 1 minute, 2
1 The HR physiological alarms on Vista 120 CMS minute, 3 minute manually.
are always on and can't be set to off by the user.
NOTE
2 Prompt information NFC: On is displayed in HR NFC mode and standby mode can't coexist. When
parameter area. the monitor enters the standby mode, the NFC
3 The user can't turn off the audio alarm mode will automatically pause. After exiting the
permanently. standby mode, the monitor will automatically
resume the NFC mode.
4 HR audio alarms can be turned off via Alarm
Reset in the specific patient sector’s menu.

Privacy Mode
When the monitor is in privacy mode, Vista 120

CMS normally updates and displays monitoring
data, and displays monitor's privacy mode in
technical alarm area of patient sector.


Setting Monitors via Vista 120 CMS
Changing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Setting Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuring NIBP Measurement Settings. . . . . 50
Parameters Alarm Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Changing Patient Information
Refer to Chapter Patient Management Section

Changing Patient Information for more information.
Setting Parameters
The user can open the parameter setup window by parameter attributes, after which the user clicks
two methods: Update Monitor to update the relevant settings of
the monitor.
Method 1: Choose Monitor Parameter Setup in
the patient sector. Clicking button 5 can close parameter setup
window.
Method 2: Select the parameter area in the single
bed interface, and click on the chosen parameter
area.
Configuring NIBP Measurement Settings
2 5
Choose NIBP in the parameter list on the
parameter setup window, and the user can
configure the NIBP measurement settings on the
physiological parameter attribute and configuration
area. The user can modify the measurement mode
1 and measurement interval of NIBP. The operation
steps are shown as follows:
1 Choose a measurement mode.
2 If automatic measurement mode is chosen, the
user also needs to set the measurement
3 4 interval.
1 Physiological parameter list; 3 Click Update Monitor to make the change

valid.
2 Alarm display and configuration list;
4 For a continual measurement, click Continual.
3 Physiological parameter attribute and
configuration;
4 Update Monitor button; Parameters Alarm Setting
5 Button for closing the window
The user can configure the alarm setting via the
The physiological parameter list shows all the alarm display and configuration list on the
available physiological parameter module of the parameter setup window. The user can configure
networked monitor. Choose a parameter, the the alarm threshold, alarm switch, alarm level,
relevant alarm settings and parameter attribute will alarm upper and lower limits. The operation steps
be respectively displayed in Area 2 and Area 3. The are shown as follows:
user can configure the alarm settings and modify

1 Choose a parameter from the physiological

parameter list.
2 Configure the alarm settings in the alarm
display and configuration list.
3 Click Update Monitor to make the change
valid.
ECG ARR alarm setting

Set the threshold of certain arrhythmia alarms.
When an arrhythmia exceeds its threshold, an
alarm will be triggered.
V-Fib/V-Tach and Vent Brady are key ARR alarms
and they are preset to be on. The user can switch
on/off those key ARR alarms only when Key ARR
Alarm Switch Authority is enabled. To enable the
authority, the user should input the required user
maintain password. If any of key ARR alarms is
switched off, the technical alarm area will prompt
Key ARR Alarm Off. Clicking the prompts can view
the details.
Asystole is preset to On and cannot be turned off.
If Key ARR Alarm Switch Authority on the
monitor is Off, the switch setting on Vista 120 CMS
fails. Meanwhile, Vista 120 CMS will prompt the
setting failures.
WARNING
Prior to monitoring, make sure that the alarm
limit settings are appropriate for the patient.
WARNING
When the alarm is set to OFF, Vista 120 CMS
will not give an alarm even if an alarm occurs.
In order to avoid endangering the patient’s
life, the user should use this function
cautiously.
WARNING
Setting alarm limits to extreme values may
cause alarm system to become ineffective. It
is recommended to use the default settings.


Review
Review
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Patient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Patient Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
History Patient Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Backup Patient Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Wave Review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reviewing Normal Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reviewing ECG Compressed Waveforms . . . . 55
Setting Wave Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Refreshing Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Selecting Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Alarm Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Locking and Unlocking Alarm Information . . . . 56
Printing Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Sequencing the Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Annotating Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Filtering Alarm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Trend Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Viewing Parameters selectively . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Refreshing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Printing Trend Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Selecting Trend Table, trend Graph . . . . . . . . . 58
NIBP Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
C.O. Measure Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Quick Temp review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
PAWP review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Review
Overview
Via Vista 120 CMS, The user can review the history PAWP. By clicking on the review button in quick
data of patients, which includes the list containing control area of main screen, the user can enter the
all patients, patient management, trend, alarm, review interface.
wave, NIBP, C.O. measure, Quick TEMP and
Patient List
Clicking review button in quick control area of main Patient Review

screen and the user will access the review
interface. It displays the Patient List by default. By By default, the Patient List displays the patients
respectively selecting the items from the drop-down who have been admitted by Vista 120 CMS after
list shown at the top left corner, the user can review entering the review interface. And also, the default
the list of patients who have been admitted by Vista items from the drop-down lists shown at the top left
120 CMS, the list of patients who have been corner will be Online Database Source and
discharged, and the list of patients saved in the Patient Review.
backup database.
Select a patient and click Discharge Patient, and
The user can select a patient from the list and click this patient will be discharged. The discharged
the Patient Mgmt tab to review detailed information patients will be transferred to the History Patient
of this patient. Also, the user can double click the Review list.
patient name in the list to open the patient
management window. Choose Trend Review,
Alarm Review, Wave Review, NIBP Review, C.O. History Patient Review
measure review, Quick TEMP Review, PAWP
Review, the user can review relevant monitoring
Respectively select Online Database Source and
data of the patient.
History Patient Review from the drop-down lists
There is a query column and a small inverted shown at the top left corner, and the user can
triangular black indicator in the rightmost column. review the list of patients who have been
To search a patient’s information, click the inverted discharged.
triangular black indicator and choose among the
items (such as MRN, patient’s first name, patient’s To delete patients, Select a patient > click Delete >
family name and doctor). Input patient’s information input default User Maintain password ABC in
related with the items and click on Query. If the popup window > click OK to finish deleting. The
patient information is saved, the corresponding patients deleted will be completely deleted from
information is displayed on the screen. Vista 120 CMS.

Review
Backup Patient Review

CAUTION
If a patient is deleted from the History Patient Select Offline Database Source from the drop-
Review list, his or her data will be completely down list shown at the top left corner, and the user
removed from the system. Before deleting, the can review the backup patient data.
backup operation is recommended. Please refer
to section Database backup for details.
Wave Review
The Vista 120 CMS can review the change process In this window, waveforms can also be dynamically
of the physiological waveform of one patient in the displayed.
latest 240 hours. Select User Maintain > Database
Maintain > Waveform Storage, and there are 96
hours and 240 hours for selection. 96 hours is the Reviewing ECG Compressed Waveforms
default selection.
To use waveform review, click on Main Screen > Compressed waveform review is only available to
Review > Wave Review or access the auxiliary ECG waveforms. In the compressed waveform
screen and choose Wave Review. On this screen, review window, the altitude of the ECG waveform
the user can: will be compressed so that the user can review the
waveform containing longer time of data.
 Review normal waveforms or ECG compressed
waveforms
 Set wave speed Setting Wave Speed
 Select waveform By clicking on the Sweep button, a list of available
 Set start time and end time wave speed (i.e. 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s
and 50 mm/s) will be displayed, from which the
 Refresh waveform user can set the width of waveforms displayed in
 Print the waveform area. Changing wave speed will
affect the time length of the waveform area.
Reviewing Normal Waveforms

Refreshing Waveform
Normal waveform review is available to all
waveforms. In the normal waveform review Waveform will not update automatically. Therefore,
window, the waveform is displayed with the same if the user wants to view up-to-date waveform,
altitude and speed of the real-time waveform. refresh them manually. Clicking on the Refresh
button will refresh the waveform.
The user can select Show parameters/Hide
parameters. If Show parameters is chosen, the
related parameter value will also be displayed Selecting Waveform
accompanying the waveform.
Click on the Select Wave button, and a list of

Review
available waveforms will be shown. By default, all Time Setup

waveforms are selected. The user can deselect a
waveform by ticking its check box. Click Time Setup button, set Start Time in pop-up
dialog box, and click OK to finish.
NOTE
The 240-hour full disclosure waveform storage will
occupy a lot of hard disc. Therefore, the user shall Print
be cautious to add the useless waveform
information to the waveform setup. To print the waveform displayed on the current
screen, select Print on the screen to print it by the
laser printer.
Alarm Review
Alarm table and waveform will be generated when Printing Alarm Information
Vista 120 CMS makes physiological alarm
notification. Alarm review helps the clinician If the user wants to print alarm table, he/ she can
observe the details of the monitoring information. click on Print on the interface to print it by a laser
Alarm information can be stored by the user and printer.
thus become important alarm event.
NOTE
The alarm strip in alarm review is a 16-second The important alarm events can be deleted but not
waveform. User can also switch alarms by using automatically .The unimportant alarm events can
keyboard arrow keys. be automatically replaced by new alarm events
when they have accumulated to a certain amount.
NOTE
A maximum of 20000 alarm information (within NOTE
240 hours) can be stored. If the storage space is The alarm stripe displays the physiological
full and there are new alarms occurring, the waveform at 25mm/s when an alarm takes place.
earliest alarm information will disappear.
Sequencing the Alarm List

Locking and Unlocking Alarm
Information The user can sequence all alarms ascendingly or
descendingly by clicking on the heading of any
When the user thinks that an alarm is very column:
important, he/she can save it by locking the alarm  Alarm Time: Clicking on it will sequence all
information with a symbol √ on the alarm review alarms ascendingly or descendingly by time.
interface. The symbol √ will appear to its right on
this interface when the alarm is locked. The locked  Alarm Level: Clicking on it will sequence all
alarm cannot be deleted automatically. The user alarms ascendingly or descendingly by level.
can click on the symbol √ to unlock the locked At the same time, one of the following symbols will
alarm, the symbol √ will disappear. appear on the bottom of the heading:

Review
 The symbol ▲ indicates ascending sequence, move the cursor out of the area of the input box,
and and Vista 120 CMS will automatically save the input
information.
 The symbol ▼ indicates descending sequence.
NOTE
Input characters are limited to 256.
Annotating Alarm
The user can add notes to illuminate an alarm. To Filtering Alarm Events
annotate an alarm, select a certain alarm stripe and
the user will see the title Alarm Note on the bottom The user can filter alarm events by selecting or
of the alarm review interface. Move the cursor 1cm clearing the check boxes before the items in the
left to the title Alarm Note and a pop-up input box Alarm Level list, in the Event Type list and in the
in which the user can input detailed information for Param Select list. The Alarm Review window will
the alarm will appear. After completing the notes, only display the alarm events whose alarm level
/levels has/have be selected and the alarm events
of selected parameters.
Trend Review
Choose Main Screen > Review > Trend Review change the resolution, select Resolution Setting
or choose Trend Review on the auxiliary screen, on the interface and select the desired option from
and the user will enter the trend review interface, the list.
through which up to 240 hours of trend data can be
stored and reviewed. Change of trends can be
observed through trend table and trend graph. Viewing Parameters selectively
On this interface, the user can:
In the parameter list of Param Select, the user can
 set the resolution
select modules or parameters by ticking their check
 view parameters selectively boxes as required. Only the selected parameters
are displayed in the graph or table.
 refresh the data
When a parameter module is selected or
 print
unselected, all of its parameters will be selected or
 set the starting and ending time for review. unselected accordingly.
Setting Resolution Refreshing Data
The user can select a time period as the resolution Trend data will not update automatically. Therefore,
for viewing the graph and table as required. Options if the user wants to view up-to-date trend data,
are 1 s, 5 s, 1 min, 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, refresh them manually. Click on the Refresh button
2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, Display Time Points to refresh the data to up-to date. After refreshing
for NIBP Measurements and Display Time them, the status selected and order of parameters
Points for Quick TEMP Measurements. To remain unchanged.

Review
Printing Trend Review Trend data in trend table is displayed according to

the selected resolution. If NIBP or Quick TEMP is
Clicking on Trend Review > Print > Print Trend selected in Param Select, NIBP data or Quick
Table/ Print Trend Graph, the trend table and TEMP and other parameters’ data within the
trend graph can be printed. By default, the system resolution will also be displayed.
will print the latest data. The y-axis scale in trend graph will automatically
adjust according to the x-axis time, in order to
achieve the optimum display effect.
Selecting Trend Table, trend Graph
Select Trend table to review the trend table only.

Select Trend Graph to review the trend graph only.
Select Trend Table, Trend Graph to review the
trend table and trend graph at the same time.
NIBP Review
Results of four latest NIBP measurements are  Click Show parameters, and the measurement
displayed in the NIBP area in the Single Bed View values of all physiological parameters at the
window. measure time specified in the selected item will
be shown in the lower portion of the window.
To review earlier NIBP measurement results,
Click Hide parameters, and these
choose Main Screen > Review > NIBP Review or
measurements values will not be displayed.
choose NIBP Review on the auxiliary screen to
enter the NIBP review interface, through which up  Refresh
to 20000 groups of NIBP measurements of a
 Print out the current page
patient (within 240 hours) can be viewed.
 Print out all pages
The NIBP review window displays Serial No.,
Measure Time, SYS, DIA, MAP and PR for each
measurement. Additionally, in this window the user
can:
C.O. Measure Review
Choose Main Screen > Review > C.O. Measure In the C.O. Measure Review window, measure
Review or choose C.O. Measure Review on the results are arranged chronologically on the left.
auxiliary screen, and up to 20000 groups of C.O. Select a measure result and the measure value as
measurement of the current patient in this window well as the curve will be displayed on the right. A
(within 240 hours) can be reviewed. maximum of six groups of measure results can be
displayed simultaneously.

Review
At the lower part of the window, the average values The user can print the selected measure results.
of C.O and CI of the selected measure results are
displayed.
Quick Temp review
Choose Main Screen > Review > Quick TEMP window can be reviewed. The Quick TEMP
Review or choose Quick TEMP Review on the measure result and measure time are available.
auxiliary screen, and up to 20000 groups of Quick The user can print the Quick TEMP measurement
TEMP measurement (within 240 hours) in this list.
PAWP review
Choose Main Screen > Review > PAWP Review

or choose PAWP Review on the auxiliary screen,
and up to 20000 groups of PAWP measurement
(within 240 hours) in this window can be reviewed.
The user can print the PAWP measurement list.


System Setup
System Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Common Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Parameter Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Color Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
User Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Monitor Batch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Date/Time Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Alarm Setup for Vista 120 CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Changing Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Database Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
EMR database maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Other Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
User Password Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operation Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Certificate Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

System Setup
Overview
The System Setup function is used to modify the the parameter list as desired. There are Common
display information at the patient sector according Setup, User Maintain, and Factory Maintain to be
to the real requirements. By using this function, the set.
user can observe the waveform, parameter, and
Common Setup
It is mainly used to make some conventional After setting, the color displayed on Color Setup
monitoring settings, such as Param Unit Setup, column is the successfully chosen color. The color
Color Settings, Display Setup, and Help. on Initial Color column is set by default.
To get the default color, choose desired parameter
from Param Select and click Default Settings, and
Parameter Unit Setup then click OK to confirm.
The user can change the unit of IBP, NIBP, CO2,
(AG) CO2, (AG) O2, C.O. (TB), (RM) CO2 and
Display Setup
TEMP. For example, to change the unit of IBP,
select Main Screen > System Setup > Common
The user can set the number of beds to be viewed
Setup > Param Unit Setup, and select the desired
on the screen. To change the display to be viewed,
unit among mmHg, kpa and cmH2O from the pull-
select Main Screen > System Setup > Common
down list at the right of IBP.
Setup > Display Setup > Display Bed Number
and choose the desired bed number 3, 4, 6, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 32, 64 from the drop-down list of display
Color Setup bed.
The user can change the display color of all The user can also click the area which displays bed
parameters and the other information of the No., and then click Set Idle Bed.
parameter is displayed as the same color. And the There’re two routes to change the monitor’s
information includes waveform name, gain and position:
filter, real-time value (upper limit and lower limit),
review waveform and so on. To change the color of Route 1: Drag the area which displays bed No. to
the parameter: any position you want.
1 Select Main Screen > System Setup > Route 2: Select Main Screen > System Setup >
Common Setup > Color Setup. Click on the Common Setup > Display Setup > Sequence,
Param Select to choose desired parameter, the monitor’s position will be sequenced according
then choose desired color from the left color to the Bed No..
area or input desired RGB values of red, green, The monitor is assigned to the patient sector
blue directly. according to the sequence of left to right and top to
2 After this, click on OK to confirm. bottom.

System Setup
NOTE Help
Two screens are needed if the user wants to
Help information is available on this interface.
simultaneously display the information of 64
bedside monitors.
User Maintain
To access the settings interface of user maintain, NOTE

input a user password. The default password is
If the patient type set in Templet of Alarm Limit
ABC.
Adjusting Range is different from the one set on
the bedside monitor to be configured, the system
may fail to set the configuration for the monitor.
Monitor Batch Settings
NOTE
The user can configure the alarm limit, alarm switch
The prompt message Success only indicates
and alarm level for a group of monitors. The user
success in setting the configuration for current
needs to choose a patient type from Adult, Pediat
activated parameters on the monitor.
or Neonat before configuring the alarm settings in
Templet of Alarm Limit Adjusting Range.
Choose the monitors to be configured in the right
Date/Time Setup
pane in which the user may see a list of monitors,
and click Config. The configuration in the left
The user can set the correct date and time and their
templet pane will be applied to the chosen
desired format. There are three kinds of date
monitors.
format: yyyy-MM-dd, dd-MM-yyyy, MM-dd-yyyy,
Besides, from the right pane, the user can choose two kinds of time format: HH-mm-ss (24 hours) and
a monitor whose alarm settings will serve as the hh-mm-ss tt (12 hours), and three date separator:
source of batch settings for other monitors. Select /, - and. To change the date and time setup, select
one monitor in the right pane and click Obtain Main Screen > System Setup > User Maintain >
Monitor Configuration to obtain its parameter Date /Time Setup, and select the desired settings
alarm settings. The obtained configuration will be from the menu. The time and date displayed on the
displayed in the left templet pane. Choose the main screen will also change after change the date
monitors to be configured in the right pane and click and time setup and their format.
Config to complete batch settings.
NOTE
NOTE The user must restart the system to make the
The function of batch setting is not available for all change effective.
monitors. If the monitor is labeled as Not
Supported in the Compatibility column in the WARNING
right pane, this function is not available for this
During patient monitoring, a change in date
monitor.
and time will influence the storage of trend
data.

System Setup
Alarm Setup for Vista 120 CMS Changing Language
Choose Main Screen > System Setup > User To change the display language, select Main
Maintain > Alarm Setup Screen > System Setup > User Maintain, and
input the correct password. Select Language
 The user can configure the alarm setting for
Setup and select the desired language from the
Vista 120 CMS.
drop-down list.
The user can set the duration in drop-down list of
NOTE
Audio Pause to 1 minute, 2 minute, 3 minute or
Permanent. The system will restart automatically to make the
change effective.
When the option is 1 minute, 2 minute or 3
minute, the user can click audio pause symbol in
main interface to activate Audio Pause. System HL7
can exit the audio pause status automatically when
the duration time is out, or user can click audio In User Maintain window, users can set the interval
pause symbol again to exit. for HL7 data to be sent and set the format of HL7
When the option is Permanent, the user can click data package sent by Vista 120 CMS. The interval
audio pause symbol in main interface to activate can be set to 30 s (default) to 7200 s. HL7 data is
sent in the format of MLLP (HL7 Mini Lower Layer
Alarm Mute. The icon is displayed at the top Protocol) by default. If XML is selected, the data
area of the screen. Clicking audio pause symbol sent by Vista 120 CMS will be packed in XML
again can be used to exit alarm mute status only. format. NIBP uploading method can be set to
Upload for First Time or Upload for Every Time
 The user can set alarm sound intervals for Vista
(default).
120 CMS.
NOTE
The user can set alarm sound intervals by choosing
the desired intervals from the drop-down list of HL7 data is sent via the port 9100 by default.
High Alarm Interval (s), Med Alarm Interval (s)
and Low Alarm Interval(s).
Database Maintain
 The user can set alarm ringtone for Vista 120
CMS.
Refer to Section Database Backup for more
The user can choose different alarm ringtone as information about database backup.
desired from the drop-down list of Alarm Tone.
Click Play to confirm. Standard and Mode 1 are
optional. The default option is Standard. EMR database maintenance
NOTE
To delete the unnecessary HIS/EMR patient
In audio pause or alarm mute status, though a new information, select Main Screen > System Setup
alarm occurs, system will not give out alarm
> User Maintain > EMR Database Maintenance.
sound.
The patients are sorted according to the status. The
user can choose Admitted in CMS/Wait for
admitting/Discharged in CMS/All to delete the
unused information.

System Setup
Other Setups Certificate Management
On this interface, the user can: To set TLS bidirectional authentication

communication, select User Maintain >
 Set Hospital Info. and Department. The Certificate Management.
hospital information and department will be
displayed at the top left corner on the main After successfully imporing CA Certificate (.cer),
screen. Server Certificate (.cer) and Private Key
Certificate (.key.pem), and confirming the Private
 Choose to display or conceal the grid in the
Key Password, TLS commnunication can be built.
View window by selecting or clearing the check
box of Display Grid on View.
 Return to Windows. About
 Switch off the system.
It offers information about the software compiling
time and software version.
User Password Setting
To modify the password, enter the old password in

the Old Password field and a new one in the New
Password field, after which the user has to
Confirm new password to complete the
modification.
NOTE
If the password is forgotten, contact the technical
representative of Dräger. If the Factory Maintain
password is used to enter the Other Setups
menu, the user can directly reset the user
password without inputting the old password.
Operation Log
In User Maintain window, user can scan All

operation contents which include Modify Patient
Info. (The modifications finished on monitoring
device, Vista 120 CMS and EMR system can be
scanned), Clear Database, Delete Patient Info.,
Discharge, Transfer, Backup, Enter Standby
Mode, Exit Standby Mode and related ADT
operations. The user also can select one of
operation contents to scan. Clicking Export can
export operation contents.


Alarm Management
Alarm Management
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Physiological Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Technical Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Alarm Level of the Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Alarm Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Audio Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alarm Prompt/Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alarms for Networking Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Alarm Management
Overview
Alarms, triggered by a physiological sign that Physiological alarms are implemented by alarm
appears abnormal or by technical problems of the limits, which define a range in which a certain
monitor, are sent to Vista 120 CMS by the monitors physiological parameter is considered to be in the
and then indicated to the users by Vista 120 CMS. normal status. When a parameter value is beyond
Alarms coming from the monitors are displayed in the range, the system will consider it to be in an
the patient sectors and in the single bed view abnormal status and consequently give an alarm.
window.
The alarm and prompts coming from Vista 120
CMS system are displayed in the system
Technical Alarm
information area on the upper screen.
Technical alarms refer to the technical alarms of
bedside monitor. Technical alarms of bedside
NOTE
monitor refer to alarms other than physiological
The alarm signal will be delayed for no more than alarms, including hardware failure, communication
5 s. error, lead off, etc. For these technical alarms, the
system presents four different types of audible and
visual prompts.
Physiological Alarm
When a group of technical alarms (for example,
transducer falls off) produced by multi-parameter
It includes parameter alarm and arrhythmia alarm. monitors, a piece of alarm prompt information in
Physiological alarm arouses the doctors’ attention scrolling mode will appear on the main screen of
by means of visual and audible methods specified Vista 120 CMS. In addition, Vista 120 CMS will
in harmonized international standard. Visual sound corresponding alarm (high, medium or low
method is realized basically by the way of level alarm). The corresponding bedside monitor
lightening or flicking of the color light. Audible status indicator will also show corresponding signal
method is realized by the sound for different levels. color (high, medium or low level alarm signal color).
Alarm Level of the Monitors
Alarm level reflects the severity of an alarm. The

alarms have three groups regarding the alarm
levels.
 High level alarm
 Medium level alarm
 Low level alarm

Alarm Management
Alarm Mute
For information about how to set alarm mute, refer

NOTE
to Section Alarm Setup for Vista 120 CMS. Alarm
mute means that when an alarm occurs, the system The alarm mute function is only valid for Vista 120
will not give an alarm sound but only maintain a CMS itself. Vista 120 CMS cannot silence the
visual prompt. bedside monitor’s audible alarm.
Audio Pause
Audio Pause means that during a period of time, When the duration of alarm pause has lasted for the
when an alarm occurs, the system will not give preset-time, the system will stop the status of alarm
alarm announcement. The duration setting is pause and resume normal alarm automatically.
introduced in Section Alarm Setup for Vista 120
CMS. By click the Audio Pause button on the main NOTE
screen, the audio pause function can be activated The alarm pause function is only valid for Vista 120
or deactivated. CMS itself. Vista 120 CMS cannot pause the
bedside monitor’s audible alarm.
Alarm Prompt/Response
Alarm information can be prompted by means of  An asterisk or more will be displayed before the
visual and audible methods. Because the alarm physiological alarm message to indicate the
information is very important and timely response alarm level.
to the alarm information is highly required, Vista
High level alarm: ***
120 CMS provides the following methods to
indicate to the user the occurrence of the alarm. Medium level alarm: **
 The alarm message will be displayed in the Low level alarm: *
technical area or physiological area of the  For limit alarms of the parameter, the relevant
patient sector and of the single bed view parameter value and parameter alarm limit will
window. be respectively displayed with the color
High level alarm: displayed with red alternating between the parameter color and
background the alarm color.
Medium level alarm: displayed with yellow  Alarm tone
background If the system mute, alarm mute or alarm pause
Low level alarm: displayed with yellow setup is deactivated, the system will warn the
background user about the alarm with the alarm tone.

Alarm Management
The alarm tone can be set to Standard or Mode 1:

Mode 1:
High level alarm: sound "Ding-Ding-Ding-Ding-
Standard: Ding-Ding";
High level alarm: sound "DO-DO-DO DO-DO Medium level alarm: sound "Ding-Ding-Ding";
DO-DO-DO DO-DO";
Low level alarm: sound "Ding-".
Medium level alarm: sound "DO-DO-DO";
The sound pressure range for standard audible
Low level alarm: sound "DO- ". alarm signals is from 45 dB to 85 dB, and for
Mode 1 is from 30 dB to 85 dB.
Alarms for Networking Status
When the monitor is online, the system will

indicate it with low level alarm sound.
If the monitor is offline without being discharged
(that is improper offline), system will indicate it
respectively with low level/medium level alarm
sound. The alarm sound for improper offline will be
given out only once.
NOTE
In good network status, if there are no patients
online, Vista 120 CMS will give out a high level
alarm sound with intervals of 20 s.

Printing
Printing
Printing Report with a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Printing Preview/ Printing Settings. . . . . . . . 72

Printing Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Exporting the PDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Printing
Printing Report with a Printer
Vista 120 CMS can output the reports by equipped  Trend table printing
with a laser printer. HP LaserJet Series printers are
 NIBP review printing
recommended. The laser printer working with Vista
120 CMS is independent of the mainframe. The  Printing for drug calculation, hemodynamic
printer has its independent power supply. It is calculation, oxygenation calculation, renal
connected to the mainframe via a USB interface or function calculation and ventilation
a network (wired or wireless). calculation
The laser printer generates the following types of  Patient information printing
printing:
 C.O. review printing
 Waveform review printing
 Quick TEMP review printing
 Alarm wave printing
 PAWP review printing
 Alarm table printing
 Trend graph printing NOTE
Vista 120 CMS only supports printing on A4 paper.
Printing Preview/ Printing Settings
Printing Preview Printing Settings
Before the reports are printed, the user can preview Click on Print on the preview interface, and in the
them on the screen. The user will access the Print setup menu select the printer, the print range
preview interface after selecting the function of and the number of copies in demand and then click
printing. If a report consists of more than one page, on OK to confirm it.
the user may select a certain page to preview by
turning to the page as desired. Besides, the user
can adjust the zoom setting by choosing a certain
option from the drop-down list of the SIZE.
Exporting the PDF File
Vista 120 CMS can export the PDF file by installing CMS installation disk. Also, the user may download
a PDF printer software. The software PDFCreator it from the website
is recommended. The user can obtain the http://www.pdfforge.org/pdfcreator.
installation version of PDFCreator in the Vista 120

Printing
To export the PDF file, choose a PDF printer (for

instance, PDFCreator) from the drop-down list
when the user selects the printers, and then confirm
it by clicking on OK.


Database Management
Database Management
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Database backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reviewing backup database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Database Management
Overview
Vista 120 CMS provides database backup and

review, which allows the user to conveniently
manage and maintain data.
Database backup
To backup database, select Main Screen > NOTE

System Setup > User Maintain, and input the
Regular data backup operations are
correct password. Select Database Maintain and
recommended.
click on the button Browse to choose a directory for
backup file storage. Then click on Backup
NOTE
Database to start database backup.
The system will prompt when there is excessive
NOTE amount of history patient data. Clean the history
During database backup, Vista 120 CMS patient data manually in time. The user can clean
automatically stops its patient monitoring. the data by item (refer to chapter History patient
review for detailed operations), or clean the data
all at once in batches by ticking the check box
NOTE
mentioned above. It is recommended to perform
If the check box indicating “Empty local database backup operation before cleaning up the data.
after backup is completed” is ticked, Vista 120
CMS will empty the local database after database
backup is completed; whether this check box is
ticked or not, Vista 120 CMS will restart
automatically after backup is completed.
Reviewing backup database
Vista 120 CMS allows the user to review the NOTE

backup data at any time.
It takes about 3 to 10 s for Vista 120 CMS to load
To review backup data, select Main Screen > the backup data.
Review > Patient List, and select the directory for
storing backup file from the drop-down list of NOTE
Offline Database Source. For more information During reviewing backup data, discharging or
about review, refer to Chapter Review. deleting patients is unavailable.

Calculation and Titration Table
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Drug Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Drug Calculation Formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Calculation of Titration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hemodynamic Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Renal Function Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Oxygenation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ventilation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

General
Vista 120 CMS provides functions including drug Vista 120 CMS is able to save a maximum of 100
calculation and titration table, hemodynamic groups of results for every type of calculation. In the
calculation, oxygenation calculation, renal function calculation window, the user can use the Save
calculation and ventilation calculation; the button to save the calculation results and use
calculation results can be printed out. Click on Calculation Result List to review each calculation
Calculation in the status of single bed view to result.
access the drug calculation screen.
Drug Calculation
From the Drug drop-down list, the user can select 1 Confirm whether the patient type is correct and
one to calculate its amount, liquid volume, the weight is entered.
concentration, etc.
2 Select a drug to be calculated from the drug list.
 Drug A
3 Input correct parameter values under the
 Drug B direction of a doctor.
 Drug C 4 Select Basic, Dose Type and Step for titration
table.
 Drug D
5 Click on the Calc button, the calculation result
 Drug E
will be displayed in the drug parameter area and
 AMINOPHYLLINE titration table.
 DOBUTAMINE WARNING
 DOPAMINE Be sure to input correct parameter values. The
user must verify the correctness of the
 EPINEPHRINE
calculations displayed on the screen before
 HEPARIN using them.
 ISUPREL
WARNING
 LIDOCAINE The calculations in the titration table are
 NIPRIDE subject to the drug calculations, therefore, the
correctness of the drug calculations must be
 NITROGLYCERIN ensured. Besides, the basic, step and dose
 PITOCIN type should be ensured correct.
NOTE WARNING
Drug A, Drug B, Drug C, Drug D and Drug E are We assume no responsibility for the results
user-defined drugs. arising from incorrect inputs and operations.
The calculation procedure is listed below:

Drug Calculation Formula 1 The core method for the calculation of titration
table is: concentration = dose / flow rate. The
Formulas for drug calculation are: calculating method of titration table is to keep
the fixed concentration, change the dose to
Concentration = amount / volume calculate the flow rate or change the flow rate to
Flow rate = dose / concentration calculate the dose. Concentration here is
obtained from drug calculation.
Total dose = dose × duration
2 The titration table can be displayed by way of
Total volume = flow rate × duration dose and rate. The user can enter the rate step
from 1-10. There are four options available for
WARNING dose unit: mg/hour, mg/min, mg/Kg/hour and
Prior to performing drug calculation, the mg/Kg/min, among which mg will vary with the
above formulas must be confirmed. Our unit changes in drug calculation.
company will not be liable for any 3 The calculating result of titration table is
consequence resulted from using displayed in the list. The user can click on the
inappropriate formulas. scroll bar to browse more calculating results.
Relationship between calculation units:

WARNING
1 g = 1000 mg The calculating result of titration table
1 mg = 1000 mcg depends on the calculating result of drug.
First of all, the calculating result of drug
1 K unit = 1000 units should be accurate. And then, the calculating
1 M unit = 1000 K units result of titration is concerned with the input
titration control parameters and the
calculating formula. Therefore, the user must
WARNING
ensure the correctness of all these mentioned
Correct drug unit must be entered. Our operations. Our company will not be liable for
company will not be liable for any any consequence resulted from improper
consequence resulted from incorrect input. operations.
Calculation of Titration Table
Calculation of titration table is included on the

screen of drug calculation. The titration table is
located at the lower part of the drug calculation
screen. The method for calculation of titration
table is:

Hemodynamic Calculation
Input Parameters

PAWP mmHg Pulmonary artery wedge pressure
CVP mmHg Central venous pressure
C.O. L/min Cardiac output
HR bpm Heart rate
EDV ml End-diastolic volume
AP MAP mmHg Mean Artery Pressure
PA MAP mmHg Pulmonary artery mean pressure
PAP mmHg Pulmonary artery pressure
Height cm /
Weight kg /
Output Parameters

CI L/min/m2 Cardiac index C.O. / BSA
SV ml Stroke volume C.O. / HR × 1000
SVR DS/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance 80 × (AP MAP – CVP) / C.O.
PVR DS/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance 80 × (PA MAP – PAWP) / C.O.
LCW kg·m Left cardiac work 0.0136 × AP MAP × C.O.
LVSW g·m Left ventricular stroke work 0.136 × (AP MAP – PAWP) × SV
EF / Ejection fraction SV / EDV × 100%
SVI ml/m2 Stroke volume index SV / BSA
SVRI DS·m2/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance index SVR / BSA
PVRI DS·m2/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance index PVR / BSA
LCWI kg·m/m2 Left cardiac work index LCW / BSA
LVSWI g·m/m2 Left ventricular stroke work index LVSW / BSA
RCW kg·m Right cardiac work 0.0136 × PA MAP × C.O.
RVSW g·m Right ventricular stroke work 0.0136 × (PAP – PAWP) × SV
RCWI kg·m/m2 Right cardiac work index RCW / BSA
RVSWI g·m/m2 Right ventricular stroke work index RVSW / BSA

Renal Function Calculation
Input Parameters

URK mmol/L Urine potassium
URNa mmol/L Urinary sodium
Urine ml/24h Urine
Posm mOsm/kgH2O Plasm osmolality
Uosm mOsm/kgH2O Urine osmolality
SerNa mmol/L Serum sodium
SCr umol/L Serum creatinine
UCr umol/L Urine creatinine
BUN mmol/L Blood urea nitrogen
UUN mmol/L Urine urea nitrogen
Height cm /
Weight kg /
Type / Patient type: Adult, Pediat, Neonat
Gender / Male, Female, N/A.
Output Parameters

URNaEx mmol/24h Urine sodium excretion URNa × Urine / 1000
URKEx mmol/24h Urine potassium excretion URK × Urine / 1000
CUUN ml/min Urine urea nitrogen clearance rate UUN × Urine / (BUN × 24 × 60)
CNa ml/24h Clearance of sodium URNa × Urine / (SerNa)
CCr ml/min Creatinine clearance rate (UCr × Urine) / (SCr × 24 × 60)
Cosm ml/min Osmolar clearance (Uosm × Urine) / (Posm × 24 × 60)
FENa % Fractional excretion of sodium (URNa × SCr) / (UCr × SerNa) × 100%
FEUr % Fractional Excretion of Urea (SCr × UUN) / (UCr × BUN) × 100%
BUN/SCr / Blood urea nitrogen creatinine ratio (BUN / SCr) × 1000
CH2O ml/24h Free water clearance Urine – Uosm × Urine / Posm
U/P osm / Urine to plasma osmolality ratio Uosm / Posm
U/SCr / Urine-serum creatinine ratio UCr / SCr
Na/K % Sodium potassium ratio URNa / URK × 100%

Oxygenation Calculation
Input Parameters

SaO2 % Arterial oxygen saturation
PvO2 mmHg Partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood
SvO2 % Venous oxygen saturation
Hb g/L Hemoglobin
Height cm /
Weight kg /
CI l/min/m2 Cardiac index
Output Parameters
English Full
Items Unit Formula
Name/Description
VO2 ml/(min.m2) Oxygen consumption Ca-v O2 × CI
Hb × 1.34 × SaO2/100% +
CaO2 ml/L Arterial oxygen content
(0.0031 × PaO2)
Hb × 1.34 × SvO2/100% +
CvO2 ml/L Venous oxygen content
(0.0031 × PvO2)
Arterial venous oxygen
Ca-v O2 ml/L CaO2 – CvO2
content difference
O2ER / Oxygen extraction ratio (VO2 / DO2) × 100%
DO2 ml/(min.m2) Oxygen transport CaO2 × CI
Partial pressure of oxygen PiO2-PACO2 × [FiO2/100% +

PAO2 mmHg
in the alveoli (1-FiO2/100%) / RQ]

difference
CC’O2 ml/L Capillary oxygen content PAO2 × 0.003 + 1.34 × SaO2/100% × Hb
Qs/Qt / Venous admixture (CC’O2 – CaO2) / (CC’O2 – CvO2) × 100%
C.O. L/min Cardiac output VO2 /( Ca-v O2 × BSA)
AaDO2/PaO2 / Spiro-index (PAO2 – PaO2) / PaO2× 100%
DO2I ml/(min.m2) Oxygen delivery index DO2/BSA
Oxygen consumption
VO2I ml/(min.m2) index VO2/BSA
Ventilation Calculation
Input Parameters

RR rpm Respiration rate
VT ml Tidal volume
PEEP cmH2O Positive end-expiratory pressure
PEEPi cmH2O Intrinsic PEEP
PeCO2 mmHg Partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2
Ppeak cmH2O The peak inspiratory pressure

Output Parameters
English Full
Items Unit Formula
Name/Description
Partial pressure of oxygen PiO2-PaCO2 × [FiO2/100% + (1-
PAO2 mmHg
in the alveoli FiO2/100%)/RQ]
difference
MV L/min Minute volume VT × RR/1000
AaDO2/PaO2 / Spiro-index (PAO2 – PaO2) / PaO2 × 100%
VA L/min Alveolar volume (VT – VD) × RR/1000
Volume of physiological
VD ml [(PaCO2 – PeCO2) × VT] / PaCO2
dead space
Physiological dead space in
VD/VT / (PaCO2 – PeCO2) / PaCO2 × 100%
percent of tidal volume
Cdyn ml/cmH2O Compliance dynamic VT / (Ppeak – PEEP – PEEPi)

CMS-WEB Observer
CMS-WEB Observer
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Typical Screens of the CMS-WEB . . . . . . . . . 86
Starting/ Shutting Down the System. . . . . . . 88

Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Common Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Administrator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Viewing Single Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Single Bed View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Waveform Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarm Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trend Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NIBP Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CMS-WEB Observer
General
The CMS-WEB Observer system is a medical The CMS-WEB Observer displays patients’
information device applied in clinical monitoring physiological information collected by Vista 120
field. It realizes remote monitoring by reviewing CMS central monitoring system. The system
real-time and history data from central monitoring displays information of up to 32 bedside monitors
system through web page. A CMS-WEB network from Vista 120 CMS.
system is constructed by connecting multiple
NOTE
monitors and Vista 120 CMS central monitoring
systems. Being the center of the monitoring The CMS-WEB Observer is only available via the
network, the system realizes remote monitoring by hospital local area network.
collecting, processing, and analyzing the
physiological information from the central NOTE
monitoring systems. Medical staff can obtain Vista 120 CMS supports the maximum of 6
patient information by visiting the server of Vista accounts at the same time.
120 CMS via the browser.
Typical Screens of the CMS-WEB
The CMS-WEB shares similar screen features with displaying the system prompt information. The
Vista 120 CMS. The main screen of the CMS-WEB middle part is the main monitoring area. The bottom
has three areas. At the top of the screen is the area part is the system menu area.

CMS-WEB Observer
Structure of the main screen:  The red color in the alarm area of the patient
sector indicates the bedside monitor has high
1 Information area
priority alarm.
Displaying the hospital name and current system
 The yellow color in the alarm area of the patient
time.
sector indicates the bedside monitor has a
2 Main monitoring screen medium or low priority alarm.
Indicating the current status of each bedside When four or less than four bedside monitors are
monitor: networked, the layout of patient sectors will be of
single row.
 The onscreen bedside monitors are networked.
When over four bedside monitors are networked,

the screen displays patient sectors with a maximum
of eight bedside monitors.
NOTE
The number of displayed waveforms on each
patient sector will vary with the resolution of the
computer monitor. The maximum number of
waveforms displayed on each patient sector is
four. It is recommended to use computer monitors
with the resolution of 1028 × 1024 or 1440 × 900.
NOTE
The alarms on CMS-WEB may be delayed, and
the delay time depends on the actual network
environment. Refer to the displaying on Vista 120
CMS for alarms.

CMS-WEB Observer
3 Main menu
The main menu is at the bottom of the screen. Click
on it to access corresponding windows or perform
corresponding functions.
If one patient sector is selected for single bed 4 Control icons

reviewing, the button Return Main Screen will Control icon area includes the following icons:
appear at the bottom left corner, selecting which
can return to the main screen.
Icons Operating method
Click on it to return to the main screen.
Click on it to enter the system setup menu.
Click on it to log out of the system.
Click on it, the volume adjustor icon appears. Tick the Mute check box,
the entire system become mute until a new alarm occurs. To deselect the
silence function, tick the Mute check box again. Additionally, the user can drag
the volume adjustor to the desired volume.
Starting/ Shutting Down the System
NOTE Starting the System

Before starting the system, make sure Vista 120
Before starting the system, make sure the
CMS has been installed in the computer.
computer in which the CMS-WEB Observer server
Otherwise, the user cannot use the CMS-WEB.
is installed has been installed with the IIS (Internet
Information System) groupware as well. Assume
that the IP address of the server is 192.168.11.138;
to start the CMS-WEB, the user should enter

CMS-WEB Observer
http://192.168.11.138/MFM-CMS/ into the address Shutting Down the System

bar of the browser and input user name as well as
password in the login window to access the system. The user can shut down the system via either of the
following two methods:
NOTE Method 1: Click on the Logout button at the
The default user name for administrator is “admin”; bottom right corner onscreen.
default password is “test”. The user can change Method 2: Click on the button at the top right
the user name and password after accessing the corner onscreen.
system.
NOTE
The administrator is able to create other
administrators and users. The default password
for creating new users is “123456”.
System Setup
The user can access the system setup menu by Setting Parameter Unit
clicking on System Setup and configure the
Select System Setup > Common Setup > Unit
following items: Common Setup and
Setup; the user can change the units of IBP, NIBP,
Administrators Setup.
CO2, AG CO2, AG O2, C.O.TB and TEMP.
NOTE
The available setup items may vary with different Setting Multi-Bed Waveform
users due to different users’ access authority. Both Select System Setup > Common Setup > Wave
Common Setup and Administrators Setup are In Multi-bed; the user can set the physiological
available for the administrator while only Common waveforms displayed on the patient sectors. In this
Setup is available for general users. window, the left column displays the waveform
names; the right column displays the waveform
names which have been selected.
Common Setup  Adding a waveform to be displayed:
To add a displayed waveform, choose one from the
Setting User Information left column and click on Add so that it can be added
Select System Setup > Common Setup > to the right column.
Personal Infor., and the user can change the user  Deleting a displayed waveform
name, name, gender, department, and so on.
To delete a displayed waveform, choose one from
the right column and click on Remove so that it can
Setting Password be deleted from the waveform display area.
Select System Setup > Common Setup >
Password Change; the user can change the login
password.

CMS-WEB Observer
the Wave Name list and the chosen one will be

NOTE
highlighted; then select a speed from the drop-
The user can only select a maximum of 6 down list of New Speed.
waveforms to be displayed on each patient sector.
Also, the number of displayed waveforms is
subject to the computer resolution.
NOTE
The user can only add or delete one waveform one
time.
NOTE
The paced symbol won’t be displayed on the CMS-
WEB observer.
Setting Multi-Bed Parameter

Select System Setup > Common Setup > Para In
Multi-bed; the user can set the physiological
parameters displayed onscreen. In this window, the Setting Language
left column displays the parameter names; the right
column displays the parameter names which have
been selected.
Language, click on and select a language
 Adding a parameter to be displayed from the drop-down list.
To add a displayed parameter, choose one from the
left column and click on Add so that it can be added NOTE
to the right column. To ensure the normal display of CMS-WEB, restart
 Deleting a displayed parameter the system after finishing the language
configuration.
To delete a displayed parameter, choose one from
the right column and click on Remove so that it can
be deleted from the screen. Administrator Setup
NOTE
The user can only select a maximum of four User Management
parameters to be displayed on each patient sector.
Select System Setup > Administrators Setup >
NOTE User Manage; the administrator can set the user
access authority.
The user can only add or delete one parameter
one time.  Creating a user
In the User Manage window, input the User
Setting Wave Speed Name, Name, User Type, Gender, Department
and so on, click on Insert and a new user will be
created. The default password for creating users is
WaveSpeed; the user can set the speed for a
selected waveform. Choose one waveform from 123456.

CMS-WEB Observer
 Deleting a user Setting Date/Time Format

Select a user to be deleted from the user list, click
Select System Setup > Administrators Setup >
on Delete and the user will be removed.
 Modifying user information TimeFormat, click on the button beside Date
Select a user whose information is to be modified Format or Time Format and select a format from
and enter new information for the user; then click the drop-down lists.
on Modify to complete the modification.
NOTE Setting Waveform Refresh Type
The administrator cannot modify his/her Select System Setup > Administrators Setup >
information here. Refresh Type; the user can set the refresh type of
the real-time waveforms. Two options are available:
 Resetting user password Pen Mode and Move Mode. Click on the button
Select a user whose password is to be reset and
click on Reset password; confirm it by clicking on and select one mode from the drop-down list.
Confirm on the pop-up dialog box. The password
will be reset to the default password.
Viewing Single Bed
Via the function of viewing single bed, the user can Click on Multi-lead in the window so that the user
check information of a patient. Click on any area of can view multiple channels of waveforms displayed
the patient sector and the user will access the onscreen. Click on it again to switch to single
single bed window. Available items including waveform display mode.
Patient Infor, Single Bed View, Wave Review,
 Freezing waveform
Alarm Review, Trend Review and NIBP Review
will be displayed onscreen. Click on Freeze in the window so that the user can
freeze the waveform displayed onscreen, which
may help analyze the waveform of interest. Click on
Patient Information Freeze again to unfreeze the waveform.
The user may check patient information via Patient

Infor window. CMS-WEB Observer displays the Waveform Review
patient information collected by Vista 120 CMS.
The user can only view the patient information via In the Wave Review window, the user can:
CMS-WEB but not modify them. The readings of
Height and Weight will vary with the unit selection.  Select waveforms;
Click on Print if the patient information is needed to  Set wave speed;
output.
 Refresh waveforms;
 Set the starting time for printing;
Single Bed View
 Print waveforms.
 Multi-waveform display

CMS-WEB Observer
The system allows to print the waveform with a Printing trend list: If the starting time is not set, the
maximum time of two minutes. If the starting time is system will output the latest data by default. If the
not set, the system will output the latest data by starting time is set, the system will start to output
default. If the starting time is set, the system will data at the point of the set time. The system allows
start to output data at the point of the set time. to output a maximum of 20000 pieces of data within
240 hours.
NOTE
The set starting time for printing will be invalid after
NOTE
the data is output.
The set starting time for printing will be invalid after
For more details about waveform review, refer to the data is output.
relevant content for Vista 120 CMS in Section
Wave Review. For more details about trend review, refer to
relevant content for Vista 120 CMS in Chapter
Review Section Trend Review.
Alarm Review
In the Alarm Review window, the user can: NIBP Review

 Refresh alarm information; In the NIBP Review window, up to 20000 groups of
 Print alarm list; NIBP measurements within 240 hours of an online
patient can be viewed.
 Print alarm strip.
The NIBP review window displays Serial No.,
For more details about alarm review, refer to Measure Time, SYS, DIA, MAP and PR for each
relevant content for Vista 120 CMS in Chapter measurement. Additionally, the user can:
Review Section Alarm Review.
 Refresh;
 Print.
Trend Review
NOTE
In the Trend Review window, the user can: Make sure a PDF reader has been installed in
thecomputer, which enables the user to preview
 Review trend data; and open the printing document.
 Set resolution;
NOTE
 Select parameters to be reviewed;
CMS-WEB only supports printing on A4 paper.
 Refresh data; Make sure the paper size is set to A4 in the printing
setup.
 Print trend graph and trend list;
 Set the display mode of the trend review NOTE
window; If the main menu is not displayed onscreen after
 Set the starting time for printing. clicking on the print button and return to the CMS-
WEB screen, check the browser setup. For Firefox
Printing trend graph: If the starting time is not set, browser, select Tools > Options > Tabs, and tick
the system will output the latest data by default. If the check box of Always show the tab bar.
the starting time is set, the system will start to
output data at the point of the set time. The system
allows to output a maximum of 600 pieces of data.

Safety
Safety
Control and safety index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Safety
Control and safety index
Windows 8/ Windows XP/Windows 7 workstation,

printer, UPS (optional), Keyboard, display and
mouse should accord with the corresponding safety
requirements. They are not suitable for installation
in the patients’ environment.
Characteristics
The standard Vista 120 CMS includes the following

characteristics:
 Up to 240 hours of trend data storage and
review
 Storage of patients’ history data
 96 or 240 hour full disclosure waveforms
 3 or 5-lead ECG display
 12-hour short trend data
 Printing report
 Monitoring 64 patients simultaneously with two
displays
 Transfer waveforms, parameters, alarms, etc.
NOTE
The configuration above is for reference only.

Maintenance
Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Cleaning the filter mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Maintenance
Overview
Every 24 months a regular inspection (functional If the product fails to function properly, or if
and safety check) according to IEC 60950 for the assistance is needed, for service and for spare
PC is recommended to be performed by trained parts, contact Dräger's service center. A
service personnel, in addition to national representative will assist in troubleshooting the
regulations and laws (for example, accident problem and will make every effort to solve it over
prevention regulations). the phone or e-mail, avoiding potential
unnecessary returns.
Dräger recommends that all repairs are carried out
by DrägerService and that only authentic Dräger If the user has any questions about maintenance,
repair parts are used. Using non-Dräger repair technical specifications, or malfunctions of devices,
parts may adversely affect the operation of the contact the local distributor.
device.
Cleaning the filter mat
Regular maintenance (dust cleaning) is A Front side of the KISS 4U V2 platform

recommended by users at least every four months.
B Filter mat
The filter mat is inserted in the filter mat holder at
C Filter mat holder with knurled screw
the front of the fan slide-in module. The soiling of
the filter mat is caused by the pollution of the D Fan slide-in module
operating environment. A heavily soiled filter mat
E Front access door
can cause excessive heating in the device. For this
reason it is recommended to clean the filter mat as To replace the filter mat, proceed as follows:
often as necessary. The filter mat can be changed
1 Open the front access door.
while the system is in operation.
2 Loosen the knurled screw that secures the filter
mat holder to the fan slide-in module.
3 Pull the filter mat holder out of the positioning
holes into the marked direction and lift it off.
4 Remove the soiled filter mat.
5 Clean the filter mat as follows:
 Rinse in water (up to approx. 40 °C; possibly
with the addition of a standard mild
detergent).
 It is also possible to beat the filter mat, to
vacuum it, or to blow it with compressed air.

Maintenance
 For dirt that contains grease or oil, rinse the

filter mat with warm water with the addition
of a degreaser. Filter mats should not be
cleaned with powerful water jets or be wrung
out.
6 After cleaning and drying the filter mat, place it
in the filter mat holder.
7 Reattach the filter mat holder to the front side of
the fan slide-in module by inserting the
positioning plates into the positioning holes.
8 Fix the filter mat holder by tightening the knurled
screw to the bolt with the tapped hole at the fan
slide-in module.
NOTE
Defective components may only be replaced by
Dräger original spare parts.
NOTE
The chapter of cleaning filter mat is only applicable
for the Hardware provided by Dräger.
NOTE
The UPS battery needs exchanging every two
years.


Accessories
Accessories
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Accessories
Accessories
Description Specification
Vista 120 CMS Host With Windows 7 embedded, central monitoring software, USB
key, industrial computer KTQ67/Flex
Vista 120 CMS Display 2 19" Check with Dräger for details.
Vista 120 CMS Display 3 22" Check with Dräger for details.
LAN switch Cisco 2960-24TC
LAN switch Cisco 2960-48TC (optional)
Printer 115 V/230 V (optional)
Extension cable mouse and keyboard 20 m (optional)

Specifications
Specifications
Recommended Hardware Configuration . . . 102
Software Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Specifications
Recommended Hardware Configuration
Components Requirements
System Meet the IEC/EN control requirements for ITE device
PC workstation CPU: Intel Core i3 Duo 3.0GHz or above
Memory: 4G or above
Hard disk: 500GB or above
Display interface: 2
LAN port: 1 or above
USB port: more than one
OS: Windows 7 Pro 32/64 bit
Windows 8 Pro 32/64 bit
Windows 10 Pro 32/64 bit
Keyboard PS/2 or USB keyboard with CE mark
Mouse PS/2 or USB mouse with CE mark
Display Specifications:
Dimensions (inch) Resolution (pixel)
22 1920X1080
19 (widescreen) 1440X900
*19 (regular-screen) 1280X1024
17 (regular-screen) 1280X1024
*Recommended
Quantity:
For 1 to32 bedside monitors one display
For 33 to 64 bedside monitors two displays
Printer LaserJet
UPS 1000 W

Specifications
Components Requirements
Network device Structure Ethernet 802.3
specifications
Device Network switch
Transmission rate 10M, 100M
Transmitted information Waveforms, parameters and
alarms of all networked bedside
monitors
Compatible monitors Patient monitors complying with
Dräger network protocol
Maximum number of networked 64
monitors
Speaker Built-in speaker is recommended.
Kontron system Compatible
CAUTION
Ensure that the computer hardware can meet the
requirements of the software installation and
running. Also, the video adapter, the audio
adapter, the network adapter and their respective
drivers should been installed well in the computer;
otherwise, the software may not run normally.
NOTE
The hardware specifications require the use of PC
that complies with IEC/EN requirements for ITE
equipment.
NOTE
The configuration mentioned above is for
reference and not permanent. Dräger preserves
the right to change and upgrade system settings.
NOTE
It is recommended to install the antivirus software
(recommend Kaspersky software) on the
computer which is used for Vista 120 CMS, and
also keep it updated in time.

Specifications
Software Performance
Trend 240-hour trend review for each bedside monitor;

12-hour short trend dynamic display for each bedside monitor;
Alarm events 240-hour alarm events for each bedside monitor (up to 20000
pieces)
Alarm type Physiological Alarm
Technical Alarm
Alarm mode 3 levels of audible and visual alarms
Waveform storage and review Up to 240-hour waveform for each bedside monitor 96-hour is the
default selection.
NIBP measurement storage 240-hour NIBP measurement for each bedside monitor (up to 20000
and review pieces)
C.O. measurements 240-hour C.O. measurement for each bedside monitor (up to 20000
pieces)
Quick TEMP measurements 240-hour Quick TEMP measurement for each bedside monitor (up
to 20000 pieces)
PAWP measurements 240-hour PAWP measurement for each bedside monitor (up to
20000 pieces)
CAUTION
Network configuration should strictly comply with
the recommended requirements.
CAUTION
Vista 120/Vista 120S is the only officially
appointed monitor for the CMS.
CAUTION
Some bedside monitors may not appear on the
CMS screen when the number of monitors
exceeds 64 monitors.

Vista 120 CMS System Alarms and Prompts
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Alarms
Display
Alarms Cause Solution
Color
Refer to Section History Patient

Review and delete the out-of-
Database is full, it
date patient data. Or refer to
can't store new data, Less than 2 G space is left in
Section Database Backup to
please discharge or the disk for data store.
back up the data in another disk
delete patient.
and delete the data in the
current database.
The host in which Vista 120 Check the connection of the
Network is CMS software is installed is network cable and ensure the
disconnected! not connected with the cable is well connected to the
Red network cable. host.
Vista 120 CMS is in the status Refer to Section Alarm Mute for
Alarm Mute
of alarm mute. information about alarm mute.
The audio adapter driver is Log out of Vista 120 CMS and
No Audio card!
not installed in the host. install the audio adapter driver.
The video adapter driver is Log out of Vista 120 CMS and
No Video card!
not installed in the host. install the video adapter driver.
Refer to Section Audio Pause
Vista 120 CMS is in the status
Audio Pause for information about alarm
of alarm pause.
pause.

Prompts
Display
Prompts Cause Solution
Color
Refer to Section History Patient
Review and delete the out-of-
Database is full, date patient data. Or refer to
Less than 10 G space is left in
please discharge Section Database Backup to
the disk for data store.
or delete patient. back up the data in another disk
and delete the data in the current
database.
Collecting
Real-time printing /
Data…
White
Remind the user to admit the
Number of Refer to Section Admitting a
patients who has been
pending Patient for information about
connected to Vista 120 CMS but
patients: admitting patients.
has not been admitted.
No monitor is connected to the
No bed is online.
Vista 120 CMS because no Check if the cable is well
Please check the
monitor is connected to the connected with the monitor and
network
network or the network setup is with the switch.
connecting
incorrect.
Please clean the history patient
The system will display a prompt
Please clear data manually in time. (please
White when there is excessive amount
history patient refer to chapter Database
of history patient data.
Backup for detailed operations)



These instructions for use only apply to
Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n
with the Serial No.:
If no Serial No. has been filled in by Dräger,
these instructions for use are provided for
general information only and are not intended for
use with any specific machine or unit.
This document is provided for customer
information only, and will not be updated or
exchanged without customer request.
Directive 93/42/EEC
concerning Medical Devices
Manufacturer:
Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA

Moislinger Allee 53 – 55
D-23542 Lübeck
Germany
+49 451 8 82-0
FAX +49 451 8 82-20 80
http://www.draeger.com
26 80 051 – GA 6498.020 en
© Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA
Edition: 8 – 2019-07
(Edition: 1 – 2012-12)
Dräger reserves the right to make modifications
to the equipment without prior notice.

Dokumen - Tips Vista 120120 Cms 22 Draeger 10 Instructions For Use Vista 120vista

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dokumen - Tips Vista 120120 Cms 22 Draeger 10 Instructions For Use Vista 120vista

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for use

Vista 120/Vista 120S

WARNING Patient Monitor

Vista 120/Vista 120S

2 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Schematic renderings of screen images are used,

Definition of the safety information

Abbreviations and symbols

For explanations refer to sections “Abbreviations”

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 3

4 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Responsibility of the Manufacturer . . . . . . . 9 Changing monitor settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Initial inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Managing patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 5

Displaying the timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

6 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

C.O. Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Trend graph review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 7

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

EMC Declaration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

8 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Responsibility of the Manufacturer

Responsibility of the Manufacturer . . . . . . . 10

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 9

Responsibility of the Manufacturer

Dräger only considers itself responsible for any

10 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

For your safety and that of your patients

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Product-specific safety information . . . . . . . 15

Protecting Personal Information. . . . . . . . . . 21

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 11

General safety information

The following WARNING and CAUTION Maintenance

12 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Connected devices Patient safety

WARNING The design of the medical device, the

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 13

WARNING Strictly observe Assembly Instructions and

14 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Product-specific safety information

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 15

16 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 17

18 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 19

20 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Protecting Personal Information

Protecting personal health information is a major CAUTION

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 21

22 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

For more security operations, select Menu > User

 Set Firewall to On to protect against hacker

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 23

24 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n

Restrictions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n 25

Restrictions for use

Users of this device must be trained and

26 Instructions for use Vista 120/Vista 120S SW 3.n